#if you also went to west bend hit me up!
Explore tagged Tumblr posts
elprupneerg · 2 hours ago
Text
at risk of doxxing myself: i went there! yes, the high schools are conjoined twins.
most of the building is symmetrical along an invisible line (with the auditorium, music area, and gyms being weird growths that ruin the symmetry, its fine). anything on the east half of the invisible line was East high, anything on the west half was West high. which school a teacher was officially employed by depended on which half of that dividing line their classroom was on. so my French teacher had her paychecks officially come from East while my German teacher had his paychecks officially come from West. i still took classes on both sides of the school even though i officially only attended one of them.
there were technically separate departments for math, English, science, and social studies classes, but they ultimately followed the same school district rules and tried to mostly keep education the same between both schools. my freshman biology class was in West, so my class dissected fetal pigs, while the freshman biology classes in East that year dissected rats iirc (might've been frogs? it wasn't pigs though). but we both did our dissection unit at the same time of year after having learned from the same textbooks and having done roughly equivalent homework.
school pride was always a weird thing. people seemed to expect us to be more invested, but its a bit hard to see the kids from the other team as "the enemy" when you're in the same theater program. especially since half our clubs and teams were combined anyway. there were separate teams for most sports since there were enough students from both schools to run 2 teams. but the anime club, gay-straight alliance, student council, school newspaper, marching band, and plenty of other clubs/activities/classes were all combined. there was still a lot of participation in school spirit week since it usually meant wearing silly costumes, but there wasn't that same sort of intense feeling people seem to have in movies. my dad still has his varsity jacket from his own high school days hanging up in his closet, and his high school yearbooks were full of little drawings of the school mascot. that wasn't really the case for anyone i knew in school.
at one point when i was in school they were talking about combining our schools again. they wanted to take the East Suns (maroon and gold) and the West Spartans (blue and white) and combine the mascots and colors into the Sunny Spartans (maroon and blue). this would've made our football team have a shot at not being in last place in our district sports tournaments (East and West regularly fight for last place), but it would've given a lot less kids a chance at actually playing. and for sports where both teams were actually genuinely good? it would've messed up people's abilities to get scholarships. similar issues around recognition of academic achievement (and also the combined mascot and color scheme being ugly) meant that they remained separate.
i've had people ask me how administration was split up between the schools. i'd love to answer, except i happened to go during a period where the superintendents kept quitting and the principals kept getting shuffled around. there were always at least 5-6 principals, but the exact number/who filled the exact role depended on who'd quit last iirc. it was a bit chaotic and i remember being very frustrated with it even as a student that didn't really have to actually deal with them.
our graduation ceremonies were separate, and Thank Fuck For That. all the ceremonies are so long already even with it being split into 2 schools. one of the valedictorians at my brother's graduation had a speech that lasted 45 minutes. there were about 200-300 students getting their names called to walk on stage. there was barely enough room in the auditorium/gym (location depended on if you were East or West) for all the guests. the air conditioning was not made for this many people to be crammed into one side of the school for this long so its also hot and sweaty as fuck. i'm trying to imagine the nightmarish hell of dealing with all of that while also having to wait for roughly 500 students to walk across the stage. and they're all wearing maroon and blue and getting called, i cannot stress this enough, the Sunny fucking Spartans, i genuinely do not know who thought that was a good idea but they need to stop having ideas. my school pride goes so far as getting called either a spartan OR a sun, Not Both.
as far as i'm aware it was otherwise basically the same as attending any other particularly large high school. there was just technically 2 of them
remembering that time i met someone who attended high school in west bend, wisconsin and they told me how their school district works. to them it was completely normal while i was wondering if they were messing with me.
Tumblr media
their schools are conjoined twins???
8K notes · View notes
bandgie · 2 years ago
Text
Beast of a Man
Smut!Tarzan
Synopsis: You were on an expedition with a team to investigate ape behavior. After setting off a booby-trap accidentally, it's not your team that finds you, but an ape-like man. Is he the missing link anthropologists have been looking for? You need to take him back to camp, and you're thinking of luring him in by more than one way.
A/N: I dont give a fuck if this movie is older than me this man is HOT no one talks about him and im SICK of it.
3.9k words
Tumblr media
You take a deep breath through your nose and exhale through your mouth. You were growing irritated. You were somewhere in West Africa sweating your balls off (if you had any) trying to follow where the shrewdness of apes went. They had a tendency to relocate to avoid predators, and they happened to the night you slept in.
You didn't bother asking your team to help you look. You all have been up doing your notes for your dissertation and you decided that they deserved some shut eye. You were tempted to ask the person who was guiding you through the jungles, but the language barrier made you decide not to. Too much work, but the apes couldn't have gone far right?
Since it was blazing, you decided to wear some white shorts and a tan button up shirt completed with a safari hat on top. You made sure your bag was packed with snacks and water before leaving. Of course, you also brought your hunting knife. You prayed it wouldn't be necessary to use, but being out in the open made you a prey to all sorts of things.
You started your journey, keeping close to the trail you were familiar with. You started East since that's where the sun rises, praying that they would be there. You weren't sure how long you walking for until you finally found a piece of ape hair. You gasp excitedly and bent down to grab it, you were getting close.
You wiped the sweat from your forearms and continued forward with new resolution. You were going to find the nest and since it's still early afternoon, you might even be able to see-
"Ahh!" you screamed. Something tightened around your foot and you went up in the air upside, hitting your head on the ground in the process. A pained groan left your lips as you opened your eyes. You were hanging upside down by one of your ankles.
"Aw shit..." you cursed, looking up to see your foot tangled in...vine? Your eyebrows furrowed, wouldn't it have been better to use rope? Maybe your team put this here as a trap, or maybe it was the locals to catch some animals. You felt stupid as you reached upwards to grab your foot and get yourself loose.
Which was much harder than you initially thought. It was too far for you too reach and when you did manage to grasp your ankle, pain would surge from your lower back to your neck as you continued to awkwardly bend your body. Your head was pounding, blood drumming your ears before you finally gave up. They'll find you, you just have to be patient.
"HELP!" You yelled, voice echoing in the trees. You started calling your team by names, then last names. You felt your eyes water in frustration, thinking about how stupid you were to travel alone.
Granted you couldn't be that far from the trail, maybe 6 miles. But you don't know how much longer you could stand being upside down. Then it hit you, your knife! A sound of relief escaped you as your reached behind your back to grab your knife. Only your bag wasn't there. It must've flown off when you were thrusted into the air because it was 20 feet away from you on the ground.
Now you were going to really cry. No, that won't help, you think, I just need to keep yelling, but should you? Here you are alone in the jungle, making all these noises. What if you attract a predator. The thought makes you stop.
You take deep breaths as a way to keep your cool. You'll be fine, they'll find you, you just need to wa- a crunch distracts your thoughts. Your eyes try to find from where the sound came from, turning your head frantically around.
"Hello?" You call, gentle. You're not sure if it's your people, but from the lack of response you doubt it is. The crunching gets faster and louder, you hold your breath in and prepare for an animals to jump our and devour you.
Instead, a man emerges from bushes, a naked man. Almost naked, save for the piece of cloth that wraps around his waist. You narrow your eyes, unable to comprehend what you're seeing. He doesn't look like he natives that live here. The main thing to give it away is the way he walks, or more like knuckle-walking. He scoots closer to your, eyes intensely staring at you. He quadrupedaly walks to you, and you scream.
He wildly moves back, hooting as a response. You thrash around, fear bubbling in your stomach. "No! Fuck off! Go away!"
He knuckle-walks around you, inspecting to see if you're an actual threat. You're not of course, you're tied and on the verge of fainting from being upside for so long. It doesn't take long for the ape-man to realize it and come within 3 inches of your face. You stop moving and stare into his eyes. He's actually... beautiful. Looking past the dirt on his body and his tangled hair, he had a strong jaw and a large nose with a bump at the bridge. He had high cheekbones, thick eyebrows, and deep eyes. Not to mention he was staring at you in the same way, only 100x more intense. He was looking at you like you're the only woman he's ever seen, maybe the only person he's ever seen period.
His hand reaches to touch your face, his fingers gently play with your features. Starting with the nose, eyes, eyelashes, ears, then your lips. He touches his own afterwards as if comparing them. He grunts to himself as if he's talking outloud.
His hands get more explosive, moving to your neck. His hands keep traveling until they feel your breasts, he stops. He feels his own chest and a look of confusion crosses his face. When he goes back to feel your body, you thrash.
"No!"
Your stern voice makes him take a step back, but he knows you're not a real threat. He moves back to his original place and touches your top, playing with the buttons. Sweat starts to drips off your neck to the ground, you don't know how much longer you can stand this position.
His hands discover that you can unbutton these little circles, and that's exactly was he does. He doesn't even notice the bra that holds your tits, his focus completely on the shirt. When he does, his hands take no shame in touching some more.
His touch is so gentle that you instinctively puff your chest closer to him. His fingertips travel from one breast to the other, not knowing your bra can also come off.
Wait, why are you thinking about him taking off your bra? You don't know this man, if he even is a man. But the way he touches you is addicting. You love the softness of it, how he touches you as if you're the most fragile thing on this Earth.
You gently use your hands to grasp his, he jumps at the contact and look back at your eyes. You guide him to the inside of your bra, having your tits spill out. His eyes widen is surprise, as if he's never seen such a complicated contraption. He looks at his chest quickly and back at yours. He starts grabbing them and kneading them, enjoying the softness you have.
He grunts in what seems like approval. He sees you nipples harden from his touches and he pinches them. You moan in response, though you think you're just groaning from pain. You're going to blame your behavior on the lack of blood supply in your brain, but right now the dampness in your underwear is more important.
You use your hands to take off the rest of your shirt and bra, completely topless to him. This man was so entranced by your body that you have to use your hands to make him look at your face. You point to the vine that has you hostage.
"Help me down, and I'll help you," you don't even know if he can understand you, but he must because he climbs a nearby tree and loosens the knot. You fall with a thud and groan, finally feeling the extra blood leave your head.
The man climbs on top of you and looks into your eyes as if he's asking something. You nod, already knowing what he wants. You guide the back of his head back to your tits and he gratefully pops a nipple in his mouth. His hands are on either side of you, possessively keeping you under him. Your hands tangle in his hair and he continues to suck.
You hum and squeeze your legs together, wetness gathering between your legs. He releases your boob with the small pop! and goes to the other side, letting his tongue roll over your nipple. You use your hand to grab his, placing it on your other boob. He gets the message and starts massaging your boob while keeping the other in his mouth.
You moan and grind your body against his, trying to get some friction. The need in your pussy is almost unbearable, you want it to to touched, paid attention to, but you hold back. You don't want to make a decision you would regret, but you're not sure if anything you're doing is helping with that.
He suddenly stops, a whine leaving your lips when he does. He closes his eyes and inhales, looking all over your body. His smells different parts of your body, shoving his nose between your breasts.
"What?" You ask, suddenly self-conscious. The beast of a man travels down you stomach, down your navel, occasionally sticking his tongue out to taste you. Then he stops at your shorts, eyes looking into yours.
He puts his attention back onto your clothes, attempting to take them off himself. He sees the familiar button on the top of your shorts and decides he should start there. You're amazed at his intelligence. He may not be verbal, but he has amazing innovative and cognitive ability.
Your thoughts are pulled away as he manages to do the same to your shorts. He tugs them all the way down to you ankles and stares at the spot he's been aching to devour. You know you must not have the best taste considering how much you were sweating but 30 minutes prior, but this man couldn't care less. He leaned down to your core and took a deep breath, groaning as he did. His hands gripped your thighs and he squeezed them. You whimpered at his touch, opening your legs to give him better access to your pussy.
You were soaking, you could feel you essence dripping down to your body and the way you're underwear felt cold against the wind. The ape-man went it, licking your wetness and widening your legs even more. He bent your legs forwards, folding your back so you knees were almost touching your face.
You squealed at the movement never being in this position. It was pretty uncomfortable, but the way his hands held your legs by your under thighs made your stomach coil in anticipation. He used his tongue more than anything, not knowing that he could so much more.
He used his muscle to collect the remaining drool your pussy produced, trying to find the source. He was beginning to get irritated, but little did he know that your underwear was covering his desire. A part of you loved watching him struggle, but the need for him directly on you was stronger. You reached your arms around your hips and moved your underwear to the side, using your thumb to rub yourself in circles.
You tapped your pussy, making sure it made wet noises to get his attention. "Here, do it here."
The man stopped for a second, bewitched by the sight of your dripping folds and pulsing pussy. He had never seen anything like it, like a rare cuisine he was lucky enough to stumble upon. He experimentally stuck his tongue out to taste you. You hummed in satisfaction and used your fingers to spread yourself. He let your taste settle on his tastebuds, licking his lips hungrily as he decided that this was the best meal he was ever going to have.
He pushed your legs further back and buried his face into you. You moaned as his tongue shot out all over your pussy, smearing both of you juices all around. The ape man moved his face up and down against you, his large nose occasionally touching the bud of your clit.
You squirmed when he did and he noticed your behavior. He moved his tongue up to flick your bundle of nerves and you jolted. An intrigued smile found his lips as he continued his movements. It was too much, you were too sensitive and you instinctively yanked on his hair to pull him away.
You moaned in relief, but the man above you was anything but. He grabbed your hands held them down to your sides, using his chest and face to keep you in your bent position. As if to show you that he wasn't happy with your action, he ate you out brutally. He used his teeth to gently scape against your clitoris, a move he shortly found out gave him the best response.
"No no it's too much! Stop im sorry im sorry!" You cry. You pleas fell on deaf ears. He sucked hard on your bud, stretching it as he pulled away. A loud cry left out lips and he finally stopped to look at you. Your legs were shaking, sweat all over your body, back aching, and tears falling.
He gently let your legs fall so you were flat on the ground. A small sob and thank you left you as your legs closed together. The man closely looked at your face and licked your tears away, an apology. His hands soothingly went through your hair with a look of slight worry on his face.
He had such an intense gaze, you thought he would kiss you if he knew how. You sat up and put your hands on his chest, having him lay on the ground this time. Your eyes found the tent that formed in his patch of cloth. You smiled and had your hands explore his chest. He eyes you warily, not used to being under anyone or anything.
A devious smile played on your lips as you leaned down and kissed his ear, "My turn."
You sat back up and scooted down so you could place yourself between his legs, eagerly lifting off his little wrap so you could see his glory. Your eyes widened at his cock. He was so thick, veins wrapping around his length. The tip was a pretty pink, a sharp contrast to his tanned dick. You felt you mouth salivate at him and you leaned down to place a kiss on his tip.
He groaned, thrusting his hips up to feel you more. You playfully tsked and shook your head, "So impatient."
You got on all fours to be face-to-face with him, hands playing his thighs. You kissed over his pelvis, his bush, his inner thighs, anywhere besides the one place where he wanted you most. His hands went outwards besides him to grasp onto the ground beneath him. You could tell from the way he was straining and groaning, he was holding back from grasping your head. You blushed at his consideration, he's kind of a gentleman.
You decide to thank him by finally taking him into your mouth, making sure your tongue covers his slit and slowly bobbing your head up and down. He thanks you by whining, a sound that's going to forever imprint in your brain. You use one hand to keep on his stomach and the other to wrap around his shaft. You worked in one fluid motion, tasting his salty pre-cum and feeling you spit dribble out of your mouth onto your hand.
You really wanted to test your limits to see how far you could take him, but know with his girth that would be difficult. You still decided to try anyway, moving your hand to play with his balls and pulling your mouth out. He huffed in protest and looked up at you, eyes hazy.
You made sure to gather enough spit and drool over his cock. You relaxed your jaw and went back in. You took a deep breath through your nose and keep sliding down. You gagged when his tip hit you throat, but he still more than halfway to go. You closed your eyes and willed your head forward, mouth opening almost painfully.
Your pussy throbbed in excitement, imagining that it was getting stretched out instead of your mouth. The man beneath you broke, hands grasping the sides of your head and shoving you down. You violently gagged around him, eyes pooling with tears. Your nose tickled his bushy pelvis. You looked up at him to plead to let you go, but seeing your begging eyes and cock covered mouth did the opposite to him. He used your mouth as a cock sleeve, harshly dragging your lips up and down his length.
Your hands gripped his thighs, he was going so hard and fast you started thinking you were going to throw up. You eyes rolled to the back of your head you felt your pussy drip down your thighs. You've never been used by this, and you never wanted it to stop. You could probably just cum from giving him head, but your need for air was starting to get the better of you.
It took both of your hands to rip away one of his before you finally popped your mouth off his dick, gasping and coughing for air. The ape-man sat up, finally recognizing that you were on the verge of passing out. He brushed the air out your face and cradled your face into his hands. He watched as you steadied your breath, holding you close to him.
Never had a man treated you with such care and such disregard at the same time, it went straight to your aching core. You adjusted so you were straddling his lap, hands gripping his shoulders. He wasn't sure what you were doing, but when he felt your folds grind against his cock he knew what you wanted.
You grabbed the base of cock, moved your underwear to the side, and smeared hit tip over your clit. Both of you hummed in unison, his grip tightening on your hips. You moved your legs so you were in a squatting position, preparing yourself to take him in.
He patiently waited as you dipped the tip of dick cock into your pussy, shivers enveloping your body. His face twisted in unfamiliar pleasure, teeth gritting. You put more of your weight on him, sinking more and more onto his cock before you finally felt him fully in your gut. Your eyes rolled back placed your head in the crook of his neck breathless. Once you adjusted, you softly bounced on him, feeling his teeth and tongue get a feel of you exposed neck and ear. He growled approvingly once you started moving more aggressively.
One of his large hands went into your scalp, yanking your hair back to bare your throat at him. A part of you grew scared, but the way he was drooling out of the corner of his lip made you bounce with more determination. He bit the base of your throat making you cry out, then licked it apologetically. He didn't know that his nips at your neck distracted you, so when you slowed your movements down he grew upset. Taking matter into his own hands, he grabbed your ass and slammed you down hard.
You yelped, picking your head up as you looked into his eyes. He has a certain glaze over his eyes, as if he wasn't really looking at you. You leaned back to show a better view of where your bodies connected, his eyes immediately went there.
This must've been some encouragement for him because he started thrusting upwards too. The pleasure was too much, twisting your gut and providing a fiery sensation in your stomach. You whimpered and wrapped your arms around his neck for better support. You let him abuse your pussy, not caring about how he ripped your underwear off to properly see himself pound into you.
"Fuuuuuck," you moaned, "you feel so good." He had no reaction to your words, but you didn't care. He was going to bruise your hips form how hard he was holding you, but you were so close to finishing that none of that mattered.
You used one of your hands to rub your clit, attempting to finish faster. Your whines got louder and more frequent, he did the same. You tried not being loud, but you almost screamed when you came. He felt the way your walls squeezed around him and how your juices flowed out. He watched as your body nearly went limp, putting all your weight against him.
He took his opportunity to slam his cock all the way down into you until you could feel him kiss your cervix. You don't know if the noises you were making could count as moaning, but he frankly couldn't give less of a shit.
Finally, you felt the sweet warmth of his orgasm filling you up. You squeezed around him again and he moaned, wrapping his arms around your torso to make sure you didn't move from him. He couldn't stop leaking inside you as you felt some of it dribble out and possible drip down his balls.
You could tell he didn't want to pull out, satisfied with letting his cock soften between your legs. The thought to let it happen was tempting, but you already let a strange man fuck and cum inside you. There had to be some morals left.
You lifted your head up from his neck and pushed away from him. He huffed in defiance, content with his current position. You untangled yourself form him and wobbled upwards, standing. He slowly got up and looked around as if he was looking for something. Then he crawled over to your torn underwear, grabbing and putting it up to his face. You laughed as he took a deep breath, inhaling your scent like he couldn't get enough.
Once you had your top on, you walked over to him and stuck your hand out for him to give it back. Rather than obeying he growled, not threateningly, but rather in resistance. You sighed and decided going comando would be your only option.
Then an idea popped into you mind. It would be such a waste to leave a man here who seemed to listen to almost your every word. Who you could mold into the perfect fuck. Plus, you needed to study apes anyway and he seemed like the perfect willing participant.
You squatted down to his level and gently ran your fingers through his long, tangled hair. He closed his eyes and leaned into your touch. Oh yeah, you think, a perfect candidate.
You gently tapped the underwear in his hands and his eyes shot back open into yours. "Ya know," you started, "I have more of those back at camp. Wanna see?"
a/n: part 2 here
2K notes · View notes
mxamalgam · 6 months ago
Text
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain
Table of Contents
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer.............................................................................................................................1
Mark Twain....................................................................................................................................................2
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
i
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer 1
Mark Twain
P R E F A C E
MOST of the adventures recorded in this book really occurred; one or two were experiences of my own, the
rest those of boys who were schoolmates of mine. Huck Finn is drawn from life; Tom Sawyer also, but not from
an individual −− he is a combination of the characteristics of three boys whom I knew, and therefore belongs to
the composite order of architecture.
The odd superstitions touched upon were all prevalent among children and slaves in the West at the period of
this story −− that is to say, thirty or forty years ago.
Although my book is intended mainly for the entertainment of boys and girls, I hope it will not be shunned by
men and women on that account, for part of my plan has been to try to pleasantly remind adults of what they once
were themselves, and of how they felt and thought and talked, and what queer enterprises they sometimes
engaged in.
THE AUTHOR.
HARTFORD, 1876.
T O M S A W Y E R
CHAPTER I
"TOM!"
No answer.
"TOM!"
No answer.
"What's gone with that boy, I wonder? You TOM!"
No answer.
The old lady pulled her spectacles down and looked over them about the room; then she put them up and
looked out under them. She seldom or never looked THROUGH them for so small a thing as a boy; they were her
state pair, the pride of her heart, and were built for "style," not service −− she could have seen through a pair of
stove−lids just as well. She looked perplexed for a moment, and then said, not fiercely, but still loud enough for
the furniture to hear:
"Well, I lay if I get hold of you I'll −−"
She did not finish, for by this time she was bending down and punching under the bed with the broom, and so
she needed breath to punctuate the punches with. She resurrected nothing but the cat.
"I never did see the beat of that boy!"
She went to the open door and stood in it and looked out among the tomato vines and "jimpson" weeds that
constituted the garden. No Tom. So she lifted up her voice at an angle calculated for distance and shouted:
"Y−o−u−u TOM!"
There was a slight noise behind her and she turned just in time to seize a small boy by the slack of his
roundabout and arrest his flight.
"There! I might 'a' thought of that closet. What you been doing in there?"
"Nothing."
"Nothing! Look at your hands. And look at your mouth. What IS that truck?"
"I don't know, aunt."
"Well, I know. It's jam −− that's what it is. Forty times I've said if you didn't let that jam alone I'd skin you.
Hand me that switch."
The switch hovered in the air −− the peril was desperate −−
"My! Look behind you, aunt!"
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 2
The old lady whirled round, and snatched her skirts out of danger. The lad fled on the instant, scrambled up the
high board−fence, and disappeared over it.
His aunt Polly stood surprised a moment, and then broke into a gentle laugh.
"Hang the boy, can't I never learn anything? Ain't he played me tricks enough like that for me to be looking out
for him by this time? But old fools is the biggest fools there is. Can't learn an old dog new tricks, as the saying is.
But my goodness, he never plays them alike, two days, and how is a body to know what's coming? He 'pears to
know just how long he can torment me before I get my dander up, and he knows if he can make out to put me off
for a minute or make me laugh, it's all down again and I can't hit him a lick. I ain't doing my duty by that boy, and
that's the Lord's truth, goodness knows. Spare the rod and spile the child, as the Good Book says. I'm a laying up
sin and suffering for us both, I know. He's full of the Old Scratch, but laws−a−me! he's my own dead sister's boy,
poor thing, and I ain't got the heart to lash him, somehow. Every time I let him off, my conscience does hurt me
so, and every time I hit him my old heart most breaks. Well−a−well, man that is born of woman is of few days
and full of trouble, as the Scripture says, and I reckon it's so. He'll play hookey this evening, * and [*
Southwestern for "afternoon"] I'll just be obleeged to make him work, to−morrow, to punish him. It's mighty hard
to make him work Saturdays, when all the boys is having holiday, but he hates work more than he hates anything
else, and I've GOT to do some of my duty by him, or I'll be the ruination of the child."
Tom did play hookey, and he had a very good time. He got back home barely in season to help Jim, the small
colored boy, saw next−day's wood and split the kindlings before supper −− at least he was there in time to tell his
adventures to Jim while Jim did three−fourths of the work. Tom's younger brother (or rather half−brother) Sid
was already through with his part of the work (picking up chips), for he was a quiet boy, and had no adventurous,
troublesome ways.
While Tom was eating his supper, and stealing sugar as opportunity offered, Aunt Polly asked him questions
that were full of guile, and very deep −− for she wanted to trap him into damaging revealments. Like many other
simple−hearted souls, it was her pet vanity to believe she was endowed with a talent for dark and mysterious
diplomacy, and she loved to contemplate her most transparent devices as marvels of low cunning. Said she:
"Tom, it was middling warm in school, warn't it?"
"Yes'm."
"Powerful warm, warn't it?"
"Yes'm."
"Didn't you want to go in a−swimming, Tom?"
A bit of a scare shot through Tom −− a touch of uncomfortable suspicion. He searched Aunt Polly's face, but it
told him nothing. So he said:
"No'm −− well, not very much."
The old lady reached out her hand and felt Tom's shirt, and said:
"But you ain't too warm now, though." And it flattered her to reflect that she had discovered that the shirt was
dry without anybody knowing that that was what she had in her mind. But in spite of her, Tom knew where the
wind lay, now. So he forestalled what might be the next move:
"Some of us pumped on our heads −− mine's damp yet. See?"
Aunt Polly was vexed to think she had overlooked that bit of circumstantial evidence, and missed a trick. Then
she had a new inspiration:
"Tom, you didn't have to undo your shirt collar where I sewed it, to pump on your head, did you? Unbutton
your jacket!"
The trouble vanished out of Tom's face. He opened his jacket. His shirt collar was securely sewed.
"Bother! Well, go 'long with you. I'd made sure you'd played hookey and been a−swimming. But I forgive ye,
Tom. I reckon you're a kind of a singed cat, as the saying is −− better'n you look. THIS time."
She was half sorry her sagacity had miscarried, and half glad that Tom had stumbled into obedient conduct for
once.
But Sidney said:
"Well, now, if I didn't think you sewed his collar with white thread, but it's black."
"Why, I did sew it with white! Tom!"
But Tom did not wait for the rest. As he went out at the door he said:
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 3
"Siddy, I'll lick you for that."
In a safe place Tom examined two large needles which were thrust into the lapels of his jacket, and had thread
bound about them −− one needle carried white thread and the other black. He said:
"She'd never noticed if it hadn't been for Sid. Confound it! sometimes she sews it with white, and sometimes
she sews it with black. I wish to geeminy she'd stick to one or t'other −− I can't keep the run of 'em. But I bet you
I'll lam Sid for that. I'll learn him!"
He was not the Model Boy of the village. He knew the model boy very well though −− and loathed him.
Within two minutes, or even less, he had forgotten all his troubles. Not because his troubles were one whit less
heavy and bitter to him than a man's are to a man, but because a new and powerful interest bore them down and
drove them out of his mind for the time −− just as men's misfortunes are forgotten in the excitement of new
enterprises. This new interest was a valued novelty in whistling, which he had just acquired from a negro, and he
was suffering to practise it undisturbed. It consisted in a peculiar bird−like turn, a sort of liquid warble, produced
by touching the tongue to the roof of the mouth at short intervals in the midst of the music −− the reader probably
remembers how to do it, if he has ever been a boy. Diligence and attention soon gave him the knack of it, and he
strode down the street with his mouth full of harmony and his soul full of gratitude. He felt much as an
astronomer feels who has discovered a new planet −− no doubt, as far as strong, deep, unalloyed pleasure is
concerned, the advantage was with the boy, not the astronomer.
The summer evenings were long. It was not dark, yet. Presently Tom checked his whistle. A stranger was
before him −− a boy a shade larger than himself. A new−comer of any age or either sex was an impressive
curiosity in the poor little shabby village of St. Petersburg. This boy was well dressed, too −− well dressed on a
week−day. This was simply astounding. His cap was a dainty thing, his closebuttoned blue cloth roundabout was
new and natty, and so were his pantaloons. He had shoes on −− and it was only Friday. He even wore a necktie, a
bright bit of ribbon. He had a citified air about him that ate into Tom's vitals. The more Tom stared at the splendid
marvel, the higher he turned up his nose at his finery and the shabbier and shabbier his own outfit seemed to him
to grow. Neither boy spoke. If one moved, the other moved −− but only sidewise, in a circle; they kept face to
face and eye to eye all the time. Finally Tom said:
"I can lick you!"
"I'd like to see you try it."
"Well, I can do it."
"No you can't, either."
"Yes I can."
"No you can't."
"I can."
"You can't."
"Can!"
"Can't!"
An uncomfortable pause. Then Tom said:
"What's your name?"
"'Tisn't any of your business, maybe."
"Well I 'low I'll MAKE it my business."
"Well why don't you?"
"If you say much, I will."
"Much −− much −− MUCH. There now."
"Oh, you think you're mighty smart, DON'T you? I could lick you with one hand tied behind me, if I wanted
to."
"Well why don't you DO it? You SAY you can do it."
"Well I WILL, if you fool with me."
"Oh yes −− I've seen whole families in the same fix."
"Smarty! You think you're SOME, now, DON'T you? Oh, what a hat!"
"You can lump that hat if you don't like it. I dare you to knock it off −− and anybody that'll take a dare will
suck eggs."
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 4
"You're a liar!"
"You're another."
"You're a fighting liar and dasn't take it up."
"Aw −− take a walk!"
"Say −− if you give me much more of your sass I'll take and bounce a rock off'n your head."
"Oh, of COURSE you will."
"Well I WILL."
"Well why don't you DO it then? What do you keep SAYING you will for? Why don't you DO it? It's because
you're afraid."
"I AIN'T afraid."
"You are."
"I ain't."
"You are."
Another pause, and more eying and sidling around each other. Presently they were shoulder to shoulder. Tom
said:
"Get away from here!"
"Go away yourself!"
"I won't."
"I won't either."
So they stood, each with a foot placed at an angle as a brace, and both shoving with might and main, and
glowering at each other with hate. But neither could get an advantage. After struggling till both were hot and
flushed, each relaxed his strain with watchful caution, and Tom said:
"You're a coward and a pup. I'll tell my big brother on you, and he can thrash you with his little finger, and I'll
make him do it, too."
"What do I care for your big brother? I've got a brother that's bigger than he is −− and what's more, he can
throw him over that fence, too." [Both brothers were imaginary.]
"That's a lie."
"YOUR saying so don't make it so."
Tom drew a line in the dust with his big toe, and said:
"I dare you to step over that, and I'll lick you till you can't stand up. Anybody that'll take a dare will steal
sheep."
The new boy stepped over promptly, and said:
"Now you said you'd do it, now let's see you do it."
"Don't you crowd me now; you better look out."
"Well, you SAID you'd do it −− why don't you do it?"
"By jingo! for two cents I WILL do it."
The new boy took two broad coppers out of his pocket and held them out with derision. Tom struck them to
the ground. In an instant both boys were rolling and tumbling in the dirt, gripped together like cats; and for the
space of a minute they tugged and tore at each other's hair and clothes, punched and scratched each other's nose,
and covered themselves with dust and glory. Presently the confusion took form, and through the fog of battle Tom
appeared, seated astride the new boy, and pounding him with his fists. "Holler 'nuff!" said he.
The boy only struggled to free himself. He was crying −− mainly from rage.
"Holler 'nuff!" −− and the pounding went on.
At last the stranger got out a smothered "'Nuff!" and Tom let him up and said:
"Now that'll learn you. Better look out who you're fooling with next time."
The new boy went off brushing the dust from his clothes, sobbing, snuffling, and occasionally looking back
and shaking his head and threatening what he would do to Tom the "next time he caught him out." To which Tom
responded with jeers, and started off in high feather, and as soon as his back was turned the new boy snatched up
a stone, threw it and hit him between the shoulders and then turned tail and ran like an antelope. Tom chased the
traitor home, and thus found out where he lived. He then held a position at the gate for some time, daring the
enemy to come outside, but the enemy only made faces at him through the window and declined. At last the
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 5
enemy's mother appeared, and called Tom a bad, vicious, vulgar child, and ordered him away. So he went away;
but he said he "'lowed" to "lay" for that boy.
He got home pretty late that night, and when he climbed cautiously in at the window, he uncovered an
ambuscade, in the person of his aunt; and when she saw the state his clothes were in her resolution to turn his
Saturday holiday into captivity at hard labor became adamantine in its firmness.
CHAPTER II
SATURDAY morning was come, and all the summer world was bright and fresh, and brimming with life.
There was a song in every heart; and if the heart was young the music issued at the lips. There was cheer in every
face and a spring in every step. The locust−trees were in bloom and the fragrance of the blossoms filled the air.
Cardiff Hill, beyond the village and above it, was green with vegetation and it lay just far enough away to seem a
Delectable Land, dreamy, reposeful, and inviting.
Tom appeared on the sidewalk with a bucket of whitewash and a long−handled brush. He surveyed the fence,
and all gladness left him and a deep melancholy settled down upon his spirit. Thirty yards of board fence nine feet
high. Life to him seemed hollow, and existence but a burden. Sighing, he dipped his brush and passed it along the
topmost plank; repeated the operation; did it again; compared the insignificant whitewashed streak with the
far−reaching continent of unwhitewashed fence, and sat down on a tree−box discouraged. Jim came skipping out
at the gate with a tin pail, and singing Buffalo Gals. Bringing water from the town pump had always been hateful
work in Tom's eyes, before, but now it did not strike him so. He remembered that there was company at the pump.
White, mulatto, and negro boys and girls were always there waiting their turns, resting, trading playthings,
quarrelling, fighting, skylarking. And he remembered that although the pump was only a hundred and fifty yards
off, Jim never got back with a bucket of water under an hour −− and even then somebody generally had to go after
him. Tom said:
"Say, Jim, I'll fetch the water if you'll whitewash some."
Jim shook his head and said:
"Can't, Mars Tom. Ole missis, she tole me I got to go an' git dis water an' not stop foolin' roun' wid anybody.
She say she spec' Mars Tom gwine to ax me to whitewash, an' so she tole me go 'long an' 'tend to my own
business −− she 'lowed SHE'D 'tend to de whitewashin'."
"Oh, never you mind what she said, Jim. That's the way she always talks. Gimme the bucket −− I won't be
gone only a a minute. SHE won't ever know."
"Oh, I dasn't, Mars Tom. Ole missis she'd take an' tar de head off'n me. 'Deed she would."
"SHE! She never licks anybody −− whacks 'em over the head with her thimble −− and who cares for that, I'd
like to know. She talks awful, but talk don't hurt −− anyways it don't if she don't cry. Jim, I'll give you a marvel.
I'll give you a white alley!"
Jim began to waver.
"White alley, Jim! And it's a bully taw."
"My! Dat's a mighty gay marvel, I tell you! But Mars Tom I's powerful 'fraid ole missis −−"
"And besides, if you will I'll show you my sore toe."
Jim was only human −− this attraction was too much for him. He put down his pail, took the white alley, and
bent over the toe with absorbing interest while the bandage was being unwound. In another moment he was flying
down the street with his pail and a tingling rear, Tom was whitewashing with vigor, and Aunt Polly was retiring
from the field with a slipper in her hand and triumph in her eye.
But Tom's energy did not last. He began to think of the fun he had planned for this day, and his sorrows
multiplied. Soon the free boys would come tripping along on all sorts of delicious expeditions, and they would
make a world of fun of him for having to work −− the very thought of it burnt him like fire. He got out his
worldly wealth and examined it −− bits of toys, marbles, and trash; enough to buy an exchange of WORK, maybe,
but not half enough to buy so much as half an hour of pure freedom. So he returned his straitened means to his
pocket, and gave up the idea of trying to buy the boys. At this dark and hopeless moment an inspiration burst
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 6
upon him! Nothing less than a great, magnificent inspiration.
He took up his brush and went tranquilly to work. Ben Rogers hove in sight presently −− the very boy, of all
boys, whose ridicule he had been dreading. Ben's gait was the hop−skip−and−jump −− proof enough that his heart
was light and his anticipations high. He was eating an apple, and giving a long, melodious whoop, at intervals,
followed by a deep−toned dingdong −dong, ding−dong−dong, for he was personating a steamboat. As he drew
near, he slackened speed, took the middle of the street, leaned far over to starboard and rounded to ponderously
and with laborious pomp and circumstance −− for he was personating the Big Missouri, and considered himself to
be drawing nine feet of water. He was boat and captain and engine−bells combined, so he had to imagine himself
standing on his own hurricane−deck giving the orders and executing them:
"Stop her, sir! Ting−a−ling−ling!" The headway ran almost out, and he drew up slowly toward the sidewalk.
"Ship up to back! Ting−a−ling−ling!" His arms straightened and stiffened down his sides.
"Set her back on the stabboard! Ting−a−ling−ling! Chow! ch−chow−wow! Chow!" His right hand, meantime,
describing stately circles −− for it was representing a forty−foot wheel.
"Let her go back on the labboard! Ting−a−lingling ! Chow−ch−chow−chow!" The left hand began to describe
circles.
"Stop the stabboard! Ting−a−ling−ling! Stop the labboard! Come ahead on the stabboard! Stop her! Let your
outside turn over slow! Ting−a−ling−ling! Chow−ow−ow! Get out that head−line! LIVELY now! Come −− out
with your spring−line −− what're you about there! Take a turn round that stump with the bight of it! Stand by that
stage, now −− let her go! Done with the engines, sir! Ting−a−ling−ling! SH'T! S'H'T! SH'T!" (trying the
gauge−cocks).
Tom went on whitewashing −− paid no attention to the steamboat. Ben stared a moment and then said:
"Hi−YI! YOU'RE up a stump, ain't you!"
No answer. Tom surveyed his last touch with the eye of an artist, then he gave his brush another gentle sweep
and surveyed the result, as before. Ben ranged up alongside of him. Tom's mouth watered for the apple, but he
stuck to his work. Ben said:
"Hello, old chap, you got to work, hey?"
Tom wheeled suddenly and said:
"Why, it's you, Ben! I warn't noticing."
"Say −− I'm going in a−swimming, I am. Don't you wish you could? But of course you'd druther WORK −−
wouldn't you? Course you would!"
Tom contemplated the boy a bit, and said:
"What do you call work?"
"Why, ain't THAT work?"
Tom resumed his whitewashing, and answered carelessly:
"Well, maybe it is, and maybe it ain't. All I know, is, it suits Tom Sawyer."
"Oh come, now, you don't mean to let on that you LIKE it?"
The brush continued to move.
"Like it? Well, I don't see why I oughtn't to like it. Does a boy get a chance to whitewash a fence every day?"
That put the thing in a new light. Ben stopped nibbling his apple. Tom swept his brush daintily back and forth
−− stepped back to note the effect −− added a touch here and there −− criticised the effect again −− Ben watching
every move and getting more and more interested, more and more absorbed. Presently he said:
"Say, Tom, let ME whitewash a little."
Tom considered, was about to consent; but he altered his mind:
"No −− no −− I reckon it wouldn't hardly do, Ben. You see, Aunt Polly's awful particular about this fence −−
right here on the street, you know −− but if it was the back fence I wouldn't mind and SHE wouldn't. Yes, she's
awful particular about this fence; it's got to be done very careful; I reckon there ain't one boy in a thousand, maybe
two thousand, that can do it the way it's got to be done."
"No −− is that so? Oh come, now −− lemme just try. Only just a little −− I'd let YOU, if you was me, Tom."
"Ben, I'd like to, honest injun; but Aunt Polly −− well, Jim wanted to do it, but she wouldn't let him; Sid
wanted to do it, and she wouldn't let Sid. Now don't you see how I'm fixed? If you was to tackle this fence and
anything was to happen to it −−"
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 7
"Oh, shucks, I'll be just as careful. Now lemme try. Say −− I'll give you the core of my apple."
"Well, here −− No, Ben, now don't. I'm afeard −−"
"I'll give you ALL of it!"
Tom gave up the brush with reluctance in his face, but alacrity in his heart. And while the late steamer Big
Missouri worked and sweated in the sun, the retired artist sat on a barrel in the shade close by, dangled his legs,
munched his apple, and planned the slaughter of more innocents. There was no lack of material; boys happened
along every little while; they came to jeer, but remained to whitewash. By the time Ben was fagged out, Tom had
traded the next chance to Billy Fisher for a kite, in good repair; and when he played out, Johnny Miller bought in
for a dead rat and a string to swing it with −− and so on, and so on, hour after hour. And when the middle of the
afternoon came, from being a poor poverty−stricken boy in the morning, Tom was literally rolling in wealth. He
had besides the things before mentioned, twelve marbles, part of a jews−harp, a piece of blue bottle−glass to look
through, a spool cannon, a key that wouldn't unlock anything, a fragment of chalk, a glass stopper of a decanter, a
tin soldier, a couple of tadpoles, six fire−crackers, a kitten with only one eye, a brass doorknob, a dog−collar −−
but no dog −− the handle of a knife, four pieces of orange−peel, and a dilapidated old window sash.
He had had a nice, good, idle time all the while −− plenty of company −− and the fence had three coats of
whitewash on it! If he hadn't run out of whitewash he would have bankrupted every boy in the village.
Tom said to himself that it was not such a hollow world, after all. He had discovered a great law of human
action, without knowing it −− namely, that in order to make a man or a boy covet a thing, it is only necessary to
make the thing difficult to attain. If he had been a great and wise philosopher, like the writer of this book, he
would now have comprehended that Work consists of whatever a body is OBLIGED to do, and that Play consists
of whatever a body is not obliged to do. And this would help him to understand why constructing artificial
flowers or performing on a tread−mill is work, while rolling ten−pins or climbing Mont Blanc is only amusement.
There are wealthy gentlemen in England who drive four−horse passengercoaches twenty or thirty miles on a daily
line, in the summer, because the privilege costs them considerable money; but if they were offered wages for the
service, that would turn it into work and then they would resign.
The boy mused awhile over the substantial change which had taken place in his worldly circumstances, and
then wended toward headquarters to report.
CHAPTER III
TOM presented himself before Aunt Polly, who was sitting by an open window in a pleasant rearward
apartment, which was bedroom, breakfast−room, dining−room, and library, combined. The balmy summer air, the
restful quiet, the odor of the flowers, and the drowsing murmur of the bees had had their effect, and she was
nodding over her knitting −− for she had no company but the cat, and it was asleep in her lap. Her spectacles were
propped up on her gray head for safety. She had thought that of course Tom had deserted long ago, and she
wondered at seeing him place himself in her power again in this intrepid way. He said: "Mayn't I go and play
now, aunt?"
"What, a'ready? How much have you done?"
"It's all done, aunt."
"Tom, don't lie to me −− I can't bear it."
"I ain't, aunt; it IS all done."
Aunt Polly placed small trust in such evidence. She went out to see for herself; and she would have been
content to find twenty per cent. of Tom's statement true. When she found the entire fence whitewashed, and not
only whitewashed but elaborately coated and recoated, and even a streak added to the ground, her astonishment
was almost unspeakable. She said:
"Well, I never! There's no getting round it, you can work when you're a mind to, Tom." And then she diluted
the compliment by adding, "But it's powerful seldom you're a mind to, I'm bound to say. Well, go 'long and play;
but mind you get back some time in a week, or I'll tan you."
She was so overcome by the splendor of his achievement that she took him into the closet and selected a
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 8
choice apple and delivered it to him, along with an improving lecture upon the added value and flavor a treat took
to itself when it came without sin through virtuous effort. And while she closed with a happy Scriptural flourish,
he "hooked" a doughnut.
Then he skipped out, and saw Sid just starting up the outside stairway that led to the back rooms on the second
floor. Clods were handy and the air was full of them in a twinkling. They raged around Sid like a hail−storm; and
before Aunt Polly could collect her surprised faculties and sally to the rescue, six or seven clods had taken
personal effect, and Tom was over the fence and gone. There was a gate, but as a general thing he was too
crowded for time to make use of it. His soul was at peace, now that he had settled with Sid for calling attention to
his black thread and getting him into trouble.
Tom skirted the block, and came round into a muddy alley that led by the back of his aunt's cowstable. He
presently got safely beyond the reach of capture and punishment, and hastened toward the public square of the
village, where two "military" companies of boys had met for conflict, according to previous appointment. Tom
was General of one of these armies, Joe Harper (a bosom friend) General of the other. These two great
commanders did not condescend to fight in person −− that being better suited to the still smaller fry −− but sat
together on an eminence and conducted the field operations by orders delivered through aides−de−camp. Tom's
army won a great victory, after a long and hard−fought battle. Then the dead were counted, prisoners exchanged,
the terms of the next disagreement agreed upon, and the day for the necessary battle appointed; after which the
armies fell into line and marched away, and Tom turned homeward alone.
As he was passing by the house where Jeff Thatcher lived, he saw a new girl in the garden −− a lovely little
blue−eyed creature with yellow hair plaited into two long−tails, white summer frock and embroidered pantalettes.
The fresh−crowned hero fell without firing a shot. A certain Amy Lawrence vanished out of his heart and left not
even a memory of herself behind. He had thought he loved her to distraction; he had regarded his passion as
adoration; and behold it was only a poor little evanescent partiality. He had been months winning her; she had
confessed hardly a week ago; he had been the happiest and the proudest boy in the world only seven short days,
and here in one instant of time she had gone out of his heart like a casual stranger whose visit is done.
He worshipped this new angel with furtive eye, till he saw that she had discovered him; then he pretended he
did not know she was present, and began to "show off" in all sorts of absurd boyish ways, in order to win her
admiration. He kept up this grotesque foolishness for some time; but by−and−by, while he was in the midst of
some dangerous gymnastic performances, he glanced aside and saw that the little girl was wending her way
toward the house. Tom came up to the fence and leaned on it, grieving, and hoping she would tarry yet awhile
longer. She halted a moment on the steps and then moved toward the door. Tom heaved a great sigh as she put her
foot on the threshold. But his face lit up, right away, for she tossed a pansy over the fence a moment before she
disappeared.
The boy ran around and stopped within a foot or two of the flower, and then shaded his eyes with his hand and
began to look down street as if he had discovered something of interest going on in that direction. Presently he
picked up a straw and began trying to balance it on his nose, with his head tilted far back; and as he moved from
side to side, in his efforts, he edged nearer and nearer toward the pansy; finally his bare foot rested upon it, his
pliant toes closed upon it, and he hopped away with the treasure and disappeared round the corner. But only for a
minute −− only while he could button the flower inside his jacket, next his heart −− or next his stomach, possibly,
for he was not much posted in anatomy, and not hypercritical, anyway.
He returned, now, and hung about the fence till nightfall, "showing off," as before; but the girl never exhibited
herself again, though Tom comforted himself a little with the hope that she had been near some window,
meantime, and been aware of his attentions. Finally he strode home reluctantly, with his poor head full of visions.
All through supper his spirits were so high that his aunt wondered "what had got into the child." He took a
good scolding about clodding Sid, and did not seem to mind it in the least. He tried to steal sugar under his aunt's
very nose, and got his knuckles rapped for it. He said:
"Aunt, you don't whack Sid when he takes it."
"Well, Sid don't torment a body the way you do. You'd be always into that sugar if I warn't watching you."
Presently she stepped into the kitchen, and Sid, happy in his immunity, reached for the sugar−bowl −− a sort of
glorying over Tom which was wellnigh unbearable. But Sid's fingers slipped and the bowl dropped and broke.
Tom was in ecstasies. In such ecstasies that he even controlled his tongue and was silent. He said to himself that
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 9
he would not speak a word, even when his aunt came in, but would sit perfectly still till she asked who did the
mischief; and then he would tell, and there would be nothing so good in the world as to see that pet model "catch
it." He was so brimful of exultation that he could hardly hold himself when the old lady came back and stood
above the wreck discharging lightnings of wrath from over her spectacles. He said to himself, "Now it's coming!"
And the next instant he was sprawling on the floor! The potent palm was uplifted to strike again when Tom cried
out:
"Hold on, now, what 'er you belting ME for? −− Sid broke it!"
Aunt Polly paused, perplexed, and Tom looked for healing pity. But when she got her tongue again, she only
said:
"Umf! Well, you didn't get a lick amiss, I reckon. You been into some other audacious mischief when I wasn't
around, like enough."
Then her conscience reproached her, and she yearned to say something kind and loving; but she judged that
this would be construed into a confession that she had been in the wrong, and discipline forbade that. So she kept
silence, and went about her affairs with a troubled heart. Tom sulked in a corner and exalted his woes. He knew
that in her heart his aunt was on her knees to him, and he was morosely gratified by the consciousness of it. He
would hang out no signals, he would take notice of none. He knew that a yearning glance fell upon him, now and
then, through a film of tears, but he refused recognition of it. He pictured himself lying sick unto death and his
aunt bending over him beseeching one little forgiving word, but he would turn his face to the wall, and die with
that word unsaid. Ah, how would she feel then? And he pictured himself brought home from the river, dead, with
his curls all wet, and his sore heart at rest. How she would throw herself upon him, and how her tears would fall
like rain, and her lips pray God to give her back her boy and she would never, never abuse him any more! But he
would lie there cold and white and make no sign −− a poor little sufferer, whose griefs were at an end. He so
worked upon his feelings with the pathos of these dreams, that he had to keep swallowing, he was so like to
choke; and his eyes swam in a blur of water, which overflowed when he winked, and ran down and trickled from
the end of his nose. And such a luxury to him was this petting of his sorrows, that he could not bear to have any
worldly cheeriness or any grating delight intrude upon it; it was too sacred for such contact; and so, presently,
when his cousin Mary danced in, all alive with the joy of seeing home again after an age−long visit of one week
to the country, he got up and moved in clouds and darkness out at one door as she brought song and sunshine in at
the other.
He wandered far from the accustomed haunts of boys, and sought desolate places that were in harmony with
his spirit. A log raft in the river invited him, and he seated himself on its outer edge and contemplated the dreary
vastness of the stream, wishing, the while, that he could only be drowned, all at once and unconsciously, without
undergoing the uncomfortable routine devised by nature. Then he thought of his flower. He got it out, rumpled
and wilted, and it mightily increased his dismal felicity. He wondered if she would pity him if she knew? Would
she cry, and wish that she had a right to put her arms around his neck and comfort him? Or would she turn coldly
away like all the hollow world? This picture brought such an agony of pleasurable suffering that he worked it over
and over again in his mind and set it up in new and varied lights, till he wore it threadbare. At last he rose up
sighing and departed in the darkness.
About half−past nine or ten o'clock he came along the deserted street to where the Adored Unknown lived; he
paused a moment; no sound fell upon his listening ear; a candle was casting a dull glow upon the curtain of a
second−story window. Was the sacred presence there? He climbed the fence, threaded his stealthy way through
the plants, till he stood under that window; he looked up at it long, and with emotion; then he laid him down on
the ground under it, disposing himself upon his back, with his hands clasped upon his breast and holding his poor
wilted flower. And thus he would die −− out in the cold world, with no shelter over his homeless head, no friendly
hand to wipe the death−damps from his brow, no loving face to bend pityingly over him when the great agony
came. And thus SHE would see him when she looked out upon the glad morning, and oh! would she drop one
little tear upon his poor, lifeless form, would she heave one little sigh to see a bright young life so rudely blighted,
so untimely cut down?
The window went up, a maid−servant's discordant voice profaned the holy calm, and a deluge of water
drenched the prone martyr's remains!
The strangling hero sprang up with a relieving snort. There was a whiz as of a missile in the air, mingled with
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 10
the murmur of a curse, a sound as of shivering glass followed, and a small, vague form went over the fence and
shot away in the gloom.
Not long after, as Tom, all undressed for bed, was surveying his drenched garments by the light of a tallow dip,
Sid woke up; but if he had any dim idea of making any "references to allusions," he thought better of it and held
his peace, for there was danger in Tom's eye.
Tom turned in without the added vexation of prayers, and Sid made mental note of the omission.
CHAPTER IV
THE sun rose upon a tranquil world, and beamed down upon the peaceful village like a benediction. Breakfast
over, Aunt Polly had family worship: it began with a prayer built from the ground up of solid courses of Scriptural
quotations, welded together with a thin mortar of originality; and from the summit of this she delivered a grim
chapter of the Mosaic Law, as from Sinai.
Then Tom girded up his loins, so to speak, and went to work to "get his verses." Sid had learned his lesson
days before. Tom bent all his energies to the memorizing of five verses, and he chose part of the Sermon on the
Mount, because he could find no verses that were shorter. At the end of half an hour Tom had a vague general
idea of his lesson, but no more, for his mind was traversing the whole field of human thought, and his hands were
busy with distracting recreations. Mary took his book to hear him recite, and he tried to find his way through the
fog:
"Blessed are the −− a −− a −−"
"Poor" −−
"Yes −− poor; blessed are the poor −− a −− a −−"
"In spirit −−"
"In spirit; blessed are the poor in spirit, for they −− they −−"
"THEIRS −−"
"For THEIRS. Blessed are the poor in spirit, for theirs is the kingdom of heaven. Blessed are they that mourn,
for they −− they −−"
"Sh −−"
"For they −− a −−"
"S, H, A −−"
"For they S, H −− Oh, I don't know what it is!"
"SHALL!"
"Oh, SHALL! for they shall −− for they shall −− a −− a −− shall mourn −− a−− a −− blessed are they that shall
−− they that −− a −− they that shall mourn, for they shall −− a −− shall WHAT? Why don't you tell me, Mary? −−
what do you want to be so mean for?"
"Oh, Tom, you poor thick−headed thing, I'm not teasing you. I wouldn't do that. You must go and learn it
again. Don't you be discouraged, Tom, you'll manage it −− and if you do, I'll give you something ever so nice.
There, now, that's a good boy."
"All right! What is it, Mary, tell me what it is."
"Never you mind, Tom. You know if I say it's nice, it is nice."
"You bet you that's so, Mary. All right, I'll tackle it again."
And he did "tackle it again" −− and under the double pressure of curiosity and prospective gain he did it with
such spirit that he accomplished a shining success. Mary gave him a brand−new "Barlow" knife worth twelve and
a half cents; and the convulsion of delight that swept his system shook him to his foundations. True, the knife
would not cut anything, but it was a "sure−enough" Barlow, and there was inconceivable grandeur in that −−
though where the Western boys ever got the idea that such a weapon could possibly be counterfeited to its injury
is an imposing mystery and will always remain so, perhaps. Tom contrived to scarify the cupboard with it, and
was arranging to begin on the bureau, when he was called off to dress for Sunday−school.
Mary gave him a tin basin of water and a piece of soap, and he went outside the door and set the basin on a
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 11
little bench there; then he dipped the soap in the water and laid it down; turned up his sleeves; poured out the
water on the ground, gently, and then entered the kitchen and began to wipe his face diligently on the towel
behind the door. But Mary removed the towel and said:
"Now ain't you ashamed, Tom. You mustn't be so bad. Water won't hurt you."
Tom was a trifle disconcerted. The basin was refilled, and this time he stood over it a little while, gathering
resolution; took in a big breath and began. When he entered the kitchen presently, with both eyes shut and groping
for the towel with his hands, an honorable testimony of suds and water was dripping from his face. But when he
emerged from the towel, he was not yet satisfactory, for the clean territory stopped short at his chin and his jaws,
like a mask; below and beyond this line there was a dark expanse of unirrigated soil that spread downward in
front and backward around his neck. Mary took him in hand, and when she was done with him he was a man and
a brother, without distinction of color, and his saturated hair was neatly brushed, and its short curls wrought into a
dainty and symmetrical general effect. [He privately smoothed out the curls, with labor and difficulty, and
plastered his hair close down to his head; for he held curls to be effeminate, and his own filled his life with
bitterness.] Then Mary got out a suit of his clothing that had been used only on Sundays during two years −− they
were simply called his "other clothes" −− and so by that we know the size of his wardrobe. The girl "put him to
rights" after he had dressed himself; she buttoned his neat roundabout up to his chin, turned his vast shirt collar
down over his shoulders, brushed him off and crowned him with his speckled straw hat. He now looked
exceedingly improved and uncomfortable. He was fully as uncomfortable as he looked; for there was a restraint
about whole clothes and cleanliness that galled him. He hoped that Mary would forget his shoes, but the hope was
blighted; she coated them thoroughly with tallow, as was the custom, and brought them out. He lost his temper
and said he was always being made to do everything he didn't want to do. But Mary said, persuasively:
"Please, Tom −− that's a good boy."
So he got into the shoes snarling. Mary was soon ready, and the three children set out for Sunday−school −− a
place that Tom hated with his whole heart; but Sid and Mary were fond of it.
Sabbath−school hours were from nine to half−past ten; and then church service. Two of the children always
remained for the sermon voluntarily, and the other always remained too −− for stronger reasons. The church's
high−backed, uncushioned pews would seat about three hundred persons; the edifice was but a small, plain affair,
with a sort of pine board tree−box on top of it for a steeple. At the door Tom dropped back a step and accosted a
Sunday−dressed comrade:
"Say, Billy, got a yaller ticket?"
"Yes."
"What'll you take for her?"
"What'll you give?"
"Piece of lickrish and a fish−hook."
"Less see 'em."
Tom exhibited. They were satisfactory, and the property changed hands. Then Tom traded a couple of white
alleys for three red tickets, and some small trifle or other for a couple of blue ones. He waylaid other boys as they
came, and went on buying tickets of various colors ten or fifteen minutes longer. He entered the church, now, with
a swarm of clean and noisy boys and girls, proceeded to his seat and started a quarrel with the first boy that came
handy. The teacher, a grave, elderly man, interfered; then turned his back a moment and Tom pulled a boy's hair
in the next bench, and was absorbed in his book when the boy turned around; stuck a pin in another boy,
presently, in order to hear him say "Ouch!" and got a new reprimand from his teacher. Tom's whole class were of
a pattern −− restless, noisy, and troublesome. When they came to recite their lessons, not one of them knew his
verses perfectly, but had to be prompted all along. However, they worried through, and each got his reward −− in
small blue tickets, each with a passage of Scripture on it; each blue ticket was pay for two verses of the recitation.
Ten blue tickets equalled a red one, and could be exchanged for it; ten red tickets equalled a yellow one; for ten
yellow tickets the superintendent gave a very plainly bound Bible (worth forty cents in those easy times) to the
pupil. How many of my readers would have the industry and application to memorize two thousand verses, even
for a Dore Bible? And yet Mary had acquired two Bibles in this way −− it was the patient work of two years −−
and a boy of German parentage had won four or five. He once recited three thousand verses without stopping; but
the strain upon his mental faculties was too great, and he was little better than an idiot from that day forth −− a
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 12
grievous misfortune for the school, for on great occasions, before company, the superintendent (as Tom expressed
it) had always made this boy come out and "spread himself." Only the older pupils managed to keep their tickets
and stick to their tedious work long enough to get a Bible, and so the delivery of one of these prizes was a rare
and noteworthy circumstance; the successful pupil was so great and conspicuous for that day that on the spot
every scholar's heart was fired with a fresh ambition that often lasted a couple of weeks. It is possible that Tom's
mental stomach had never really hungered for one of those prizes, but unquestionably his entire being had for
many a day longed for the glory and the eclat that came with it.
In due course the superintendent stood up in front of the pulpit, with a closed hymn−book in his hand and his
forefinger inserted between its leaves, and commanded attention. When a Sunday−school superintendent makes
his customary little speech, a hymn−book in the hand is as necessary as is the inevitable sheet of music in the
hand of a singer who stands forward on the platform and sings a solo at a concert −− though why, is a mystery:
for neither the hymn−book nor the sheet of music is ever referred to by the sufferer. This superintendent was a
slim creature of thirty−five, with a sandy goatee and short sandy hair; he wore a stiff standing−collar whose upper
edge almost reached his ears and whose sharp points curved forward abreast the corners of his mouth −− a fence
that compelled a straight lookout ahead, and a turning of the whole body when a side view was required; his chin
was propped on a spreading cravat which was as broad and as long as a bank−note, and had fringed ends; his boot
toes were turned sharply up, in the fashion of the day, like sleighrunners −− an effect patiently and laboriously
produced by the young men by sitting with their toes pressed against a wall for hours together. Mr. Walters was
very earnest of mien, and very sincere and honest at heart; and he held sacred things and places in such reverence,
and so separated them from worldly matters, that unconsciously to himself his Sunday−school voice had acquired
a peculiar intonation which was wholly absent on week−days. He began after this fashion:
"Now, children, I want you all to sit up just as straight and pretty as you can and give me all your attention for
a minute or two. There −− that is it. That is the way good little boys and girls should do. I see one little girl who is
looking out of the window −− I am afraid she thinks I am out there somewhere −− perhaps up in one of the trees
making a speech to the little birds. [Applausive titter.] I want to tell you how good it makes me feel to see so
many bright, clean little faces assembled in a place like this, learning to do right and be good." And so forth and
so on. It is not necessary to set down the rest of the oration. It was of a pattern which does not vary, and so it is
familiar to us all.
The latter third of the speech was marred by the resumption of fights and other recreations among certain of
the bad boys, and by fidgetings and whisperings that extended far and wide, washing even to the bases of isolated
and incorruptible rocks like Sid and Mary. But now every sound ceased suddenly, with the subsidence of Mr.
Walters' voice, and the conclusion of the speech was received with a burst of silent gratitude.
A good part of the whispering had been occasioned by an event which was more or less rare −− the entrance of
visitors: lawyer Thatcher, accompanied by a very feeble and aged man; a fine, portly, middle−aged gentleman
with iron−gray hair; and a dignified lady who was doubtless the latter's wife. The lady was leading a child. Tom
had been restless and full of chafings and repinings; conscience−smitten, too −− he could not meet Amy
Lawrence's eye, he could not brook her loving gaze. But when he saw this small new−comer his soul was all
ablaze with bliss in a moment. The next moment he was "showing off" with all his might −− cuffing boys, pulling
hair, making faces −− in a word, using every art that seemed likely to fascinate a girl and win her applause. His
exaltation had but one alloy −− the memory of his humiliation in this angel's garden −− and that record in sand
was fast washing out, under the waves of happiness that were sweeping over it now.
The visitors were given the highest seat of honor, and as soon as Mr. Walters' speech was finished, he
introduced them to the school. The middle−aged man turned out to be a prodigious personage −− no less a one
than the county judge −− altogether the most august creation these children had ever looked upon −− and they
wondered what kind of material he was made of −− and they half wanted to hear him roar, and were half afraid he
might, too. He was from Constantinople, twelve miles away −− so he had travelled, and seen the world −− these
very eyes had looked upon the county court−house −− which was said to have a tin roof. The awe which these
reflections inspired was attested by the impressive silence and the ranks of staring eyes. This was the great Judge
Thatcher, brother of their own lawyer. Jeff Thatcher immediately went forward, to be familiar with the great man
and be envied by the school. It would have been music to his soul to hear the whisperings:
"Look at him, Jim! He's a going up there. Say −− look! he's a going to shake hands with him −− he IS shaking
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 13
hands with him! By jings, don't you wish you was Jeff?"
Mr. Walters fell to "showing off," with all sorts of official bustlings and activities, giving orders, delivering
judgments, discharging directions here, there, everywhere that he could find a target. The librarian "showed off"
−− running hither and thither with his arms full of books and making a deal of the splutter and fuss that insect
authority delights in. The young lady teachers "showed off" −− bending sweetly over pupils that were lately being
boxed, lifting pretty warning fingers at bad little boys and patting good ones lovingly. The young gentlemen
teachers "showed off" with small scoldings and other little displays of authority and fine attention to discipline −−
and most of the teachers, of both sexes, found business up at the library, by the pulpit; and it was business that
frequently had to be done over again two or three times (with much seeming vexation). The little girls "showed
off" in various ways, and the little boys "showed off" with such diligence that the air was thick with paper wads
and the murmur of scufflings. And above it all the great man sat and beamed a majestic judicial smile upon all the
house, and warmed himself in the sun of his own grandeur −− for he was "showing off," too.
There was only one thing wanting to make Mr. Walters' ecstasy complete, and that was a chance to deliver a
Bible−prize and exhibit a prodigy. Several pupils had a few yellow tickets, but none had enough −− he had been
around among the star pupils inquiring. He would have given worlds, now, to have that German lad back again
with a sound mind.
And now at this moment, when hope was dead, Tom Sawyer came forward with nine yellow tickets, nine red
tickets, and ten blue ones, and demanded a Bible. This was a thunderbolt out of a clear sky. Walters was not
expecting an application from this source for the next ten years. But there was no getting around it −− here were
the certified checks, and they were good for their face. Tom was therefore elevated to a place with the Judge and
the other elect, and the great news was announced from headquarters. It was the most stunning surprise of the
decade, and so profound was the sensation that it lifted the new hero up to the judicial one's altitude, and the
school had two marvels to gaze upon in place of one. The boys were all eaten up with envy −− but those that
suffered the bitterest pangs were those who perceived too late that they themselves had contributed to this hated
splendor by trading tickets to Tom for the wealth he had amassed in selling whitewashing privileges. These
despised themselves, as being the dupes of a wily fraud, a guileful snake in the grass.
The prize was delivered to Tom with as much effusion as the superintendent could pump up under the
circumstances; but it lacked somewhat of the true gush, for the poor fellow's instinct taught him that there was a
mystery here that could not well bear the light, perhaps; it was simply preposterous that this boy had warehoused
two thousand sheaves of Scriptural wisdom on his premises −− a dozen would strain his capacity, without a
doubt.
Amy Lawrence was proud and glad, and she tried to make Tom see it in her face −− but he wouldn't look. She
wondered; then she was just a grain troubled; next a dim suspicion came and went −− came again; she watched; a
furtive glance told her worlds −− and then her heart broke, and she was jealous, and angry, and the tears came and
she hated everybody. Tom most of all (she thought).
Tom was introduced to the Judge; but his tongue was tied, his breath would hardly come, his heart quaked −−
partly because of the awful greatness of the man, but mainly because he was her parent. He would have liked to
fall down and worship him, if it were in the dark. The Judge put his hand on Tom's head and called him a fine
little man, and asked him what his name was. The boy stammered, gasped, and got it out:
"Tom."
"Oh, no, not Tom −− it is −−"
"Thomas."
"Ah, that's it. I thought there was more to it, maybe. That's very well. But you've another one I daresay, and
you'll tell it to me, won't you?"
"Tell the gentleman your other name, Thomas," said Walters, "and say sir. You mustn't forget your manners."
"Thomas Sawyer −− sir."
"That's it! That's a good boy. Fine boy. Fine, manly little fellow. Two thousand verses is a great many −− very,
very great many. And you never can be sorry for the trouble you took to learn them; for knowledge is worth more
than anything there is in the world; it's what makes great men and good men; you'll be a great man and a good
man yourself, some day, Thomas, and then you'll look back and say, It's all owing to the precious Sunday−school
privileges of my boyhood −− it's all owing to my dear teachers that taught me to learn −− it's all owing to the
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 14
good superintendent, who encouraged me, and watched over me, and gave me a beautiful Bible −− a splendid
elegant Bible −− to keep and have it all for my own, always −− it's all owing to right bringing up! That is what
you will say, Thomas −− and you wouldn't take any money for those two thousand verses −− no indeed you
wouldn't. And now you wouldn't mind telling me and this lady some of the things you've learned −− no, I know
you wouldn't −− for we are proud of little boys that learn. Now, no doubt you know the names of all the twelve
disciples. Won't you tell us the names of the first two that were appointed?"
Tom was tugging at a button−hole and looking sheepish. He blushed, now, and his eyes fell. Mr. Walters' heart
sank within him. He said to himself, it is not possible that the boy can answer the simplest question −− why DID
the Judge ask him? Yet he felt obliged to speak up and say:
"Answer the gentleman, Thomas −− don't be afraid."
Tom still hung fire.
"Now I know you'll tell me," said the lady. "The names of the first two disciples were −−"
"DAVID AND GOLIAH!"
Let us draw the curtain of charity over the rest of the scene.
CHAPTER V
ABOUT half−past ten the cracked bell of the small church began to ring, and presently the people began to
gather for the morning sermon. The Sunday−school children distributed themselves about the house and occupied
pews with their parents, so as to be under supervision. Aunt Polly came, and Tom and Sid and Mary sat with her
−− Tom being placed next the aisle, in order that he might be as far away from the open window and the seductive
outside summer scenes as possible. The crowd filed up the aisles: the aged and needy postmaster, who had seen
better days; the mayor and his wife −− for they had a mayor there, among other unnecessaries; the justice of the
peace; the widow Douglass, fair, smart, and forty, a generous, good−hearted soul and well−to−do, her hill
mansion the only palace in the town, and the most hospitable and much the most lavish in the matter of festivities
that St. Petersburg could boast; the bent and venerable Major and Mrs. Ward; lawyer Riverson, the new notable
from a distance; next the belle of the village, followed by a troop of lawn−clad and ribbon−decked young
heart−breakers; then all the young clerks in town in a body −− for they had stood in the vestibule sucking their
cane−heads, a circling wall of oiled and simpering admirers, till the last girl had run their gantlet; and last of all
came the Model Boy, Willie Mufferson, taking as heedful care of his mother as if she were cut glass. He always
brought his mother to church, and was the pride of all the matrons. The boys all hated him, he was so good. And
besides, he had been "thrown up to them" so much. His white handkerchief was hanging out of his pocket behind,
as usual on Sundays −− accidentally. Tom had no handkerchief, and he looked upon boys who had as snobs.
The congregation being fully assembled, now, the bell rang once more, to warn laggards and stragglers, and
then a solemn hush fell upon the church which was only broken by the tittering and whispering of the choir in the
gallery. The choir always tittered and whispered all through service. There was once a church choir that was not
ill−bred, but I have forgotten where it was, now. It was a great many years ago, and I can scarcely remember
anything about it, but I think it was in some foreign country.
The minister gave out the hymn, and read it through with a relish, in a peculiar style which was much admired
in that part of the country. His voice began on a medium key and climbed steadily up till it reached a certain
point, where it bore with strong emphasis upon the topmost word and then plunged down as if from a
spring−board:
Shall I be car−ri−ed toe the skies, on flow'ry BEDS
of ease,
Whilst others fight to win the prize, and sail thro' BLOODy
seas?
He was regarded as a wonderful reader. At church "sociables" he was always called upon to read poetry; and
when he was through, the ladies would lift up their hands and let them fall helplessly in their laps, and "wall" their
eyes, and shake their heads, as much as to say, "Words cannot express it; it is too beautiful, TOO beautiful for this
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 15
mortal earth."
After the hymn had been sung, the Rev. Mr. Sprague turned himself into a bulletin−board, and read off
"notices" of meetings and societies and things till it seemed that the list would stretch out to the crack of doom −−
a queer custom which is still kept up in America, even in cities, away here in this age of abundant newspapers.
Often, the less there is to justify a traditional custom, the harder it is to get rid of it.
And now the minister prayed. A good, generous prayer it was, and went into details: it pleaded for the church,
and the little children of the church; for the other churches of the village; for the village itself; for the county; for
the State; for the State officers; for the United States; for the churches of the United States; for Congress; for the
President; for the officers of the Government; for poor sailors, tossed by stormy seas; for the oppressed millions
groaning under the heel of European monarchies and Oriental despotisms; for such as have the light and the good
tidings, and yet have not eyes to see nor ears to hear withal; for the heathen in the far islands of the sea; and
closed with a supplication that the words he was about to speak might find grace and favor, and be as seed sown
in fertile ground, yielding in time a grateful harvest of good. Amen.
There was a rustling of dresses, and the standing congregation sat down. The boy whose history this book
relates did not enjoy the prayer, he only endured it −− if he even did that much. He was restive all through it; he
kept tally of the details of the prayer, unconsciously −− for he was not listening, but he knew the ground of old,
and the clergyman's regular route over it −− and when a little trifle of new matter was interlarded, his ear detected
it and his whole nature resented it; he considered additions unfair, and scoundrelly. In the midst of the prayer a fly
had lit on the back of the pew in front of him and tortured his spirit by calmly rubbing its hands together,
embracing its head with its arms, and polishing it so vigorously that it seemed to almost part company with the
body, and the slender thread of a neck was exposed to view; scraping its wings with its hind legs and smoothing
them to its body as if they had been coat−tails; going through its whole toilet as tranquilly as if it knew it was
perfectly safe. As indeed it was; for as sorely as Tom's hands itched to grab for it they did not dare −− he believed
his soul would be instantly destroyed if he did such a thing while the prayer was going on. But with the closing
sentence his hand began to curve and steal forward; and the instant the "Amen" was out the fly was a prisoner of
war. His aunt detected the act and made him let it go.
The minister gave out his text and droned along monotonously through an argument that was so prosy that
many a head by and by began to nod −− and yet it was an argument that dealt in limitless fire and brimstone and
thinned the predestined elect down to a company so small as to be hardly worth the saving. Tom counted the
pages of the sermon; after church he always knew how many pages there had been, but he seldom knew anything
else about the discourse. However, this time he was really interested for a little while. The minister made a grand
and moving picture of the assembling together of the world's hosts at the millennium when the lion and the lamb
should lie down together and a little child should lead them. But the pathos, the lesson, the moral of the great
spectacle were lost upon the boy; he only thought of the conspicuousness of the principal character before the
on−looking nations; his face lit with the thought, and he said to himself that he wished he could be that child, if it
was a tame lion.
Now he lapsed into suffering again, as the dry argument was resumed. Presently he bethought him of a treasure
he had and got it out. It was a large black beetle with formidable jaws −− a "pinchbug," he called it. It was in a
percussion−cap box. The first thing the beetle did was to take him by the finger. A natural fillip followed, the
beetle went floundering into the aisle and lit on its back, and the hurt finger went into the boy's mouth. The beetle
lay there working its helpless legs, unable to turn over. Tom eyed it, and longed for it; but it was safe out of his
reach. Other people uninterested in the sermon found relief in the beetle, and they eyed it too. Presently a vagrant
poodle dog came idling along, sad at heart, lazy with the summer softness and the quiet, weary of captivity,
sighing for change. He spied the beetle; the drooping tail lifted and wagged. He surveyed the prize; walked
around it; smelt at it from a safe distance; walked around it again; grew bolder, and took a closer smell; then lifted
his lip and made a gingerly snatch at it, just missing it; made another, and another; began to enjoy the diversion;
subsided to his stomach with the beetle between his paws, and continued his experiments; grew weary at last, and
then indifferent and absent−minded. His head nodded, and little by little his chin descended and touched the
enemy, who seized it. There was a sharp yelp, a flirt of the poodle's head, and the beetle fell a couple of yards
away, and lit on its back once more. The neighboring spectators shook with a gentle inward joy, several faces
went behind fans and handkerchiefs, and Tom was entirely happy. The dog looked foolish, and probably felt so;
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 16
but there was resentment in his heart, too, and a craving for revenge. So he went to the beetle and began a wary
attack on it again; jumping at it from every point of a circle, lighting with his fore−paws within an inch of the
creature, making even closer snatches at it with his teeth, and jerking his head till his ears flapped again. But he
grew tired once more, after a while; tried to amuse himself with a fly but found no relief; followed an ant around,
with his nose close to the floor, and quickly wearied of that; yawned, sighed, forgot the beetle entirely, and sat
down on it. Then there was a wild yelp of agony and the poodle went sailing up the aisle; the yelps continued, and
so did the dog; he crossed the house in front of the altar; he flew down the other aisle; he crossed before the doors;
he clamored up the home−stretch; his anguish grew with his progress, till presently he was but a woolly comet
moving in its orbit with the gleam and the speed of light. At last the frantic sufferer sheered from its course, and
sprang into its master's lap; he flung it out of the window, and the voice of distress quickly thinned away and died
in the distance.
By this time the whole church was red−faced and suffocating with suppressed laughter, and the sermon had
come to a dead standstill. The discourse was resumed presently, but it went lame and halting, all possibility of
impressiveness being at an end; for even the gravest sentiments were constantly being received with a smothered
burst of unholy mirth, under cover of some remote pew−back, as if the poor parson had said a rarely facetious
thing. It was a genuine relief to the whole congregation when the ordeal was over and the benediction
pronounced.
Tom Sawyer went home quite cheerful, thinking to himself that there was some satisfaction about divine
service when there was a bit of variety in it. He had but one marring thought; he was willing that the dog should
play with his pinchbug, but he did not think it was upright in him to carry it off.
CHAPTER VI
MONDAY morning found Tom Sawyer miserable. Monday morning always found him so −− because it began
another week's slow suffering in school. He generally began that day with wishing he had had no intervening
holiday, it made the going into captivity and fetters again so much more odious.
Tom lay thinking. Presently it occurred to him that he wished he was sick; then he could stay home from
school. Here was a vague possibility. He canvassed his system. No ailment was found, and he investigated again.
This time he thought he could detect colicky symptoms, and he began to encourage them with considerable hope.
But they soon grew feeble, and presently died wholly away. He reflected further. Suddenly he discovered
something. One of his upper front teeth was loose. This was lucky; he was about to begin to groan, as a "starter,"
as he called it, when it occurred to him that if he came into court with that argument, his aunt would pull it out,
and that would hurt. So he thought he would hold the tooth in reserve for the present, and seek further. Nothing
offered for some little time, and then he remembered hearing the doctor tell about a certain thing that laid up a
patient for two or three weeks and threatened to make him lose a finger. So the boy eagerly drew his sore toe from
under the sheet and held it up for inspection. But now he did not know the necessary symptoms. However, it
seemed well worth while to chance it, so he fell to groaning with considerable spirit.
But Sid slept on unconscious.
Tom groaned louder, and fancied that he began to feel pain in the toe.
No result from Sid.
Tom was panting with his exertions by this time. He took a rest and then swelled himself up and fetched a
succession of admirable groans.
Sid snored on.
Tom was aggravated. He said, "Sid, Sid!" and shook him. This course worked well, and Tom began to groan
again. Sid yawned, stretched, then brought himself up on his elbow with a snort, and began to stare at Tom. Tom
went on groaning. Sid said:
"Tom! Say, Tom!" [No response.] "Here, Tom! TOM! What is the matter, Tom?" And he shook him and
looked in his face anxiously.
Tom moaned out:
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 17
"Oh, don't, Sid. Don't joggle me."
"Why, what's the matter, Tom? I must call auntie."
"No −− never mind. It'll be over by and by, maybe. Don't call anybody."
"But I must! DON'T groan so, Tom, it's awful. How long you been this way?"
"Hours. Ouch! Oh, don't stir so, Sid, you'll kill me."
"Tom, why didn't you wake me sooner ? Oh, Tom, DON'T! It makes my flesh crawl to hear you. Tom, what is
the matter?"
"I forgive you everything, Sid. [Groan.] Everything you've ever done to me. When I'm gone −−"
"Oh, Tom, you ain't dying, are you? Don't, Tom −− oh, don't. Maybe −−"
"I forgive everybody, Sid. [Groan.] Tell 'em so, Sid. And Sid, you give my window−sash and my cat with one
eye to that new girl that's come to town, and tell her −−"
But Sid had snatched his clothes and gone. Tom was suffering in reality, now, so handsomely was his
imagination working, and so his groans had gathered quite a genuine tone.
Sid flew down−stairs and said:
"Oh, Aunt Polly, come! Tom's dying!"
"Dying!"
"Yes'm. Don't wait −− come quick!"
"Rubbage! I don't believe it!"
But she fled up−stairs, nevertheless, with Sid and Mary at her heels. And her face grew white, too, and her lip
trembled. When she reached the bedside she gasped out:
"You, Tom! Tom, what's the matter with you?"
"Oh, auntie, I'm −−"
"What's the matter with you −− what is the matter with you, child?"
"Oh, auntie, my sore toe's mortified!"
The old lady sank down into a chair and laughed a little, then cried a little, then did both together. This restored
her and she said:
"Tom, what a turn you did give me. Now you shut up that nonsense and climb out of this."
The groans ceased and the pain vanished from the toe. The boy felt a little foolish, and he said:
"Aunt Polly, it SEEMED mortified, and it hurt so I never minded my tooth at all."
"Your tooth, indeed! What's the matter with your tooth?"
"One of them's loose, and it aches perfectly awful."
"There, there, now, don't begin that groaning again. Open your mouth. Well −− your tooth IS loose, but you're
not going to die about that. Mary, get me a silk thread, and a chunk of fire out of the kitchen."
Tom said:
"Oh, please, auntie, don't pull it out. It don't hurt any more. I wish I may never stir if it does. Please don't,
auntie. I don't want to stay home from school."
"Oh, you don't, don't you? So all this row was because you thought you'd get to stay home from school and go
a−fishing? Tom, Tom, I love you so, and you seem to try every way you can to break my old heart with your
outrageousness." By this time the dental instruments were ready. The old lady made one end of the silk thread fast
to Tom's tooth with a loop and tied the other to the bedpost. Then she seized the chunk of fire and suddenly thrust
it almost into the boy's face. The tooth hung dangling by the bedpost, now.
But all trials bring their compensations. As Tom wended to school after breakfast, he was the envy of every
boy he met because the gap in his upper row of teeth enabled him to expectorate in a new and admirable way. He
gathered quite a following of lads interested in the exhibition; and one that had cut his finger and had been a
centre of fascination and homage up to this time, now found himself suddenly without an adherent, and shorn of
his glory. His heart was heavy, and he said with a disdain which he did not feel that it wasn't anything to spit like
Tom Sawyer; but another boy said, "Sour grapes!" and he wandered away a dismantled hero.
Shortly Tom came upon the juvenile pariah of the village, Huckleberry Finn, son of the town drunkard.
Huckleberry was cordially hated and dreaded by all the mothers of the town, because he was idle and lawless and
vulgar and bad −− and because all their children admired him so, and delighted in his forbidden society, and
wished they dared to be like him. Tom was like the rest of the respectable boys, in that he envied Huckleberry his
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 18
gaudy outcast condition, and was under strict orders not to play with him. So he played with him every time he
got a chance. Huckleberry was always dressed in the cast−off clothes of full−grown men, and they were in
perennial bloom and fluttering with rags. His hat was a vast ruin with a wide crescent lopped out of its brim; his
coat, when he wore one, hung nearly to his heels and had the rearward buttons far down the back; but one
suspender supported his trousers; the seat of the trousers bagged low and contained nothing, the fringed legs
dragged in the dirt when not rolled up.
Huckleberry came and went, at his own free will. He slept on doorsteps in fine weather and in empty
hogsheads in wet; he did not have to go to school or to church, or call any being master or obey anybody; he
could go fishing or swimming when and where he chose, and stay as long as it suited him; nobody forbade him to
fight; he could sit up as late as he pleased; he was always the first boy that went barefoot in the spring and the last
to resume leather in the fall; he never had to wash, nor put on clean clothes; he could swear wonderfully. In a
word, everything that goes to make life precious that boy had. So thought every harassed, hampered, respectable
boy in St. Petersburg.
Tom hailed the romantic outcast:
"Hello, Huckleberry!"
"Hello yourself, and see how you like it."
"What's that you got?"
"Dead cat."
"Lemme see him, Huck. My, he's pretty stiff. Where'd you get him ?"
"Bought him off'n a boy."
"What did you give?"
"I give a blue ticket and a bladder that I got at the slaughter−house."
"Where'd you get the blue ticket?"
"Bought it off'n Ben Rogers two weeks ago for a hoop−stick."
"Say −− what is dead cats good for, Huck?"
"Good for? Cure warts with."
"No! Is that so? I know something that's better."
"I bet you don't. What is it?"
"Why, spunk−water."
"Spunk−water! I wouldn't give a dern for spunkwater."
"You wouldn't, wouldn't you? D'you ever try it?"
"No, I hain't. But Bob Tanner did."
"Who told you so!"
"Why, he told Jeff Thatcher, and Jeff told Johnny Baker, and Johnny told Jim Hollis, and Jim told Ben Rogers,
and Ben told a nigger, and the nigger told me. There now!"
"Well, what of it? They'll all lie. Leastways all but the nigger. I don't know HIM. But I never see a nigger that
WOULDN'T lie. Shucks! Now you tell me how Bob Tanner done it, Huck."
"Why, he took and dipped his hand in a rotten stump where the rain−water was."
"In the daytime?"
"Certainly."
"With his face to the stump?"
"Yes. Least I reckon so."
"Did he say anything?"
"I don't reckon he did. I don't know."
"Aha! Talk about trying to cure warts with spunkwater such a blame fool way as that! Why, that ain't a−going
to do any good. You got to go all by yourself, to the middle of the woods, where you know there's a spunk−water
stump, and just as it's midnight you back up against the stump and jam your hand in and say:
'Barley−corn, barley−corn, injun−meal shorts, Spunk−water, spunk−water, swaller these warts,'
and then walk away quick, eleven steps, with your eyes shut, and then turn around three times and walk home
without speaking to anybody. Because if you speak the charm's busted."
"Well, that sounds like a good way; but that ain't the way Bob Tanner done."
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 19
"No, sir, you can bet he didn't, becuz he's the wartiest boy in this town; and he wouldn't have a wart on him if
he'd knowed how to work spunkwater. I've took off thousands of warts off of my hands that way, Huck. I play
with frogs so much that I've always got considerable many warts. Sometimes I take 'em off with a bean."
"Yes, bean's good. I've done that."
"Have you? What's your way?"
"You take and split the bean, and cut the wart so as to get some blood, and then you put the blood on one piece
of the bean and take and dig a hole and bury it 'bout midnight at the crossroads in the dark of the moon, and then
you burn up the rest of the bean. You see that piece that's got the blood on it will keep drawing and drawing,
trying to fetch the other piece to it, and so that helps the blood to draw the wart, and pretty soon off she comes."
"Yes, that's it, Huck −− that's it; though when you're burying it if you say 'Down bean; off wart; come no more
to bother me!' it's better. That's the way Joe Harper does, and he's been nearly to Coonville and most everywheres.
But say −− how do you cure 'em with dead cats?"
"Why, you take your cat and go and get in the graveyard 'long about midnight when somebody that was
wicked has been buried; and when it's midnight a devil will come, or maybe two or three, but you can't see 'em,
you can only hear something like the wind, or maybe hear 'em talk; and when they're taking that feller away, you
heave your cat after 'em and say, 'Devil follow corpse, cat follow devil, warts follow cat, I'm done with ye!' That'll
fetch ANY wart."
"Sounds right. D'you ever try it, Huck?"
"No, but old Mother Hopkins told me."
"Well, I reckon it's so, then. Becuz they say she's a witch."
"Say! Why, Tom, I KNOW she is. She witched pap. Pap says so his own self. He come along one day, and he
see she was a−witching him, so he took up a rock, and if she hadn't dodged, he'd a got her. Well, that very night
he rolled off'n a shed wher' he was a layin drunk, and broke his arm."
"Why, that's awful. How did he know she was a−witching him?"
"Lord, pap can tell, easy. Pap says when they keep looking at you right stiddy, they're a−witching you.
Specially if they mumble. Becuz when they mumble they're saying the Lord's Prayer backards."
"Say, Hucky, when you going to try the cat?"
"To−night. I reckon they'll come after old Hoss Williams to−night."
"But they buried him Saturday. Didn't they get him Saturday night?"
"Why, how you talk! How could their charms work till midnight? −− and THEN it's Sunday. Devils don't slosh
around much of a Sunday, I don't reckon."
"I never thought of that. That's so. Lemme go with you?"
"Of course −− if you ain't afeard."
"Afeard! 'Tain't likely. Will you meow?"
"Yes −− and you meow back, if you get a chance. Last time, you kep' me a−meowing around till old Hays
went to throwing rocks at me and says 'Dern that cat!' and so I hove a brick through his window −− but don't you
tell."
"I won't. I couldn't meow that night, becuz auntie was watching me, but I'll meow this time. Say −− what's
that?"
"Nothing but a tick."
"Where'd you get him?"
"Out in the woods."
"What'll you take for him?"
"I don't know. I don't want to sell him."
"All right. It's a mighty small tick, anyway."
"Oh, anybody can run a tick down that don't belong to them. I'm satisfied with it. It's a good enough tick for
me."
"Sho, there's ticks a plenty. I could have a thousand of 'em if I wanted to."
"Well, why don't you? Becuz you know mighty well you can't. This is a pretty early tick, I reckon. It's the first
one I've seen this year."
"Say, Huck −− I'll give you my tooth for him."
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 20
"Less see it."
Tom got out a bit of paper and carefully unrolled it. Huckleberry viewed it wistfully. The temptation was very
strong. At last he said:
"Is it genuwyne?"
Tom lifted his lip and showed the vacancy.
"Well, all right," said Huckleberry, "it's a trade."
Tom enclosed the tick in the percussion−cap box that had lately been the pinchbug's prison, and the boys
separated, each feeling wealthier than before.
When Tom reached the little isolated frame schoolhouse, he strode in briskly, with the manner of one who had
come with all honest speed. He hung his hat on a peg and flung himself into his seat with business −like alacrity.
0 notes
phykios · 4 years ago
Text
Five Times Percy Jackson Cheated At School (And One Time Someone Cheated Him) [read on ao3]
thank you as always to @darkmagyk for inspo and beta-ing 💙💙💙 and thank you to @arosnowflake for the homer idea!
1)
Percy squints at the paper prompt again, tilting his head, as if the new angle will extract some hidden information. It doesn’t change. The font is the special dyslexia-friendly one used by most departments at NRU, so he isn’t misreading it, either.
Your final will be an 8-10pp (TNR, 12pt, double-spaced) research paper expanding on one of the topics discussed in our class so far, or an alternate idea of your choosing, to be submitted in writing by May 7 with footnotes and bibliography. By 10am on the Wednesday before the Thursday class you will submit online a 750-word essay (word count does not include footnotes) on the research thread you have pursued that week (no written assignments due Week 6 or Week 12). 
Percy might hate college.
“Your neck bothering you again?” Annabeth asks, coming up behind him, her hands already on his shoulders. She’s sweaty, dressed in workout clothes, having just come back in from a jog. 
“My neck is fine,” he says. “Just preemptively freaking out over my Roman history final.”
He tilts his head back over the top of his chair, staring into the upside down, prettily frowning face of his girlfriend, and it does nothing to improve his mood.
“How bad is it?”
“Eight to ten pages,” Percy says, “not including footnotes.”
“Ouch.”
“And,” he grimaces, “it’s a topic of our choosing.”
Her mouth twists in sympathy. “Sucks.”
“Yep.”
“Anything I can do to help?” She squeezes his shoulders lightly, an open invitation. 
He shakes his head, stretching his arms back to grab her waist. “Promise not to break up with me when you catch me crying at 4AM over it.”
“Promise.” And she seals it with a kiss, bending down to reach him. “Dad wants to know if you’re free on the 16th.” 
“The 16th?” He wracks his brain. He’s pretty sure it doesn’t conflict with sailing, or Greek Club, or the monthly intra-pantheon relations council meeting that Chiron and Clarisse both guilted him into joining. “Pretty sure. Why?”
“Dinner--Charlotte’s out of town that weekend.”
“Sounds good.”
“Great, I’ll let him know. Now,” and she grins, “are you going to stare at that computer all day, or do you want to come and take a shower with me?”
Percy slams the computer shut. 
He doesn’t think about his paper topic for a while after that.
***
To his great dismay, Percy gets to her dad’s house first on the 16th. Drama in writing group 🙄 she texts him as he gets to the door, be there asap.
Great. Alone in the house with his girlfriend’s dad. Taking a deep breath, he knocks on the door. 
Not a minute later, Dr. Chase opens it. Last time they went to visit, Percy and Annabeth had ended up waiting outside for almost a quarter of an hour. “Oh, Percy,” he says, fumbling his flight helmet off his head. “Goodness, I thought I’d lost track of time again. Come in, come in.”
“Thanks,” Percy says, stepping inside and shedding his jacket. “Annabeth’s running late, but she said she’d be here soon.”
He frowns, looking so much like Annabeth that it throws Percy for several loops. “Well, that’s alright,” he says. “I’m sure we can entertain ourselves well enough until she gets here.”
“Yeah,” Percy chuckles, uneasy.
Several seconds pass. 
“Oh!” starts Dr. Chase. “Right, yes. Come in. Would you like something to drink?”
Spoiler alert: it doesn’t get much better.
A few minutes of staggered conversation later, it becomes eminently clear why they need Annabeth between them. It’s not the awkward small talk that doesn’t go anywhere (“How’s school going for you?” “It’s okay.” “Good, that’s good to hear.”) or the fact that Dr. Chase doesn’t really grasp how to relate to younger kids (“Have you heard of this website called ‘Vine’?”), but more that it’s just painfully obvious that the two of them don’t really know where they stand with each other. 
Now, he knows that Frederick Chase doesn’t hate him. Objectively, he’s aware of the fact that, if it weren’t for him, Annabeth never would have reconnected with her father in the first place, and he kind of owes him for that. Also, Percy knows that he’s a pretty chill guy--a little scatterbrained, but chill. 
That doesn’t mean he doesn’t want to make a good impression, though. Or that Dr. Chase thinks that Percy is smart enough for his daughter. Because, like, Percy isn’t smart enough for Annabeth--that much is obvious. Dr. Chase was courted by Athena. Percy barely made it out of high school calculus.
“Would you…” Dr. Chase hedges, plucking off his glasses and giving them a quick wipe with his shirtsleeve. “Would you like to see some of my current research?”
“Uh… sure. I’d love to.” 
At the very least, hopefully Dr. Chase will talk enough for the both of them, eating up time until Annabeth gets here.
A new spring in his step, Dr. Chase leads Percy to his study, where he’s got a setup worthy of Cabin Six: on his desk is a massive map of the Mediterranean, littered with miniatures of tanks, planes, and ships. Ringing the room are wall-hangings, depicting different types of planes, half of their structure in x-rays like people in an anatomy textbook, sandwiching the giant viking sword which hangs directly behind his chair. Every inch of floor space is occupied with a pile of books, some serving as additional desk space for mugs, notepads, spare toy soldiers, and, in one case, what looks like the leftovers of a handful of celestial bronze spearheads, melted down into shiny, useless nuggets. 
“You know I primarily study aviation,” Dr. Chase is saying, tidying up as he walks around the room, “but my colleagues and I are collaborating on an interdisciplinary re-evaluation of the entire North African theatre in World War II. It’s fascinating stuff; until very recently, they used to call it the ‘war without hate,’ given the lack of partisan roundups and, ah, ethnic clashes that you see in Europe--absolute garbage, of course. As if there weren’t civilians caught up in the fighting, too!” He chuckles, pleased at his own joke. Percy forces a laugh out of himself. “Anyway, with my prior experience studying the invasion of Sicily, I was brought on to assist in piecing the timeline together, working backwards from 1943.”
“Cool,” says Percy, filling the natural gap of conversation.
“Extremely! Operation Husky was a terrific endeavor of airborne, amphibious, and land-based combat.”
Percy nods. Amphibious? “Uh-huh.”
“Though, I must admit, I am having a little trouble retracing some of the ships.” Peering over his map, he leans down, fiddling with one of the ships. “You see this one here? The Palmer?”
Stepping up to the desk, Percy crouches down so the little toy ship is at eye level.
“Well, based on official records, the Palmer was supposed to have arrived at the rendezvous point at the same time as all the other ships, but ended up delayed by two days, and I can’t… quite…” He moves the ship again, frowning. “Figure out… why…” 
“Where were they sailing through?” Percy asks. 
Dr. Chase points to the map. “From Alexandria to Malta.” 
“They probably just hit a bad couple of currents,” Percy says, standing up. 
Tilting his head, Dr. Chase peers at him. “How do you mean?”
“If you’re going through the Cretan Passage, you’re going to hit all kinds of West-East currents which will push you backwards.” Snatching up a pencil from a nearby book stack, Percy lightly sketches on top of the map, tracing along the North African coast. “There are tons of overlapping currents in this area that push boats around in circles, especially around Sicily. That’s one of the reasons why so many historians figure that Homer was referring to the Strait of Messina when Odysseus goes through Scylla and Charybdis, here.” And he circles the strait, with a confident flourish.
When he pulls back, Dr. Chase is staring at him.
Percy blinks. “Um… sorry I drew on your map.”
“You--I have been trying to figure that out for weeks.”
He coughs, shrugging his shoulders. “Sorry.”
But Dr. Chase just laughs. “You can make it up to me by helping me with these next.” Clearing crumbs off of southern France, he bends over, pencil in hand. “So, say you were trying to get from Marseilles to Tunis…” 
Forty-five minutes later, still embroiled in battle recreations of the Mediterranean theatre, they don’t hear Annabeth letting herself in with her key, not even registering her presence until Dr. Chase, grasping for a notebook, spots her leaning against the doorway. “Don’t stop on my account.”
“Oh, Annabeth, dear! I’m sorry,” says Dr. Chase, going over to give her a hug. “We didn’t hear you come in.”
“I can see that,” she says. “What are you guys doing?”
“Percy here has been assisting me with naval movements,” he says, proudly.
Lacing her fingers with his, Annabeth steps over to Percy, studying their battle map. “Really?”
“Oh yes, he’s been phenomenally helpful.”
She kisses his cheek, pleased. “Look at you, Mr. ‘Phenomenally Helpful.’”
“It was pretty fun,” he admits, warm all over.
“I’d bet. Although, I guess this means we should probably order in for dinner…?”
Rubbing at the back of his neck, Dr. Chase smiles. “Yes, I suppose we should. Does pizza sound all right to you two?”
“Let me take care of it,” she says, slipping from Percy’s side. “You guys looked like you were in the middle of something. Extra olives, dad?”
“Don’t forget--”
“And anchovies, Percy, I know.” She rolls her eyes, taking out her phone.
Rather than the three of them move into the kitchen, Annabeth ends up bringing the pizza in with her, because of course she has opinions she’d like to share about the Allies’ naval movements. 
“You know, Percy,” says Dr. Chase, “I must say, you have a real knack for this kind of thing. Have you thought about what you might major in yet?”
Ah, the million drachmae question. “Not yet,” he says, fiddling with a pencil. “I figured I’d get through my gen eds first and then see which one I hated the least.” 
“I think you should consider majoring in history.”
Percy’s head snaps up. “History?”
“Specifically maritime history, I suppose. Your predisposition to sailing and ocean currents would be a huge asset to your research.”
“But--wouldn’t history have, like, a metric ton of required reading? I’m not really sure that’s my area.” He has a daughter with dyslexia and ADHD; surely he’d understand Percy’s hesitation.
But he just shakes his head. “Graduate programs these days are very favorable towards interdisciplinary methodology, I sincerely doubt you’d have to barricade yourself in the library. And recently there’s been a significant push to make the field more accessible to students with disabilities, including things like digitization, screen reading for people with vision impairments, and even restructuring programs all together so that students no longer have to memorize the Encyclopedia Britannica in order to pass their general exams.”
“That’s really nice of you to say, Dr. Chase,” Percy says, “But history class isn’t like talking over naval movements with you.” He thought back to the paper that had lowkey been haunting his dreams. “Like, in my classical history survey, I can’t just… talk about currents and battle plans. I have to come up with a topic on my own, and then write about that.” 
“Surely something involving Roman naval movements would be well within your skill set. You have a second sense about these things,” he chuckles, “clearly.”
Percy glances towards Annabeth, hoping she’ll back him up, but she looks thoughtful. Considering. Like she’s actually thinking about her dad’s proposal. “I can’t just choose something in naval history.”
“Why not?”
“Because… it's too easy?” 
If it was anything like his afternoon with Dr. Chase, it might even be fun. And school isn’t supposed to be fun. 
He repeats that thought to Annabeth as they drive home. “School isn’t supposed to be fun.” 
“No,” Annabeth agrees, “but I don’t know… I like my intro art history class way better than anything we ever did in high school because I actually care about it. Maybe if you write about stuff you’re good at, like my dad suggested, you’ll like it more.” 
The idea follows him all the way to bed, where he’s still mulling it over at 2 in the morning. Before he can chicken out, he grabs his phone, shooting off a quick email to his professor with his potential paper topic, then rolls over, eventually falling asleep.
By morning, he has a response. 
Sounds good! Looking forward to it.
***
With shaking hands, Percy calls his mom. “Yes?” 
“Hey mom.”
“Percy?” He hears her perk up, almost visualizing her sitting up in her chair. “What’s wrong, sweetie?”
Mom instincts. They can always tell when something is different. His heart throbs in his chest. “Nothing’s wrong,” he says, smiling stretching across his face. “It’s just--I got my paper back.” 
Percy had ended up writing his paper about the Roman navy movements in the Battle of the Aegates in 241 BC. It was probably the most fun he’s ever had on a school assignment, or at least the most fun he’d ever had writing a paper. 
“And?” She sounds expectant, hopeful. His mom has always had such faith in him, even with thirteen years of schooling to prove her otherwise. 
He looks back at his email, just to make sure he’s reading it right. “I got an A.”
She gasps. He can hear the scrape of the chair as she stands up. “Percy, that’s wonderful!” 
“Thank you.”
“An A!”
He smiles into his fist, inordinately pleased. “Thank you.”
“Oh, sweetheart, I am so happy for you!”
“Thanks, mom.”
“I’m so proud of you, Percy.” Her voice is soft now, like twilights on the beach with blue marshmallows. “I know how hard you’ve worked for this. You should be very proud, too.”
“I am.” And he is, weirdly enough. “I just can’t believe it.”
“I can.” His mom must be grinning, her eyes sparkling. “I always knew you could do it.”
“Sally?” He hears in the background, muffled. “Is that Percy?”
“Paul, Percy got an A on his Roman history paper!”
A second voice crowds its way in, equally excited. “An A? That’s great, kiddo! Congratulations.”
Why can’t he stop smiling? “Thanks.”
“I bet that feels pretty good, doesn’t it?”
“It does.”
“Well, it is very well-deserved,” says Paul. “That was some great work you did. I could tell how passionate you were about your topic just from your first sentence.”
“Thank you.” Maybe he should be worried about all this praise going to his head, but damn, is it nice. “Listen, I have to go get started on dinner, but I just wanted to give you a call.”
“Of course,” says his mom. “I want to hear from you more, okay? Tell me more good news! Like when are you and Annabeth going to--”
“I’m working on it, okay?” says Percy, smiling even more broadly. “I’ll keep you posted, promise.”
She laughs, tinny and happy. “You’d better. Congratulations again, sweetheart.”
“Thanks mom. Love you.”
“Love you, too.” 
And he hangs up, puts his phone down on the table, tilts his head back, and sighs, full, happy, a release. 
Maybe college won’t be so bad after all. 
2)
“You don’t have to do this,” Frank says, hushed. “All you have to do is walk away.”
Five Greek Fire bombs, cloudy yellow, are lined up on the table in front of him, neatly laid out in front of five twenties. From the side, Frank stares him down, surrounded by an army of morbidly curious Romans. Someone turned off the music and turned on the lights a while ago, stopping the party in its tracks, every eye on Percy and his opponent. Figures, his first college party all year and he causes a scene. 
Percy grips the edge of the table. “He insulted the Mets,” he says for the millionth time. “I can’t let that shit stand.”
Frank sighs. “Annabeth?” he asks, hoping to stop this nonsense.
Turning to his side, Percy sees his girlfriend, two drinks in, her cheeks lightly flushed, but solid as she stands beside him, supporting him. Her eyes are hard, fierce, the warrior gaze of Athena all but leaping out of her. “Do it,” she says. 
William, the sour-faced Roman legacy of Juventus, scowls. “A hundred bucks on the table. Sixty seconds. No throwing them back up.”
“Deal.”
“Frank,” Annabeth calls. “Start the clock.”
He sighs. “You guys are idiots.”
“Frank!”
“Okay, okay.” He holds out his phone, thumb primed, hovering over the screen. “On your marks, in three… two… one…” 
He hits zero, and Percy grabs a shot glass. Squeezing his eyes shut, he brings it to his lips, and throws it back.
It’s… not what he expected.
The tequila is awful--no getting around that. Even to Percy’s untrained taste buds, having really only ever had some of Gabe’s sour beer (under duress) and some of the Demeter cabin’s strawberry wine (on his eighteenth birthday, a celebration for actually getting to graduate high school), he can tell it’s cheap, rank, unrefined shit, like he’s drinking straight toilet cleaner. But the garum, the weird Roman condiment that the shot is mixed with, the one that Percy had never heard of before, it’s… it almost tastes like the fish sauce that comes with the pork and rice noodles from the Vietnamese place down the corner of his mom’s apartment, only less… fishy? Yeah. Less fishy.
It’s a weird taste. It’s not bad, by any means, it just--straight up, it just tastes like saltwater. Like the sea. 
And, well. Percy can handle the sea.
He looks at William, and grins. “You are so fucked.”
The assembled Romans cheer, spectators at a gladiator show, as Percy knocks back the rest of the Greek Fire bombs, one after another, clearing them all in under thirty seconds. Annabeth swipes up the cash, shrieking as she throws her arms around Percy. William wanders off, red-faced and glaring, as whoever turned the music off before flips it back on, the night, and the party, saved.
Silly Percy. He should have known what was coming next.
Thirty minutes later, he is well and truly wasted.
“You’re, like, really pretty,” he shouts at Annabeth over the loud music.
She snorts, grinning at him. “Thanks.”
“Seriously,” he slurs, tipping forward on his feet. “You could be a model.”
“I’ll keep that in mind.”
“Remember when we were fourteen,” he yells, bracing himself against the wall, “and you got kidnapped by that monster?” Slightly soberer but still a little flushed, she bites her lip, nodding. “Well, I followed the rescue party--I told you that, that I snuck out of camp to follow the rescue party? Right?” 
“You did.”
He takes a sip of water, running his tongue around the inside of his mouth. Feels goofy as fuck. “We got hijacked by Aphrodite halfway through, and when I saw her, I thought--I thought, ‘Holy shit, she looks a little like Annabeth.’”
Her brows shoot up, smile pulling at her lips. “Really?”
He nods. “Totally! But you’re way, way p--” 
Still smiling, she silences him with a kiss, the lingering taste of hard cider on her tongue. “I appreciate it,” she murmurs, grinning, “but you probably shouldn’t say that out loud.”
“Gross.”
From out of nowhere, like he always does, the weasley little shit, Nico di Angelo is suddenly in their space, looking surly and emo as ever, red solo cup in his left hand. “Nico!” Percy crows, grabbing for him and missing. “How’s my favorite cousin?!”
Ducking his wildly swinging limbs, Nico grimaces in the way that Percy has to come to recognize as his attempt at a smile. “Better’n you,” he says, a little wobbly. “What’s up with him?” he directs towards Annabeth.
“Greek Fire bombs. Five.”
“You’re a psychopath.”
“What!” Percy pouts. “He insulted the Mets.”
“Aren’t you s’posed to be, like…” Nico snaps his fingers, words momentarily escaping him. “A--representation… person? For the Greeks?”
Percy waves his hand, hitting the wall. “Fuck that. The Greeks can handle themselves. The Mets are sacred!”
“Are you with anyone?” Annabeth asks, momentarily taking up Percy’s usual role of concerned parent friend while he is drunk off his ass. Theoi, he loves this girl so much. 
Nico shakes his head. “No, but Will and I are staying with--”
A thought suddenly blooms in Percy’s tequila-soaked brain. “Nico!” He shouts.
“What?” he hisses, glaring.
Percy pushes himself off of the wall, outstretched arms managing to box Nico in, falling on his shoulders and trapping him. He’s still a short, skinny little shit, the fuck, when are his Big Three genes going to kick in? “I need to talk to you about the thing.”
“The what?”
“The thing! The--the,” then he leans in, scream-whispering over the pounding bassline. “The thing.”
“That doesn’t help.”
“You know, it’s…” Percy licks his lips, language escaping him for a hot second. “Round. Metal. Jewelry thing.”
A beat, then Nico’s eyes widen. “Oh, that thing.”
“Yes, that thing!” Pulling back, he pulls Nico towards him, slinging an arm over his shoulders in a half-headlock. Annabeth watches, bemused, lips pursed as she tries not to smile. “I need to borrow Nico for a sec,” he says, words spilling out of him. “Back soon. Later. Soon.”
Her eyes crinkle, grey sparkling. She’s so fucking pretty. “Drink your water.”
“Yes, ma’am.” Then together, like some three-legged beast, the two boys lurch away deeper into the party, Nico leading them towards the kitchen. “Where’re you taking me?” Percy slurs. “‘M I being kidnapped again?”
“If I’m helping you plan out this stupid proposal,” he grumbles, pouring himself more vodka, “then I need to be less sober.”
***
Some mistakes may have been made.
“Where’s Annabeth?” Percy mumbles, looking back towards the house. The party is still raging, someone’s muffled Spotify playlist making a real racket, the greatest hits of ABBA still bouncing around his skull.
“Simp.” Nico, swaying a little, tries to stand up from his kneeling position, only to fall heavily back down on his knees. “She’s right where you left her.”
Discussing Percy's proposal plan had led to more drinking. More drinking had led to the two of them discussing their shared preference for blondes. (“Malcolm is pretty cute,” Nico admitted, flushing, and Percy almost screamed, “Isn’t he?! Sometimes I think about Annabeth with short hair looking like Malcolm and I almost start crying because she’d be so cute!”) Which then led to even more drinking. Which then led to general bitching about their lives, about Percy's hard-ass classics professor Dr. Bauer who he actually really liked but just pushed him so hard and expected so much of him, and Nico's half-brother Zagreus who was causing some family drama by picking fights with Hades all the time and also hooking up with both Thanatos AND the fury Megaera, which, ew, which then led to Percy inhaling his drink, nearly choking to death on unspecified college punch, Nico laughing at him all the while, as he had the most incredible idea.
"Nico!" He shouted, crushing the red solo cup. "Can you resurrect Homer for me?"
Nico gaped, staring. "What."
"Seriously! I need to ask him something for my paper."
"Percy." Nico gazed at him, all the power of the Ghost King boring into his soul, deep and haunting. Percy stifled a burp. "You're a fucking genius."
Which is how they found themselves around a shallow hole they had dug in the backyard, a large bottle of Pepsi originally intended as a mixer pilfered from the kitchen along with two slices of pepperoni pizza dumped on the grass beside them.
"Maybe we shouldn't do this," he says, uneasy even through his drunken haze.
"It was your idea!"
"I don't have good ideas."
“Fuck you, I’m doing it.” With all the force of a tiny, angry kitten, he snatches up the Pepsi bottle, wrestling with the twist cap for a good ten seconds. “I wanna give that bitch a piece of my mind for making me cry in school.”
Percy looks at him sideways. “Hector killing Patroclus got you, too?”
He snorts. “Fuck no. Achilles didn’t pay his dues to the dead.”
“Seriously?”
The cap pops off, and Nico tips the bottle over, dumping flat, lukewarm soda into the shallow hole. “It’s the ultimate dishonor!”
Freak. Percy would die for the kid.
“Let the dead taste again,” Nico mutters. “Let them rise and take this offering. Let them remember.”
“You’re so weird.”
“Says the guy who’s related to both horses and water.”
“I’m not related to water, I just control it.” 
The dirt turns black, dead soil mixed with sticky sugar water. Nico drops in the pizza, and begins to chant, that same ancient Greek that Percy heard in a dream once, talking of death and memories and returning from the grave or whatever. It’s still creepy as shit. 
Despite the warm California night, the air thickens with chilly fog. Silence, impenetrable, surrounds them, blocking out the noises of the party. From the earth, blueish, vaguely person-shaped figures begin to form, like thunderous clouds before a storm. “Which one is Homer?” he asks, hushed.
“Shh!” Nico hisses. 
Like little wells of gravity, the fog begins to coalesce. On one of them, Percy can almost make out, like, fingers. “Um, Mr. Homer? Sir?”
The figure doesn’t say anything. It lowers its mouth, drinking the soda out of the dirt. When it raises its head, Percy can see it more clearly, curly hair and milky white eyes and a straight nose. It--he?--seems a little more solid than your average run-of-the-mill ghost.
Nico frowns, eyes closed, concentrating. “What’s your name?” he mumbles. 
That mouth opens, soundlessly, jaw working on nothing.
“Speak.”
It--there’s a sound, like hissing, only it’s not coming from the mouth, Percy thinks. It sounds like it’s coming from the earth. “Nico?” he asks. “You good?”
The ghost opens its mouth again, moaning, raising its hands. Weakly, unsteadily, it stumbles forward on feeble legs, tripping over the shallow hole in the dirt.
“Nico?” he asks again, a little more forcefully. “What’s going on, dude?”
Nico blinks, slowly, mouth hanging open a little. “Uh.”
The… thing… raises itself up on its hands? He guesses, and knees, crawling its way over towards them.
Now, Percy may be drunk off his ass, but he has seen enough movies to know exactly what the fuck is up.
Moving with a speed he didn’t quite think was possible right about now, he grabs Nico’s wrist, and pulls him up, dragging him along as he lurches towards the house. “Percy…” Nico moans, stumbling over a rock. “I think I fucked up.”
“You think?” Percy wrenches the door open, tossing Nico inside, before following in after, throwing himself against the door. 
Nico groans, throwing his arms over his face. “Dio santo, my head.”
“Forget your head,” he says, “did we just raise a Homer zombie?!”
Panting, Nico stares up at him, sprawled on the floor of the house. “Oops.”
Percy thunks his head against the door. He does not have nearly enough mental capacity to deal with this right now.
But, he thinks ruefully, at least it’s just one. Even drunk, he’s pretty sure he can handle one zombie.
Nico’s eyes widen. 
Percy stares. “What.”
“I didn’t stop the ritual.”
His stomach goes cold.
Turning around slowly, he pulls aside the little curtain on the window. “What?” Nico asks. “What do you see?”
Percy can’t speak, mouth dry.
Slithering up behind, Nico peers over his shoulder. “That’s… not great.”
“Nico,” Percy says, eyeing the horde which slowly shambles closer, half-decayed bodies in togas bumping into each other, almost identical to the drunk college students inside, as the song changes, once again, to ‘Gimme! Gimme! Gimme! (A Man After Midnight).’ “Please go get Frank and Annabeth.”
The following Monday, an announcement is sent out to the entire campus: Per new department guidelines, students may not utilize the ambassador of Pluto to interview the dead for academic purposes.
3)
Percy attempts to flatten his hair. He readjusts his shirt. He almost wipes his sweaty palms on his pants, before he realizes what he’s doing, and clenches them instead, nails digging into his palms. He turns to Annabeth. “Do I look okay?”
“Ooh, ‘Mapping Funerary Monuments in the Periphery of Imperial Rome.’”
“Annabeth.”
She looks up from her brochure. “Relax, seaweed brain, you look fine. You look better than most people here.”
“That’s because I bring down the average age of presenters by about thirty years,” he hisses, eyes darting about at the milling mass of attendees, all packed into the hotel ballroom. 
Dr. Bauer had alternately convinced/pressured/guilttripped him into attending this year’s annual conference for the Society of Classical Studies to talk about the research he’d been doing with her. This year, the conference was held in San Francisco, so at the very least Percy didn’t have to spend five hours stressing about his poster presentation while simultaneously up in the air. But now that he’s here, in the ballroom, surrounded by strangers who know way more about this subject than he does, who are actually smart and probably never nearly flunked out of school or got kicked out or--
“Hey.” Annabeth takes his hand. “I know that look. You deserve to be here just as much as any of them.”
“Do I? I feel like any moment someone is going to come over and throw me out for trespassing.” He vaguely recalls something similar happening to him as a kid after he had ducked into the lobby of a semi-nice hotel to dodge what he had thought, at the time, was just a weird stalker, but had later realized had only had one eye. In any case, the hotel security guard had practically picked him up by the scruff of his neck, tossing him back out into the street. 
“That’s just your imposter syndrome talking,” she reassures him. “No one is going to throw you out.”
He sure as shit hopes so. It would be a shame to have done all this work for nothing. 
Glancing back at his poster, Percy can’t help but feel… good. Accomplished. Proud. About a school assignment, of all things. 
His poster traces the development of the prow from the Greek penteconter, to the Roman liburna, and finally to the Byzantine dromon, looking at artistic depictions in history. Percy had picked the topic himself, spending hours in the library reading, writing, and hand-drawing cross-sections of the ships on the poster board when the images he had gotten from the Cambridge University library had been too small. It had been grueling, frustrating work, but fun, too. And not nearly as much reading as he had feared.
Dr. Chase proofread it for him. Dr. Bauer signed off on it. And Annabeth had taken one look at it, smiled, then kissed his cheek.
That was the best compliment he had gotten.
Though now he’s kind of torn between showing it off and hiding it away before one of these attendees figures out that he doesn’t belong.
He rocks back and forth and his feet, pursing his lips, randomly clicking his tongue. Annabeth nudges him. “Your ADHD is showing.”
That’s when, finally, one of the attendees steps up to his poster. He certainly has the look of a professor, in a black cable knit sweater with grey, curly hair and a receding hairline, thin, rimless glasses perched on his nose. He squints at Percy’s poster, rubbing his chin with one hand. “Interesting,” he murmurs, in a thick German accent. “Very interesting. This is yours?”
“Um.” He glances at Annabeth, who is frowning at the brochure, silently sounding out words that she can’t read. “Yep. All mine.”
“Very interesting.” He leans in closer, tilting his head. “So you agree with Pryor and Jeffreys about the skeleton-first construction, then?”
Percy blinks. Pryor and Jeffreys had written The Age of the Dromon, arguing that the ram, which had been a key feature of Roman liburnians, had gone away in ancient ship construction because of developments in how they built the hull. Right. “Yes,” he says. “The skeleton-first construction is a lot stronger than the, um,” shit, what was the name for this, Leo had only told him about a million times--oh! “Mortise-and-tenon!” He nearly shrieks. “The mortise-and-tenon method. It, um, it wears out a lot more quickly than the frame, so… yeah.” He clears his throat.
He nods. “Very interesting.” 
Percy stares. Can this guy say anything else? 
“This is very well done, young man.”
Oh. “Thank you,” he says. 
“Who are you working with?” 
“Um, June Bauer?” He winces at the accidental question. 
He frowns. “I’m not familiar with her work. Where does she teach?” 
What a loaded question. “Uh… New Rome University.”
“I’m sorry?”
“It’s--she used to teach at Northwestern, if that helps. Um, retired,” Percy says.
The frown stays, but at least he doesn’t ask any more questions. “Hmm. Well, this is excellent research, nonetheless. I look forward to reading your dissertation.” Then, distracted by something else, he wanders off, chin still attached to his hand. 
“Who was that?” Annabeth asks. 
Percy shrugs. “Beats me. Also, what’s a dissertation?”
“It’s like a senior thesis, but, like, five hundred pages long.”
Five hundred?! “Fuck me.” 
“Maybe later,” Annabeth smirks. “It looks like you’ve got company.”
Sure enough, a smallish group of four people are approaching, led by Dr. Chase, making a beeline straight for them. “Here we are,” Dr. Chase says, gesturing. “This is the project I was telling you about. Percy, would you mind going over your poster for us?”
“No problem, Dr. C,” says Percy, smiling his least-grimace-y smile. 
As one, the adults all turn to look at him, faces politely blank, expectant.
Percy swallows. “So,” he begins, “um, this research is about the development of ship construction in the Roman empire…”
He trips up on some of the words, and at one point, he sees Dr. Chase squint in the way that usually means that Percy is speaking too fast, but all in all, he doesn’t totally fall flat on his face. His audience looks engaged, nodding along as Percy moves from point to point, and no one accuses him of being a giant fraud, which is pretty nice. 
At one point, Percy turns to the poster to indicate a specific point on his ship diagrams. When he turns back, his audience has suddenly multiplied, four people turning into a whole goddamn crowd. Each person gives him their undivided attention almost unblinking.
His mouth goes dry. “Um…” 
Dr. Chase, bless him, saves his ass once again. “Would mind starting again from the beginning, Percy?” he asks, a little bemused himself at the amount of people that had suddenly appeared. 
Silence stretches on for a moment, the muffled noise of the rest of the conference like a dull roar in his ear. 
Annabeth, behind him, coughs. 
“S-sure. No problem.” 
Swallowing, he closes his eyes, breathing in through his nose. Why, oh why did he let Dr. Bauer talk him into doing this again?
He pictures the tides of Long Island Sound, gentle and rocking, unhurried and unbothered, tries to match his breathing to them. When he opens his eyes, unfortunately, the crowd hasn’t disappeared. Everyone is still staring at him. 
But Annabeth stands next to her dad, flashing him a big smile and two huge thumbs up.
Percy relaxes. He’s got this.
“Okay,” he says. “So, about the middle of the first millennium CE, ship construction went through a couple of major developments…”
This time goes much, much more smoothly. He’s not sure what it is--though it’s probably Annabeth, her face fixed in a gentle smile as she watches him speak. Gods, what did he do in a past life to deserve someone as amazing as his girlfriend? 
That’s the only reason he can do this. Hell, that’s the only reason he even thought to do this. If he didn’t have Annabeth there, encouraging him, cheering him on, he never would have had the confidence to put himself out there like this. She’s there to pick him up when he doubts himself, there to listen when he can’t explain himself, there to give him feedback when he needs to practice. 
She makes him feel so strong. She makes him feel like he can take on the world--or at the very least, that he can impress a handful of academics.
And they certainly seem impressed with his talk so far. 
“Excuse me,” says a nasally, pinched looking older British guy, face lined as though he lived his life in a state of perpetual squinting. “I find your conclusions to be suspect--wouldn’t the frame method be more susceptible to breaking than the mortise-and-tenon?”
Well, most of them, anyway.
Percy shakes his head. “You’d think, but no. If you look at the study by Steffy, you’ll see that the three-finned ram from the Athlit wreck was designed specifically to break the mortise-and-tenon hull by causing the planks to flex, so that they’d dislodge the joinerys right next to them. A blow like that can cause the wood to split right down the middle.” A blow like that had sunk Sherman Yang’s ship when they tested it out on the lake at camp last summer, the naiads practically hurling him out of the water so quickly Percy didn’t even have to dive in to save him.
“How were you able to do these strength tests?” asks another listener, an older woman with a thick Hungarian accent.
“Hands-on battle simulations,” Percy replies, easily. “We took our models and tested them in as accurate a simulation as we could make.”
“And how big were these models?” 
Percy holds his hands apart, a vague, entirely inaccurate estimate. “About thirty meters, give or take.”
Her eyes widen. “How on earth did you get your hands on such a large ship?”
Percy freezes. “Uh.”
Oh, shit.
He had forgotten--most people didn’t have dads who could summon shipwrecks from the bottom of the sea, dropping them off at Camp Half-Blood with nothing but a sand dollar and one or two exhausted, pissed off hippocampi who had had to drag them all the way there.
“Um,” he stammers, licking his lips, thinking fast--c’mon, Percy, think! “I…” He swallows, panicking. “I… b… built one.”
In the corner of his eye, Annabeth facepalms.
Simultaneously, every mouth in the crowd drops--in shock, outrage, and even excitement. “You built one?!” the woman yelps. 
Oops. “I had help,” Percy says, quickly. 
Annabeth adds a second hand to her facepalm.
“Where?” The first man asks, his bushy brows flying above the rim of his glasses.
“At my… summer camp…” 
Dr. Chase sighs, pinching the bridge of his nose.
“I mean,” Percy chuckles, shrugging his shoulders, trying not to sweat too obviously, “it was either that or lanyards, am I right?”
Dr. Chase, thank Athena, raises his hand, ready to step in. “What Percy means to say, I believe,” he says, attempting to draw their attention, “is that--”
“That’s amazing!” says another woman, probably a grad student attendee based on the fact that she’s wearing jeans. “Do you have pictures?”
Oh this is not good. “Um, not--not on me, but--”
“I do.” Annabeth takes out her phone, holding it up to the person next to her.
Percy blinks. “You do?” He doesn’t remember her taking any pictures.
She shoots him a look, two parts exasperated and one part “shut up and let me handle this,” with just a dash of fondness in the mix. Pointedly, she looks at him, eyebrows raised, indicating that he should continue.
Oh. She’s using Mist. And he needs to keep their attention on him so that they buy it. “Right,” he says, clearing his throat. “Any more questions?” 
His audience placated for now, passing around Annabeth’s phone, he manages to finish up his presentation. After fielding a few more questions, people start to peel off, distracted by other posters and presenters in the ballroom. When everyone has finally wandered away, Dr. Chase comes up and pats Percy’s shoulder awkwardly. “Nice work,” he says, and he seems like he means it. “A little touch-and-go there for a while, hm?”
“A little.”
He chuckles. “Still, you should be proud. I don’t know how many undergraduates would be able to handle that kind of pressure.”
“I mean,” Percy says, shrugging a shoulder, “it’s about on par with leading an army. Maybe a little less.” Honestly, maybe even a little more stressful. If a monster had decided to attack the convention center and interrupt his presentation, he probably would have been relieved.
He’d been worried for a moment that he’d undone all those years of work in making Annabeth’s dad like him. And that he’d be charged with some sort of academic fraud, for the whole “I have a boat” thing without proof. Thank the gods for Annabeth, as always.
She’s looking at him now through narrowed eyes. She at least can’t be surprised--that was far from the dumbest thing she’s ever seen him do. At least his “I spent most of my time at magic greek mythology summer camp” covers are normally better than hers. As someone who spent his formative years in the real world, he’s usually pretty good at keeping the demigod thing under wraps. 
“Come on,” she says, grabbing his hand. She pulls him off, through the dispersing crowd, lacing their fingers together, sweet and intimate, out of the hall and then down another one, and through a smaller corridor. Bringing them up to a little door, with a shake of her wrist, she pulls out her Estruscan keyring bracelet. About several of the keys have found themselves used in various misadventures, vanishing once their purpose is fulfilled, but her favorite key is still there. And, just like a clever child of Hermes, it can pick just about any lock. 
Inside is just an empty room, a little staging area surrounded by tiered desks going up, no more or less remarkable than any of the other conference rooms they’d visited before. 
“What--?” His question is cut off by Annabeth’s mouth on his. 
Surprising, but definitely not unwelcome.
It's a while before they separate again. “You’re so good at this,” she tells him, unbuttoning his shirt.
He runs his hands along the lines of her flanks. “I’ve had a lot of practice,” he grins. He’d practice kissing her all day long if he could. 
She smiles, shaking her head. “No, not this,” though she does lean in for another kiss, pulling at his lower lip with her teeth. “I know you’re good at this.” They break away, Percy pulling her shirt over her head, Annabeth shucking off his. “But history. Presenting.” She runs a finger over his chest, kissing his cheek, headed towards the sensitive spot on his jaw. “Gods, you’re so smart.” 
Something about the praise vibrates through his chest. She doesn’t sound surprised, or anything, just--turned on.
“You had all those crusty academics eating out of your hand. Just, so impressed by you, knowing you know way more than they do about naval history. When you were explaining the--” Her compliment is cut off with a moan, as he leans down and starts sucking on her throat. Her blouse has a high neck, so he feels no guilt for using his teeth.  
“Watching you today, gods.” Her breath is labored as his fingers play at the waistline of her skirt. “And then thinking of you defending your dissertation.” He bites at her jugular, and she lets out a long, deep moan. 
“I don’t know what that means.” Do academics fight each other? Like, with weapons? He’s pretty sure he can take most of the people he met today. 
“It means you get to show off how smart you are,” Annabeth says, grasping his shoulders, pulling him in for another kiss. “I was born the day my dad defended his. Gods, it's going to be amazing to watch you go.” She yanks his belt out of his pants, tossing it to the floor. 
They miss the panel on recent translation efforts. But Percy can’t say he minds one bit. 
And when Annabeth presents him with a positive pregnancy test two months later, Percy definitely knows he made the right decision. 
4) 
He almost doesn’t realize he’s having a dream-vision at first.
It has been literal years since he’s had a demigod dream. Hell, it’s been a long while since he’s had a dream, period--being a new dad to a one-and-a-half-year-old saps too much of his energy to even think about dreaming. Once Junie is put to bed, when he’s out, he is fucking out, and he does not have the brainpower to spare to manifest any messed up subconscious fears.
Which is why when he blinks open his eyes, taking in the too-bright colors of the Parthenon and the gleaming shine of the bronze statues which are somehow all looking at him--also, you know, how the Parthenon is complete, standing as it did thousands of years ago, and not crumbled into ruins--he knows, immediately, he is being contacted by a god.
And only one god in particular would bring him to Athens.
Without even checking, he heaves himself up off the ground, folding into a kneel. “My lady Athena,” he says, “can I ask for what quest you’ve brought me here?”
“Impertinent as ever, Percy Jackson,” rumbles the goddess, but Percy doesn’t think he can sense any ill will towards him. He hopes, anyway. “Perhaps I have summoned you here for a social visit.”
“Perhaps,” he says, choosing his next words as carefully as possible. “But I assume you have too much to worry about to randomly check up on your daughter’s boyfriend.”
He lifts his head, catching her expression--stoic as always, but maybe with just the barest hint of a smile. “You assume correctly. You have become, contrary to my initial expectations, very wise in the time that I have known you.”
“Thank you.” He knows better than to do anything but accept the compliment for what it is.
“I have observed your work as a scholar in recent years, and I must say that I am surprised, yet pleased, that you have chosen to pursue such a path. I had not thought you to be suited for a world of old men and dusty papers.”
He grits his teeth. Don’t rise to the bait, don’t rise to the bait, don’t rise to the bait--
“I understand, as well, that though you and my daughter have,” and here her careful composition cracks, just the slightest, the tiny lift of her lips falling, “made a child together.”
Percy swallows. He figured, you know, in the abstract, that Athena would know about Junie, but hearing her say it out loud is… well, he’s just glad that Dr. Chase has always liked him. “Yes, my lady.”
“It is customary in your time to marry prior to childbirth, is it not?”
“It is.” Oh, fuck, is she going to smite him for that? “I--that is to say, we, Annabeth and I, we, um, we definitely want to get married, but, Annabeth kind of…” 
He trails off. He can’t tell Athena, goddess of war, that his daughter pissed off the queen of heaven! And if he does, he definitely can’t imply that it was because she was being too stubborn!
“I know well of my daughter’s history with my father’s wife,” Athena says, smoothly. “I come to you now with an offer of peace.”
Percy straightens his back. Peace?
Raising one graceful arm, Athena turns, indicating the structure behind her. “Look upon my temple,” she intones. The white marble shines even more powerfully against the blue and red paint, intricate scenes and figures ringing the top of the columns. “In the time of Pericles, it was built to commemorate the victory of Hellas over the armies of Xerxes the Great. It was to be the shining beacon of our world, a triumph of our power and influence over the race of men.”
The race of men might have had something to say about that, he thinks to himself.
“But it was not to be,” Athena says, mournfully. “As our influence waned, so too did our temple, until its might was all but forgotten.” 
Before his eyes, the paint fades away, ceilings and columns collapsing, the destruction of the Parthenon playing out in front of him. 
“Some two hundred years ago,” she says, her voice taking on a darker, more dangerous tone, “a grave insult was paid to the ruins of my ancient sanctuary.” Like curtains falling on a stage, darkness swallowed up the structure, swift and impenetrable. “Many treasures were taken from my temple, stolen, by foolish, greedy men, spirited away far to the north, where they have languished in unworthy hands.”
He narrows his eyes. She can’t possibly be talking about--
Athena turns back to him, her eyes blazing, somehow twice as tall. “Retrieve my treasures,” she commands, war personified, “return the prizes of Athens to their rightful place, and I shall give you my support against my father’s wife.”
“You…” Percy leans back on his haunches, staring dumbfounded up at the goddess. “You don’t happen to mean the Parthenon Marbles, do you?”
“Yes.”
“The ones in the British Museum.”
“The same,” she says, imperious as ever.
Fantastic. “Welp,” Percy says, slapping his thighs, scrambling up. “Thanks for the offer, but I’ll have to decline. Nice seeing you, by the way. I’ll tell Annabeth you stopped by.”
Her sharp gazes pierces him, full of fury. “You dare to refuse my support?”
He snorts. “When it means trying to get the UK to give the marbles back, absolutely. Do you know how stubborn they are about this?”
Lightning flashes behind her, nearly blinding him. “You will regret this,” Athena says, dark and foreboding. “You may have your father’s goodwill, but the queen of Olympus is clever and cunning, her displeasure swift and merciless.”
But Percy still shakes his head. “When Annabeth and I get married,” and it’s definitely a ‘when,’ it’s just a matter of when precisely, like after Junie can sleep through the night maybe, “I’d rather take my chances with Hera than try and untangle that particular can of olives.”
A growl, and a snap of her fingers, and Athena disappears.
With a start, Percy wakes up. Junie had gotten her chubby little hands around his nose, and had decided to pull.
“Ow, ow, Junie, hey,” he squawks, attempting to dislodge her grip from his face. “Hey, I’m awake, it’s okay.”
She laughs, illegally adorable, her grey eyes sparkling, squeezing harder. 
“Okay, okay,” he laughs along with her. “You got my nose, you win.”
As if she were waiting for him to admit defeat, she lets go, clapping her pudgy toddler hands together. 
“That’s right,” he picks her up, raising her above his head. “Barely sixteen months old and you already know how to take me down, don’t you? Just like your mommy.”
She smiles, waving her little fists.
Gods he loves this little monster.
Junie really is the best parts of both of them. She’s got her daddy’s hair but her mommy’s brain, quick and sharp and painfully adorable. She’s already learning to read Greek, Annabeth sitting her in her lap and sounding out vowels together, Annabeth taking her finger and tracing it over the letter shapes. This kid absorbs information like a sponge, which Percy can only assume is the natural conclusion of taking a son of Poseidon and a daughter of Athena and mixing their DNA together. 
Thinking about his dream, he frowns. “What do you think, Junie,” he asks his toddler. “Should I take her up on her offer?”
The baby says nothing.
“I mean,” he tilts his head, “Greece has been trying to get the marbles back for two hundred years. UNESCO has top lawyers on this. What does Athena think I can do?”
Junie blinks at him.
“On the other hand, I do really love your mom,” he admits, “and I really want to marry her. You’d like that, right? To have your parents be married?”
There’s no way she can understand what he’s saying, but she moves her head like she’s nodding. Or maybe she does understand. She is Annabeth’s daughter after all. 
Percy sighs. Dammit.
Time for a new project, he guesses.
***
Several months, a college graduation, and one relocation to Boston later, Percy growls, hurling his pencil at the wall. Mother fucker. Fuck the British Museum, fuck his tiny laptop screen, and fuck the Italian prick who decided to have the least ADHD-friendly handwriting of all time. 
Why the hell is he doing this again? Like, seriously. Why in all of Hades is he, an inexperienced, snot-nosed, first year master’s student deciding to tackle the return of the fucking Parthenon marbles of all things. Like, what is wrong with him? 
Roughly scrubbing his fingers through his hair, Percy stands up. He has to go for a walk, clear his head, or he might actually explode. 
Then he catches a glimpse of the photo pinned to the fridge.
Percy’s mom had taken it, a candid of Percy and Annabeth and Junie on a sunny day in Central Park. There, in perfect 1080p, Junie is laughing, at what he can’t even remember, her pudgy fists yanking on Percy’s hair, while her mother and the love of his life does nothing to extricate Percy from her grip, her face screwed up so hard she had tears in her eyes. 
Percy had talked a lot of shit to the goddess of war’s face, but truth be told… Hera still terrifies him a little. Which, he assumes, was her goal all along, but it would be nice to marry Annabeth without fear of something going terribly wrong--or, gods forbid, something happening to Junie. That simply was not a risk he was willing to take. Percy is content to spend the rest of his days as Annabeth’s life-partner and roommate, if it means that the queen of the heavens won’t have a reason to take out her issues on his children.
Even if the engagement ring in the back of the pantry is gathering dust. 
Sunlight, wan but warm, falls in from the window, landing perfectly on his pile of open books. “I know, I know,” he growls, speaking to the air, rubbing his face so it doesn’t get stuck in a permanent glare. “I just--I just need a few minutes, okay? Let me go down the block and get a coffee or something. Two minutes, Lady Athena.”
The light fades. Percy takes that as an acquiescence, angrily scribbling a note. He’s not sure when Annabeth and Junie will be back, but even angry as he is, he doesn’t want to worry them.
Snatching up his jacket, he slams the door shut, stomping out of his apartment building and down the streets of Boston. He must be accidentally doing his wolf stare, because people are practically flinging themselves out of his path as he hurtles down the sidewalk. Literally--some girl is walking her husky, and the poor dog actually whimpers, cowering as Percy rounds the corner. 
Coming to a stop, Percy slaps his hands over his face, drawing in a deep, shuddering breath. 
He might be in over his head a little.
Sighing, he looks to his right. He’s standing outside of a Starbucks. 
Percy doesn’t drink coffee, Annabeth does. And he knows exactly how much of a coffee snob his girlfriend is. Starbucks? Overpriced, overrated, over-sweetened garbage.
He pushes the door open, sliding up to the counter. “I’ll take a… iced mocha, I guess,” he says. “Large.”
“No problem,” chirps the barista. “I’ll have that out for you in a minute.”
“Thanks,” he mumbles.
One thing Starbucks does have going for it, though, are really good napkins for doodling.
Slumping down in his uncomfortable metal chair, elbows resting on the hard, faux-wood table, Percy takes out his pen, and doodles aimlessly on the brown napkins. No, not that pen. Just because it can write doesn’t mean that Percy wants to risk slicing his face open every time he has a stray idea. Completely out of the blue, Annabeth had gotten him a nice set of pens, and ever since then, Percy always keeps one on him. Now, if he could just remember to use the little notebook she had gotten him, too.
Percy is not an artist by any stretch of the imagination. He doesn’t have an image in mind, just lets his pen move, drawing endless chains of triangles and stars, nebulous shapes which form themselves into Greek letters. After he catches himself writing γλαυκῶπις for the eighth time in a row, he sighs, dropping his pen, and picks up the cup, taking a sip.
Yuck. At least the chocolate outweighs the coffee taste a little.
Gods, and their cups are always, like, drenched from condensation--not that Percy can feel it, but there’s practically a whole other drink on the outside of the plastic, dripping all over Percy’s pile of doodle napkins. That must be why they give out so many.
Grumbling, he mops up the mess, ink smudged into a blue-brown slurry.
He stops. 
He squints at one of his doodles. 
Not that anyone else could tell, but Percy had apparently been trying to recreate the signature of Ottoman sultan Selim III, the guy who had supposedly authorized the Earl of Elgin to take the Parthenon Marbles. Percy had been staring at copies of his signature all damn day, trying to tell if it had been forged or copied, but classical Arabic was just so far beyond anything he could even begin to wrap his head around. It was gorgeous work, but even looking at it made Percy’s eyes swim.
This particular doodle is not his best attempt. It looks nothing like the signature. It’s smudged, blotchy, but in a way that’s… weirdly familiar. 
Snatching the napkin up, Percy bolts from the Starbucks, leaving his mocha behind.
Taking the steps of his apartment building two at a time, he bursts into his kitchen. His set up is exactly how he left it, books spread out all over the table, laptop shut and laid askew, the dry, half-eaten remains of his morning muffin on a plate on top of his encyclopedia of illuminated manuscripts--except for one book, the one on Ottoman history of the nineteenth century. It’s been opened, its pages facing the door, in the exact opposite direction of all the other books. 
“Hello?” he calls into the apartment. “Anyone home?”
No response. 
Percy approaches the table. 
From the pages, Selim III stares at him, his portrait rendered in black and white, sitting just above a figure of his signature, his tughra. 
Percy picks up the book, squinting. 
The signature is crisp, clean, a work of art all by itself. 
He looks at his napkin drawing. Blurry and smudged.
Opening his laptop, he pulls up the scans of the documents in the British museum, zooms in on the letter’s seal.
Blurry and smudged.
Percy stares. 
It… can’t be that simple, can it?
In a daze, he fires an email off to his new grad advisor. Hopefully he won’t mind Percy sticking his nose in where he doesn’t belong. Hey Dr. T--was looking at the Parthenon marbles docs in the BM (don’t ask) and I noticed this weird smudge on the tughra. Lazy scribe, maybe?
And he closes his computer.
Later that night, while he puts Junie to bed, he gets a response. not sure. sent it to a colleague for a closer look. 
He can’t even be bothered to really think about it though, not with Junie looking up at him with Annabeth’s eyes, and asking for another book. “Alright, kiddo,” he acquiesces, settling in beside her. All her story books are in ancient Greek, and at age two, she’s starting to recognize the letters. “Which one are you thinking?” 
“Daw-fins, daddy,” she says, smiling.
“Dolphins, eh? Getting Mr. D on your side early, I see. As smart as mommy.” He leans down and kisses her forehead before he starts to read her the story of the sailors and their sudden dolphin madness. 
***
“Huh,” Percy says to himself a few weeks later, as he and Annabeth are chilling on the couch, watching some Netflix.
His advisor has forwarded him an article from the BBC (New evidence suggests Elgin documents to be forgeries) with an accompanying note: Amazing catch! 
“What is it?” Annabeth asks, nudging him with her elbow--a feat, since she also has an armful of a squirmy Junie to deal with.
“Update in the Parthenon marbles thing.”
That gets her attention. Anything Parthenon-related does. “Really?”
He shows her his phone.
Her eyes go wide as saucers. “Damn.”
“Yep.” He doesn’t realize he’s smiling until he feels his lips pulling at the sides of his mouth. 
“My mom is probably your biggest fan right now.”
He starts. “What did you say?”
Turning back to the TV, she still manages to cast him a weird look. “I said, my mom will probably love you for this.”
A beat, then Percy practically somersaults over the couch, darting into the kitchen. Wrenching open the pantry door, he shoves his hand behind their collection of flours, fingers grasping for--
“If you’re looking for any more sacrificial cookies,” Annabeth calls after him, “we burned them all when Junie got a cold.”
“Remind me to make some more,” says Percy, pulling out his prize. It’s a little dusty, streaks of flour clinging to the blue velvet. “I have a feeling we’ll need them.”
“Oh yeah?” She chuckles. “What, did Olympus put in a special order?” 
Percy slides back down next to her, ring hidden in his closed fist. “Can I have the baby for a sec?”
Eyes fixed to the screen, Annabeth passes her over. Junie’s hands automatically reach for his nose, ready to grab, but Percy places the ring in her grasp instead, kissing her forehead. “Hey, babe?” he asks Annabeth, handing her back. “I think our daughter has something for you.”
Annabeth takes her without a second glance. 
Then she does take a second glance.
Ring closed in her pudgy toddler fist, Junie holds it out to her.
Annabeth gapes. 
“So,” Percy says, wrapping an arm around her shoulder, “quick confession: I wasn’t just working on the marbles for fun.”
Annabeth just stares. Junie babbles.
“Your mom told me that if I helped get the marbles back, she’d back us against Hera if we ever got married. So…” He trails off, waiting for her response. As close as he is, he can see the tears start to well up in her eyes--a good sign. “Shall we?” he prompts.
“Oh thank all the gods.” Annabeth is crying, because she's Annabeth. And because she's Annabeth, she also wastes no time in transferring Junie to her other side, and holding out her hand so Percy can slide the ring on her finger. “I was so worried I'd have to have Chase on my Masters’ diploma, too.”
5)
Percy is making sauce when his phone lights up. He hits speaker. “Hey.”
“Hey man,” comes the tinny voice of Magnus. “Sorry I missed your call earlier.”
“Don’t worry about it,” Percy says, “I figured you were dying or something.”
Magnus’ eye roll is almost palpable. “Very funny. What’s up?”
Bringing the spoon to his lips, he blows on it, taking a taste, before reaching for the salt. Needs way more. “Do you happen to have any Varangian guards in Hotel Valhalla?”
“Varangian guards? Uh, maybe. Probably. Why?”
“I’m doing a thing on the attempted reconquest of Sicily,” he says, lowering the heat a little to a simmer, “and I’m having some trouble piecing together the Battle of Montemaggiore. Know anyone who was in it?” 
Magnus hums. “I’ll ask around. Anyone in particular you’re looking for?”
Rifling through their little spice cabinet, he makes a mental note to get a new thing of hot sauce, tipping the rest of it into the pot. “If you have anyone who fought under Harald Hardrada, that would be great.”
“Hardrada? I’m pretty sure he lives on the fifth floor.”
Percy nearly drops the bottle. “No shit?”
“Big dude, long mustache, writes poetry?”
“Yes!” He picks up the phone, grinning from ear to ear. “Do you think I could come up and talk to him sometime?”
“Sure, but I thought you were doing something on Homer’s identity?”
He groans. “Backburnered for now until she stops driving me crazy.” No matter how many times Percy tells her, he can’t just drop the “Homer was actually an Egyptian woman” bomb without some serious evidence backing that up. And forgery is not one of his strong suits. Hence the need for a different topic for the time being.
“Has everyone ever told you your life is weird?”
“No, why do you ask?”
His phone suddenly vibrates, shocking him so badly he nearly drops it into the saucepan. Almost home, texts the love of his life, a shot of serotonin directly into his bloodstream. V hungry
“Sorry, Magnus, but I gotta run. Thanks for your help.”
“No problem. Say hi to my cousin for me.”
“Can do.”
“And make sure you pick a date soon! Sam needs to know so she can schedule her flight home.”
“Soon as I can.” You know, when his brain isn’t melting from grading undergrad papers. And making sure Annabeth and Junie are fed. And that Annabeth doesn’t lose herself in graduate school. And finding Junie a new preschool after she destroyed a classroom last month because of a monster. His toddler is a badass. But he’s a little worried she’s gonna follow Mommy and Daddy’s example as far as school goes. 
Sometimes, he thinks that their wedding just won’t ever happen. With Athena on board, he figured it would happen sooner or later, but time just… keeps getting away from them. Which isn’t the end of the world. A lifetime at Annabeth’s side is all he really needs, Mrs. Jackson or no. But he’s seen the silver fabric she weaved for her wedding dress. It would be a shame for all that hard work to go to waste.
And, yeah, he wants to see his little Junie dancing down the aisle flinging seaweed before her mother. He wants his mom to cry a little and he wants all his friends to be there to celebrate with them. Is that so much to ask? 
Speaking of his two favorite girls--”We’re home!” Annabeth calls from the hallway. “Junie, go say hi to daddy!”
Her bare feet slapping against the floor, his daughter comes toddling in, making a beeline for him. “Hey, kiddo,” Percy says, scooping her up. “How’s my best girl?”
“She’s just fine, thanks,” Annabeth says, setting her work bag down on the table. “Tell me I don’t have to wait for dinner--Margie kept me for the entirety of my lunch break, and I am starving.” 
“Just gotta make a salad and we should be good to go.” But he makes no move to finish chopping vegetables, entirely too enraptured with the way Junie smiles when Percy sticks his tongue out at her. “Let me guess,” he says. “Does my best girl want some olives?”
“Peas,” Junie says. 
“Oh, you want peas instead?”
She giggles, waving her arms. “Elaia, daddy!”
“Fine,” and he kisses her nose. “Extra olives for you.”
“Chip off the old block,” Annabeth says.
Handing her back to her mother, Percy sighs. “When am I going to get a kid who likes anchovies?”
“I’m doing my best here, okay?”
***
Hardrada is… not what he expected.
“Reputation isn’t that bad.” Hardrada is saying. “The production isn’t what it should be, but lots of her lyrics are still on point.” 
“The production ruins it,” Percy insists. “And as a follow up to 1989? It's just bad.” 
“And what about Lover?”
“What about Lover?”
“You can’t argue with the genius of that one.”
“It is terribly inconsistent,” Percy shoots back. “Yeah, ‘The Archer’ and ‘Daylight’ and ‘Miss Americana’ are sublime, but ‘ME!’? Come on!”
“Are you one of those people who thinks she peaked at Red?”
“Red is a bop from start to finish,” Percy fires back. “But she definitely peaked at folklore.”
“Thinking she peaked at folklore is just pedestrian when ‘tis the damn season’ exists!” Hardrada yells, drawing his axe, which is then promptly flung over Percy’s head. 
As the only mortal in a room full of armed, excitable, undead Taylor Swift stans, Percy beats a hasty exit, Magnus and Jason covering him as he flees, because they’re just so thoughtful like that. Percy’s pretty sure he saw Magnus take an arrow to the knee, going down in a heap, before he shuts the door to the hotel, finding himself in a Forever 21. 
Looking over his notes later as he gets back to his apartment in the North End, he frowns. They had spent… approximately twenty minutes talking about Sicily before getting solidly off track. Who knew an eleventh century viking would have such intense feelings about pop music? 
And now he’s singing “seven” to himself as he unlocks the apartment door, because it's a good song, and because it made him think of Annabeth. And he always wants to think of Annabeth. 
“Hey, babe,” he calls into the apartment, toeing off his shoes. “I’m back!”
He gets no response.
Percy looks up, confused. “Annabeth?”
“In the bathroom,” he hears, faintly. 
“Everything okay?”
“Yep! Totally fine!” she says, unconvincingly. 
“Alright,” he calls back. “Let me know if you need something.”
Moving Junie’s toys out of the way, he drops down onto the couch, grabbing his laptop. Hopefully he can make some sort of sense of the… notes… that he got from Hardrada. Though he’s probably going to have to trek out to Beacon Hill again, which, while not really out of his way, does mean he has to hike a bit from the Park Street station through the Commons, which makes him super sweaty and out of breath. It’s just embarrassing, walking into a hotel full of the greatest warriors of Valhalla, and Percy can barely handle a hill. 
However, he’s not so out of practice that he can’t sense Annabeth coming up behind him. “You good?”
“What do you think about getting married by the end of the month?”
“Sure,” he says, pecking at his computer. Damn autocorrect ruining all the Norse names. He keeps forgetting to download the right language package he needs. “But I thought you wanted to wait until after you turned in your portfolio?”
“Well… I might not be able to fit in my dress if we wait much longer.”
That gets his attention.
Percy turns around, slowly. Annabeth is grinning, holding a thin little piece of plastic with a circle on the end. She wiggles it. 
“Is that…?”
“Yep.”
“Oh.”
Her smile falls. “Are you mad?”
“What? No!” Percy slides his computer off his lap, twisting around to face her, up on his knees. “No, no, not at all. I’m not mad.” She slings her arms around his neck, pregnancy test warm against his skin. “I just…” 
Eyes warm, she looks into his, unafraid. “What is it?”
“It’s…” It’s silly, is what it is. But this is Annabeth. If he can’t tell her, who can he tell? “I just feel bad that I’ve gotten you pregnant twice before getting married.”
“Well, at least I’m not nineteen this time,” she says, raising an eyebrow. “But maybe we wouldn’t have this problem if you weren’t such a horndog.”
Percy snorts. “Me? What about you, Annabeth ‘3 AM anal before my first lecture’ Chase.”
“Jackson,” she corrects.
“Huh?”
“It’s Annabeth ‘3 AM anal before your first lecture’ Jackson.”
Grinning, he presses his mouth to hers. After all this time, she still smells like lemons, her lips soft and warm. “Not yet it’s not.”
“Then let’s make it happen.”
And, well, Percy can’t think of a better plan.
+1
Jamie hisses. “Fuuuuuck,” she whispers, the sound dropping like a stone in the dead lecture hall. “Goddamn shit fuck ass.”
And the worst part is, she’d actually spent a lot of time preparing for her Latin midterm. She’d made flashcards, she’d drilled noun endings, she’d even slept with the textbook under her pillow for fuck’s sake. 
Typical--the moment she sits down to take the test, it all goes out the window. 
“Legistne carmen longum de Troiano,” she reads under her breath, as though saying it out loud will unlock some hidden secrets of the cosmos. 
Nope. Nothing. The multiple choices remain as inscrutable as ever.
“Psst.” 
Jamie looks up. 
There’s a four year old staring at her. 
“Hi,” Jamie says. 
“Hi,” says the four year old. Junie, her name is, she thinks. 
Mr. Jackson, Jamie’s Latin TA, will bring his kids to class with him sometimes--his wife works full time, and Jamie guesses that they can’t afford a babysitter. She’s a cute kid, quiet, usually sitting in the corner of the lecture hall, drawing or even knitting, sometimes with her little sister playing with toy ships next to her. 
Now, she’s still staring at her. “What’s up?” Jamie asks.
“Bello,” says Junie.
Jamie blinks. “Sorry?”
“Legistne carmen longum de bello Troiano.” 
She squints down at her test sheet, attempting to visualize her flash cards. That’s… “Bello” is the right answer.
The fuck? The fucking four year old can speak Latin? “Thanks,” she whispers. 
Junie beams at her.
Darting her eyes to the front of the lecture hall, Jamie spies her professor, Buck, completely conked out at his desk, his chest rising and falling with his snores. Percy is nowhere to be seen, his laptop open at his chair. “What’s the next one?” Jamie turns her paper so that Junie can see better.
“Pluto Proserpinam infelicem cepit,” she announces, perfectly accented.
Jamie points to the one after that.
“Rex qui pontem fecit erat Ancus Martius.”
“Awesome.” 
The door to the lecture hall opens. Jamie whips around in her seat, startled, and sees her TA, walking down the steps. From the corner of her eye, Junie disappears, booking it to her dad, who scoops her up without missing a beat. “Hey kiddo,” he murmurs, smiling crookedly. “Were you bothering my students?” Then he glances at Jamie. “Sorry about that--hope she wasn’t too annoying.”
But Jamie shakes her head. “It’s fine.” Dammit. 
Still smiling, Percy makes his way back down to his seat. Junie grins at her over his shoulder, her arms wrapped tightly around her dad’s neck.
At the beginning of the semester, Professor Buck had droned on and on about Mr. Jackson, about how he was one of the best up-and-coming classics scholars in the world, how he could have had his pick of PhD programs, and how NYU was lucky to have him. He got first pick of assistantships this semester, apparently, but had volunteered to teach Latin 1001, and they should all be grateful, because he had done some beautiful new translation of Virgil for his Master’s thesis, and they were all going to learn a lot from him. 
Turning back to her exam, Jamie snorts. Of course a guy like that would have a kid who could speak perfect Latin. 
She really should have just stuck with German instead. 
731 notes · View notes
mxamalgam · 6 months ago
Text
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain
Table of Contents
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer.............................................................................................................................1
Mark Twain....................................................................................................................................................2
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
i
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer 1
Mark Twain
P R E F A C E
MOST of the adventures recorded in this book really occurred; one or two were experiences of my own, the
rest those of boys who were schoolmates of mine. Huck Finn is drawn from life; Tom Sawyer also, but not from
an individual −− he is a combination of the characteristics of three boys whom I knew, and therefore belongs to
the composite order of architecture.
The odd superstitions touched upon were all prevalent among children and slaves in the West at the period of
this story −− that is to say, thirty or forty years ago.
Although my book is intended mainly for the entertainment of boys and girls, I hope it will not be shunned by
men and women on that account, for part of my plan has been to try to pleasantly remind adults of what they once
were themselves, and of how they felt and thought and talked, and what queer enterprises they sometimes
engaged in.
THE AUTHOR.
HARTFORD, 1876.
T O M S A W Y E R
CHAPTER I
"TOM!"
No answer.
"TOM!"
No answer.
"What's gone with that boy, I wonder? You TOM!"
No answer.
The old lady pulled her spectacles down and looked over them about the room; then she put them up and
looked out under them. She seldom or never looked THROUGH them for so small a thing as a boy; they were her
state pair, the pride of her heart, and were built for "style," not service −− she could have seen through a pair of
stove−lids just as well. She looked perplexed for a moment, and then said, not fiercely, but still loud enough for
the furniture to hear:
"Well, I lay if I get hold of you I'll −−"
She did not finish, for by this time she was bending down and punching under the bed with the broom, and so
she needed breath to punctuate the punches with. She resurrected nothing but the cat.
"I never did see the beat of that boy!"
She went to the open door and stood in it and looked out among the tomato vines and "jimpson" weeds that
constituted the garden. No Tom. So she lifted up her voice at an angle calculated for distance and shouted:
"Y−o−u−u TOM!"
There was a slight noise behind her and she turned just in time to seize a small boy by the slack of his
roundabout and arrest his flight.
"There! I might 'a' thought of that closet. What you been doing in there?"
"Nothing."
"Nothing! Look at your hands. And look at your mouth. What IS that truck?"
"I don't know, aunt."
"Well, I know. It's jam −− that's what it is. Forty times I've said if you didn't let that jam alone I'd skin you.
Hand me that switch."
The switch hovered in the air −− the peril was desperate −−
"My! Look behind you, aunt!"
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 2
The old lady whirled round, and snatched her skirts out of danger. The lad fled on the instant, scrambled up the
high board−fence, and disappeared over it.
His aunt Polly stood surprised a moment, and then broke into a gentle laugh.
"Hang the boy, can't I never learn anything? Ain't he played me tricks enough like that for me to be looking out
for him by this time? But old fools is the biggest fools there is. Can't learn an old dog new tricks, as the saying is.
But my goodness, he never plays them alike, two days, and how is a body to know what's coming? He 'pears to
know just how long he can torment me before I get my dander up, and he knows if he can make out to put me off
for a minute or make me laugh, it's all down again and I can't hit him a lick. I ain't doing my duty by that boy, and
that's the Lord's truth, goodness knows. Spare the rod and spile the child, as the Good Book says. I'm a laying up
sin and suffering for us both, I know. He's full of the Old Scratch, but laws−a−me! he's my own dead sister's boy,
poor thing, and I ain't got the heart to lash him, somehow. Every time I let him off, my conscience does hurt me
so, and every time I hit him my old heart most breaks. Well−a−well, man that is born of woman is of few days
and full of trouble, as the Scripture says, and I reckon it's so. He'll play hookey this evening, * and [*
Southwestern for "afternoon"] I'll just be obleeged to make him work, to−morrow, to punish him. It's mighty hard
to make him work Saturdays, when all the boys is having holiday, but he hates work more than he hates anything
else, and I've GOT to do some of my duty by him, or I'll be the ruination of the child."
Tom did play hookey, and he had a very good time. He got back home barely in season to help Jim, the small
colored boy, saw next−day's wood and split the kindlings before supper −− at least he was there in time to tell his
adventures to Jim while Jim did three−fourths of the work. Tom's younger brother (or rather half−brother) Sid
was already through with his part of the work (picking up chips), for he was a quiet boy, and had no adventurous,
troublesome ways.
While Tom was eating his supper, and stealing sugar as opportunity offered, Aunt Polly asked him questions
that were full of guile, and very deep −− for she wanted to trap him into damaging revealments. Like many other
simple−hearted souls, it was her pet vanity to believe she was endowed with a talent for dark and mysterious
diplomacy, and she loved to contemplate her most transparent devices as marvels of low cunning. Said she:
"Tom, it was middling warm in school, warn't it?"
"Yes'm."
"Powerful warm, warn't it?"
"Yes'm."
"Didn't you want to go in a−swimming, Tom?"
A bit of a scare shot through Tom −− a touch of uncomfortable suspicion. He searched Aunt Polly's face, but it
told him nothing. So he said:
"No'm −− well, not very much."
The old lady reached out her hand and felt Tom's shirt, and said:
"But you ain't too warm now, though." And it flattered her to reflect that she had discovered that the shirt was
dry without anybody knowing that that was what she had in her mind. But in spite of her, Tom knew where the
wind lay, now. So he forestalled what might be the next move:
"Some of us pumped on our heads −− mine's damp yet. See?"
Aunt Polly was vexed to think she had overlooked that bit of circumstantial evidence, and missed a trick. Then
she had a new inspiration:
"Tom, you didn't have to undo your shirt collar where I sewed it, to pump on your head, did you? Unbutton
your jacket!"
The trouble vanished out of Tom's face. He opened his jacket. His shirt collar was securely sewed.
"Bother! Well, go 'long with you. I'd made sure you'd played hookey and been a−swimming. But I forgive ye,
Tom. I reckon you're a kind of a singed cat, as the saying is −− better'n you look. THIS time."
She was half sorry her sagacity had miscarried, and half glad that Tom had stumbled into obedient conduct for
once.
But Sidney said:
"Well, now, if I didn't think you sewed his collar with white thread, but it's black."
"Why, I did sew it with white! Tom!"
But Tom did not wait for the rest. As he went out at the door he said:
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 3
"Siddy, I'll lick you for that."
In a safe place Tom examined two large needles which were thrust into the lapels of his jacket, and had thread
bound about them −− one needle carried white thread and the other black. He said:
"She'd never noticed if it hadn't been for Sid. Confound it! sometimes she sews it with white, and sometimes
she sews it with black. I wish to geeminy she'd stick to one or t'other −− I can't keep the run of 'em. But I bet you
I'll lam Sid for that. I'll learn him!"
He was not the Model Boy of the village. He knew the model boy very well though −− and loathed him.
Within two minutes, or even less, he had forgotten all his troubles. Not because his troubles were one whit less
heavy and bitter to him than a man's are to a man, but because a new and powerful interest bore them down and
drove them out of his mind for the time −− just as men's misfortunes are forgotten in the excitement of new
enterprises. This new interest was a valued novelty in whistling, which he had just acquired from a negro, and he
was suffering to practise it undisturbed. It consisted in a peculiar bird−like turn, a sort of liquid warble, produced
by touching the tongue to the roof of the mouth at short intervals in the midst of the music −− the reader probably
remembers how to do it, if he has ever been a boy. Diligence and attention soon gave him the knack of it, and he
strode down the street with his mouth full of harmony and his soul full of gratitude. He felt much as an
astronomer feels who has discovered a new planet −− no doubt, as far as strong, deep, unalloyed pleasure is
concerned, the advantage was with the boy, not the astronomer.
The summer evenings were long. It was not dark, yet. Presently Tom checked his whistle. A stranger was
before him −− a boy a shade larger than himself. A new−comer of any age or either sex was an impressive
curiosity in the poor little shabby village of St. Petersburg. This boy was well dressed, too −− well dressed on a
week−day. This was simply astounding. His cap was a dainty thing, his closebuttoned blue cloth roundabout was
new and natty, and so were his pantaloons. He had shoes on −− and it was only Friday. He even wore a necktie, a
bright bit of ribbon. He had a citified air about him that ate into Tom's vitals. The more Tom stared at the splendid
marvel, the higher he turned up his nose at his finery and the shabbier and shabbier his own outfit seemed to him
to grow. Neither boy spoke. If one moved, the other moved −− but only sidewise, in a circle; they kept face to
face and eye to eye all the time. Finally Tom said:
"I can lick you!"
"I'd like to see you try it."
"Well, I can do it."
"No you can't, either."
"Yes I can."
"No you can't."
"I can."
"You can't."
"Can!"
"Can't!"
An uncomfortable pause. Then Tom said:
"What's your name?"
"'Tisn't any of your business, maybe."
"Well I 'low I'll MAKE it my business."
"Well why don't you?"
"If you say much, I will."
"Much −− much −− MUCH. There now."
"Oh, you think you're mighty smart, DON'T you? I could lick you with one hand tied behind me, if I wanted
to."
"Well why don't you DO it? You SAY you can do it."
"Well I WILL, if you fool with me."
"Oh yes −− I've seen whole families in the same fix."
"Smarty! You think you're SOME, now, DON'T you? Oh, what a hat!"
"You can lump that hat if you don't like it. I dare you to knock it off −− and anybody that'll take a dare will
suck eggs."
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 4
"You're a liar!"
"You're another."
"You're a fighting liar and dasn't take it up."
"Aw −− take a walk!"
"Say −− if you give me much more of your sass I'll take and bounce a rock off'n your head."
"Oh, of COURSE you will."
"Well I WILL."
"Well why don't you DO it then? What do you keep SAYING you will for? Why don't you DO it? It's because
you're afraid."
"I AIN'T afraid."
"You are."
"I ain't."
"You are."
Another pause, and more eying and sidling around each other. Presently they were shoulder to shoulder. Tom
said:
"Get away from here!"
"Go away yourself!"
"I won't."
"I won't either."
So they stood, each with a foot placed at an angle as a brace, and both shoving with might and main, and
glowering at each other with hate. But neither could get an advantage. After struggling till both were hot and
flushed, each relaxed his strain with watchful caution, and Tom said:
"You're a coward and a pup. I'll tell my big brother on you, and he can thrash you with his little finger, and I'll
make him do it, too."
"What do I care for your big brother? I've got a brother that's bigger than he is −− and what's more, he can
throw him over that fence, too." [Both brothers were imaginary.]
"That's a lie."
"YOUR saying so don't make it so."
Tom drew a line in the dust with his big toe, and said:
"I dare you to step over that, and I'll lick you till you can't stand up. Anybody that'll take a dare will steal
sheep."
The new boy stepped over promptly, and said:
"Now you said you'd do it, now let's see you do it."
"Don't you crowd me now; you better look out."
"Well, you SAID you'd do it −− why don't you do it?"
"By jingo! for two cents I WILL do it."
The new boy took two broad coppers out of his pocket and held them out with derision. Tom struck them to
the ground. In an instant both boys were rolling and tumbling in the dirt, gripped together like cats; and for the
space of a minute they tugged and tore at each other's hair and clothes, punched and scratched each other's nose,
and covered themselves with dust and glory. Presently the confusion took form, and through the fog of battle Tom
appeared, seated astride the new boy, and pounding him with his fists. "Holler 'nuff!" said he.
The boy only struggled to free himself. He was crying −− mainly from rage.
"Holler 'nuff!" −− and the pounding went on.
At last the stranger got out a smothered "'Nuff!" and Tom let him up and said:
"Now that'll learn you. Better look out who you're fooling with next time."
The new boy went off brushing the dust from his clothes, sobbing, snuffling, and occasionally looking back
and shaking his head and threatening what he would do to Tom the "next time he caught him out." To which Tom
responded with jeers, and started off in high feather, and as soon as his back was turned the new boy snatched up
a stone, threw it and hit him between the shoulders and then turned tail and ran like an antelope. Tom chased the
traitor home, and thus found out where he lived. He then held a position at the gate for some time, daring the
enemy to come outside, but the enemy only made faces at him through the window and declined. At last the
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 5
enemy's mother appeared, and called Tom a bad, vicious, vulgar child, and ordered him away. So he went away;
but he said he "'lowed" to "lay" for that boy.
He got home pretty late that night, and when he climbed cautiously in at the window, he uncovered an
ambuscade, in the person of his aunt; and when she saw the state his clothes were in her resolution to turn his
Saturday holiday into captivity at hard labor became adamantine in its firmness.
CHAPTER II
SATURDAY morning was come, and all the summer world was bright and fresh, and brimming with life.
There was a song in every heart; and if the heart was young the music issued at the lips. There was cheer in every
face and a spring in every step. The locust−trees were in bloom and the fragrance of the blossoms filled the air.
Cardiff Hill, beyond the village and above it, was green with vegetation and it lay just far enough away to seem a
Delectable Land, dreamy, reposeful, and inviting.
Tom appeared on the sidewalk with a bucket of whitewash and a long−handled brush. He surveyed the fence,
and all gladness left him and a deep melancholy settled down upon his spirit. Thirty yards of board fence nine feet
high. Life to him seemed hollow, and existence but a burden. Sighing, he dipped his brush and passed it along the
topmost plank; repeated the operation; did it again; compared the insignificant whitewashed streak with the
far−reaching continent of unwhitewashed fence, and sat down on a tree−box discouraged. Jim came skipping out
at the gate with a tin pail, and singing Buffalo Gals. Bringing water from the town pump had always been hateful
work in Tom's eyes, before, but now it did not strike him so. He remembered that there was company at the pump.
White, mulatto, and negro boys and girls were always there waiting their turns, resting, trading playthings,
quarrelling, fighting, skylarking. And he remembered that although the pump was only a hundred and fifty yards
off, Jim never got back with a bucket of water under an hour −− and even then somebody generally had to go after
him. Tom said:
"Say, Jim, I'll fetch the water if you'll whitewash some."
Jim shook his head and said:
"Can't, Mars Tom. Ole missis, she tole me I got to go an' git dis water an' not stop foolin' roun' wid anybody.
She say she spec' Mars Tom gwine to ax me to whitewash, an' so she tole me go 'long an' 'tend to my own
business −− she 'lowed SHE'D 'tend to de whitewashin'."
"Oh, never you mind what she said, Jim. That's the way she always talks. Gimme the bucket −− I won't be
gone only a a minute. SHE won't ever know."
"Oh, I dasn't, Mars Tom. Ole missis she'd take an' tar de head off'n me. 'Deed she would."
"SHE! She never licks anybody −− whacks 'em over the head with her thimble −− and who cares for that, I'd
like to know. She talks awful, but talk don't hurt −− anyways it don't if she don't cry. Jim, I'll give you a marvel.
I'll give you a white alley!"
Jim began to waver.
"White alley, Jim! And it's a bully taw."
"My! Dat's a mighty gay marvel, I tell you! But Mars Tom I's powerful 'fraid ole missis −−"
"And besides, if you will I'll show you my sore toe."
Jim was only human −− this attraction was too much for him. He put down his pail, took the white alley, and
bent over the toe with absorbing interest while the bandage was being unwound. In another moment he was flying
down the street with his pail and a tingling rear, Tom was whitewashing with vigor, and Aunt Polly was retiring
from the field with a slipper in her hand and triumph in her eye.
But Tom's energy did not last. He began to think of the fun he had planned for this day, and his sorrows
multiplied. Soon the free boys would come tripping along on all sorts of delicious expeditions, and they would
make a world of fun of him for having to work −− the very thought of it burnt him like fire. He got out his
worldly wealth and examined it −− bits of toys, marbles, and trash; enough to buy an exchange of WORK, maybe,
but not half enough to buy so much as half an hour of pure freedom. So he returned his straitened means to his
pocket, and gave up the idea of trying to buy the boys. At this dark and hopeless moment an inspiration burst
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 6
upon him! Nothing less than a great, magnificent inspiration.
He took up his brush and went tranquilly to work. Ben Rogers hove in sight presently −− the very boy, of all
boys, whose ridicule he had been dreading. Ben's gait was the hop−skip−and−jump −− proof enough that his heart
was light and his anticipations high. He was eating an apple, and giving a long, melodious whoop, at intervals,
followed by a deep−toned dingdong −dong, ding−dong−dong, for he was personating a steamboat. As he drew
near, he slackened speed, took the middle of the street, leaned far over to starboard and rounded to ponderously
and with laborious pomp and circumstance −− for he was personating the Big Missouri, and considered himself to
be drawing nine feet of water. He was boat and captain and engine−bells combined, so he had to imagine himself
standing on his own hurricane−deck giving the orders and executing them:
"Stop her, sir! Ting−a−ling−ling!" The headway ran almost out, and he drew up slowly toward the sidewalk.
"Ship up to back! Ting−a−ling−ling!" His arms straightened and stiffened down his sides.
"Set her back on the stabboard! Ting−a−ling−ling! Chow! ch−chow−wow! Chow!" His right hand, meantime,
describing stately circles −− for it was representing a forty−foot wheel.
"Let her go back on the labboard! Ting−a−lingling ! Chow−ch−chow−chow!" The left hand began to describe
circles.
"Stop the stabboard! Ting−a−ling−ling! Stop the labboard! Come ahead on the stabboard! Stop her! Let your
outside turn over slow! Ting−a−ling−ling! Chow−ow−ow! Get out that head−line! LIVELY now! Come −− out
with your spring−line −− what're you about there! Take a turn round that stump with the bight of it! Stand by that
stage, now −− let her go! Done with the engines, sir! Ting−a−ling−ling! SH'T! S'H'T! SH'T!" (trying the
gauge−cocks).
Tom went on whitewashing −− paid no attention to the steamboat. Ben stared a moment and then said:
"Hi−YI! YOU'RE up a stump, ain't you!"
No answer. Tom surveyed his last touch with the eye of an artist, then he gave his brush another gentle sweep
and surveyed the result, as before. Ben ranged up alongside of him. Tom's mouth watered for the apple, but he
stuck to his work. Ben said:
"Hello, old chap, you got to work, hey?"
Tom wheeled suddenly and said:
"Why, it's you, Ben! I warn't noticing."
"Say −− I'm going in a−swimming, I am. Don't you wish you could? But of course you'd druther WORK −−
wouldn't you? Course you would!"
Tom contemplated the boy a bit, and said:
"What do you call work?"
"Why, ain't THAT work?"
Tom resumed his whitewashing, and answered carelessly:
"Well, maybe it is, and maybe it ain't. All I know, is, it suits Tom Sawyer."
"Oh come, now, you don't mean to let on that you LIKE it?"
The brush continued to move.
"Like it? Well, I don't see why I oughtn't to like it. Does a boy get a chance to whitewash a fence every day?"
That put the thing in a new light. Ben stopped nibbling his apple. Tom swept his brush daintily back and forth
−− stepped back to note the effect −− added a touch here and there −− criticised the effect again −− Ben watching
every move and getting more and more interested, more and more absorbed. Presently he said:
"Say, Tom, let ME whitewash a little."
Tom considered, was about to consent; but he altered his mind:
"No −− no −− I reckon it wouldn't hardly do, Ben. You see, Aunt Polly's awful particular about this fence −−
right here on the street, you know −− but if it was the back fence I wouldn't mind and SHE wouldn't. Yes, she's
awful particular about this fence; it's got to be done very careful; I reckon there ain't one boy in a thousand, maybe
two thousand, that can do it the way it's got to be done."
"No −− is that so? Oh come, now −− lemme just try. Only just a little −− I'd let YOU, if you was me, Tom."
"Ben, I'd like to, honest injun; but Aunt Polly −− well, Jim wanted to do it, but she wouldn't let him; Sid
wanted to do it, and she wouldn't let Sid. Now don't you see how I'm fixed? If you was to tackle this fence and
anything was to happen to it −−"
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 7
"Oh, shucks, I'll be just as careful. Now lemme try. Say −− I'll give you the core of my apple."
"Well, here −− No, Ben, now don't. I'm afeard −−"
"I'll give you ALL of it!"
Tom gave up the brush with reluctance in his face, but alacrity in his heart. And while the late steamer Big
Missouri worked and sweated in the sun, the retired artist sat on a barrel in the shade close by, dangled his legs,
munched his apple, and planned the slaughter of more innocents. There was no lack of material; boys happened
along every little while; they came to jeer, but remained to whitewash. By the time Ben was fagged out, Tom had
traded the next chance to Billy Fisher for a kite, in good repair; and when he played out, Johnny Miller bought in
for a dead rat and a string to swing it with −− and so on, and so on, hour after hour. And when the middle of the
afternoon came, from being a poor poverty−stricken boy in the morning, Tom was literally rolling in wealth. He
had besides the things before mentioned, twelve marbles, part of a jews−harp, a piece of blue bottle−glass to look
through, a spool cannon, a key that wouldn't unlock anything, a fragment of chalk, a glass stopper of a decanter, a
tin soldier, a couple of tadpoles, six fire−crackers, a kitten with only one eye, a brass doorknob, a dog−collar −−
but no dog −− the handle of a knife, four pieces of orange−peel, and a dilapidated old window sash.
He had had a nice, good, idle time all the while −− plenty of company −− and the fence had three coats of
whitewash on it! If he hadn't run out of whitewash he would have bankrupted every boy in the village.
Tom said to himself that it was not such a hollow world, after all. He had discovered a great law of human
action, without knowing it −− namely, that in order to make a man or a boy covet a thing, it is only necessary to
make the thing difficult to attain. If he had been a great and wise philosopher, like the writer of this book, he
would now have comprehended that Work consists of whatever a body is OBLIGED to do, and that Play consists
of whatever a body is not obliged to do. And this would help him to understand why constructing artificial
flowers or performing on a tread−mill is work, while rolling ten−pins or climbing Mont Blanc is only amusement.
There are wealthy gentlemen in England who drive four−horse passengercoaches twenty or thirty miles on a daily
line, in the summer, because the privilege costs them considerable money; but if they were offered wages for the
service, that would turn it into work and then they would resign.
The boy mused awhile over the substantial change which had taken place in his worldly circumstances, and
then wended toward headquarters to report.
CHAPTER III
TOM presented himself before Aunt Polly, who was sitting by an open window in a pleasant rearward
apartment, which was bedroom, breakfast−room, dining−room, and library, combined. The balmy summer air, the
restful quiet, the odor of the flowers, and the drowsing murmur of the bees had had their effect, and she was
nodding over her knitting −− for she had no company but the cat, and it was asleep in her lap. Her spectacles were
propped up on her gray head for safety. She had thought that of course Tom had deserted long ago, and she
wondered at seeing him place himself in her power again in this intrepid way. He said: "Mayn't I go and play
now, aunt?"
"What, a'ready? How much have you done?"
"It's all done, aunt."
"Tom, don't lie to me −− I can't bear it."
"I ain't, aunt; it IS all done."
Aunt Polly placed small trust in such evidence. She went out to see for herself; and she would have been
content to find twenty per cent. of Tom's statement true. When she found the entire fence whitewashed, and not
only whitewashed but elaborately coated and recoated, and even a streak added to the ground, her astonishment
was almost unspeakable. She said:
"Well, I never! There's no getting round it, you can work when you're a mind to, Tom." And then she diluted
the compliment by adding, "But it's powerful seldom you're a mind to, I'm bound to say. Well, go 'long and play;
but mind you get back some time in a week, or I'll tan you."
She was so overcome by the splendor of his achievement that she took him into the closet and selected a
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 8
choice apple and delivered it to him, along with an improving lecture upon the added value and flavor a treat took
to itself when it came without sin through virtuous effort. And while she closed with a happy Scriptural flourish,
he "hooked" a doughnut.
Then he skipped out, and saw Sid just starting up the outside stairway that led to the back rooms on the second
floor. Clods were handy and the air was full of them in a twinkling. They raged around Sid like a hail−storm; and
before Aunt Polly could collect her surprised faculties and sally to the rescue, six or seven clods had taken
personal effect, and Tom was over the fence and gone. There was a gate, but as a general thing he was too
crowded for time to make use of it. His soul was at peace, now that he had settled with Sid for calling attention to
his black thread and getting him into trouble.
Tom skirted the block, and came round into a muddy alley that led by the back of his aunt's cowstable. He
presently got safely beyond the reach of capture and punishment, and hastened toward the public square of the
village, where two "military" companies of boys had met for conflict, according to previous appointment. Tom
was General of one of these armies, Joe Harper (a bosom friend) General of the other. These two great
commanders did not condescend to fight in person −− that being better suited to the still smaller fry −− but sat
together on an eminence and conducted the field operations by orders delivered through aides−de−camp. Tom's
army won a great victory, after a long and hard−fought battle. Then the dead were counted, prisoners exchanged,
the terms of the next disagreement agreed upon, and the day for the necessary battle appointed; after which the
armies fell into line and marched away, and Tom turned homeward alone.
As he was passing by the house where Jeff Thatcher lived, he saw a new girl in the garden −− a lovely little
blue−eyed creature with yellow hair plaited into two long−tails, white summer frock and embroidered pantalettes.
The fresh−crowned hero fell without firing a shot. A certain Amy Lawrence vanished out of his heart and left not
even a memory of herself behind. He had thought he loved her to distraction; he had regarded his passion as
adoration; and behold it was only a poor little evanescent partiality. He had been months winning her; she had
confessed hardly a week ago; he had been the happiest and the proudest boy in the world only seven short days,
and here in one instant of time she had gone out of his heart like a casual stranger whose visit is done.
He worshipped this new angel with furtive eye, till he saw that she had discovered him; then he pretended he
did not know she was present, and began to "show off" in all sorts of absurd boyish ways, in order to win her
admiration. He kept up this grotesque foolishness for some time; but by−and−by, while he was in the midst of
some dangerous gymnastic performances, he glanced aside and saw that the little girl was wending her way
toward the house. Tom came up to the fence and leaned on it, grieving, and hoping she would tarry yet awhile
longer. She halted a moment on the steps and then moved toward the door. Tom heaved a great sigh as she put her
foot on the threshold. But his face lit up, right away, for she tossed a pansy over the fence a moment before she
disappeared.
The boy ran around and stopped within a foot or two of the flower, and then shaded his eyes with his hand and
began to look down street as if he had discovered something of interest going on in that direction. Presently he
picked up a straw and began trying to balance it on his nose, with his head tilted far back; and as he moved from
side to side, in his efforts, he edged nearer and nearer toward the pansy; finally his bare foot rested upon it, his
pliant toes closed upon it, and he hopped away with the treasure and disappeared round the corner. But only for a
minute −− only while he could button the flower inside his jacket, next his heart −− or next his stomach, possibly,
for he was not much posted in anatomy, and not hypercritical, anyway.
He returned, now, and hung about the fence till nightfall, "showing off," as before; but the girl never exhibited
herself again, though Tom comforted himself a little with the hope that she had been near some window,
meantime, and been aware of his attentions. Finally he strode home reluctantly, with his poor head full of visions.
All through supper his spirits were so high that his aunt wondered "what had got into the child." He took a
good scolding about clodding Sid, and did not seem to mind it in the least. He tried to steal sugar under his aunt's
very nose, and got his knuckles rapped for it. He said:
"Aunt, you don't whack Sid when he takes it."
"Well, Sid don't torment a body the way you do. You'd be always into that sugar if I warn't watching you."
Presently she stepped into the kitchen, and Sid, happy in his immunity, reached for the sugar−bowl −− a sort of
glorying over Tom which was wellnigh unbearable. But Sid's fingers slipped and the bowl dropped and broke.
Tom was in ecstasies. In such ecstasies that he even controlled his tongue and was silent. He said to himself that
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 9
he would not speak a word, even when his aunt came in, but would sit perfectly still till she asked who did the
mischief; and then he would tell, and there would be nothing so good in the world as to see that pet model "catch
it." He was so brimful of exultation that he could hardly hold himself when the old lady came back and stood
above the wreck discharging lightnings of wrath from over her spectacles. He said to himself, "Now it's coming!"
And the next instant he was sprawling on the floor! The potent palm was uplifted to strike again when Tom cried
out:
"Hold on, now, what 'er you belting ME for? −− Sid broke it!"
Aunt Polly paused, perplexed, and Tom looked for healing pity. But when she got her tongue again, she only
said:
"Umf! Well, you didn't get a lick amiss, I reckon. You been into some other audacious mischief when I wasn't
around, like enough."
Then her conscience reproached her, and she yearned to say something kind and loving; but she judged that
this would be construed into a confession that she had been in the wrong, and discipline forbade that. So she kept
silence, and went about her affairs with a troubled heart. Tom sulked in a corner and exalted his woes. He knew
that in her heart his aunt was on her knees to him, and he was morosely gratified by the consciousness of it. He
would hang out no signals, he would take notice of none. He knew that a yearning glance fell upon him, now and
then, through a film of tears, but he refused recognition of it. He pictured himself lying sick unto death and his
aunt bending over him beseeching one little forgiving word, but he would turn his face to the wall, and die with
that word unsaid. Ah, how would she feel then? And he pictured himself brought home from the river, dead, with
his curls all wet, and his sore heart at rest. How she would throw herself upon him, and how her tears would fall
like rain, and her lips pray God to give her back her boy and she would never, never abuse him any more! But he
would lie there cold and white and make no sign −− a poor little sufferer, whose griefs were at an end. He so
worked upon his feelings with the pathos of these dreams, that he had to keep swallowing, he was so like to
choke; and his eyes swam in a blur of water, which overflowed when he winked, and ran down and trickled from
the end of his nose. And such a luxury to him was this petting of his sorrows, that he could not bear to have any
worldly cheeriness or any grating delight intrude upon it; it was too sacred for such contact; and so, presently,
when his cousin Mary danced in, all alive with the joy of seeing home again after an age−long visit of one week
to the country, he got up and moved in clouds and darkness out at one door as she brought song and sunshine in at
the other.
He wandered far from the accustomed haunts of boys, and sought desolate places that were in harmony with
his spirit. A log raft in the river invited him, and he seated himself on its outer edge and contemplated the dreary
vastness of the stream, wishing, the while, that he could only be drowned, all at once and unconsciously, without
undergoing the uncomfortable routine devised by nature. Then he thought of his flower. He got it out, rumpled
and wilted, and it mightily increased his dismal felicity. He wondered if she would pity him if she knew? Would
she cry, and wish that she had a right to put her arms around his neck and comfort him? Or would she turn coldly
away like all the hollow world? This picture brought such an agony of pleasurable suffering that he worked it over
and over again in his mind and set it up in new and varied lights, till he wore it threadbare. At last he rose up
sighing and departed in the darkness.
About half−past nine or ten o'clock he came along the deserted street to where the Adored Unknown lived; he
paused a moment; no sound fell upon his listening ear; a candle was casting a dull glow upon the curtain of a
second−story window. Was the sacred presence there? He climbed the fence, threaded his stealthy way through
the plants, till he stood under that window; he looked up at it long, and with emotion; then he laid him down on
the ground under it, disposing himself upon his back, with his hands clasped upon his breast and holding his poor
wilted flower. And thus he would die −− out in the cold world, with no shelter over his homeless head, no friendly
hand to wipe the death−damps from his brow, no loving face to bend pityingly over him when the great agony
came. And thus SHE would see him when she looked out upon the glad morning, and oh! would she drop one
little tear upon his poor, lifeless form, would she heave one little sigh to see a bright young life so rudely blighted,
so untimely cut down?
The window went up, a maid−servant's discordant voice profaned the holy calm, and a deluge of water
drenched the prone martyr's remains!
The strangling hero sprang up with a relieving snort. There was a whiz as of a missile in the air, mingled with
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 10
the murmur of a curse, a sound as of shivering glass followed, and a small, vague form went over the fence and
shot away in the gloom.
Not long after, as Tom, all undressed for bed, was surveying his drenched garments by the light of a tallow dip,
Sid woke up; but if he had any dim idea of making any "references to allusions," he thought better of it and held
his peace, for there was danger in Tom's eye.
Tom turned in without the added vexation of prayers, and Sid made mental note of the omission.
CHAPTER IV
THE sun rose upon a tranquil world, and beamed down upon the peaceful village like a benediction. Breakfast
over, Aunt Polly had family worship: it began with a prayer built from the ground up of solid courses of Scriptural
quotations, welded together with a thin mortar of originality; and from the summit of this she delivered a grim
chapter of the Mosaic Law, as from Sinai.
Then Tom girded up his loins, so to speak, and went to work to "get his verses." Sid had learned his lesson
days before. Tom bent all his energies to the memorizing of five verses, and he chose part of the Sermon on the
Mount, because he could find no verses that were shorter. At the end of half an hour Tom had a vague general
idea of his lesson, but no more, for his mind was traversing the whole field of human thought, and his hands were
busy with distracting recreations. Mary took his book to hear him recite, and he tried to find his way through the
fog:
"Blessed are the −− a −− a −−"
"Poor" −−
"Yes −− poor; blessed are the poor −− a −− a −−"
"In spirit −−"
"In spirit; blessed are the poor in spirit, for they −− they −−"
"THEIRS −−"
"For THEIRS. Blessed are the poor in spirit, for theirs is the kingdom of heaven. Blessed are they that mourn,
for they −− they −−"
"Sh −−"
"For they −− a −−"
"S, H, A −−"
"For they S, H −− Oh, I don't know what it is!"
"SHALL!"
"Oh, SHALL! for they shall −− for they shall −− a −− a −− shall mourn −− a−− a −− blessed are they that shall
−− they that −− a −− they that shall mourn, for they shall −− a −− shall WHAT? Why don't you tell me, Mary? −−
what do you want to be so mean for?"
"Oh, Tom, you poor thick−headed thing, I'm not teasing you. I wouldn't do that. You must go and learn it
again. Don't you be discouraged, Tom, you'll manage it −− and if you do, I'll give you something ever so nice.
There, now, that's a good boy."
"All right! What is it, Mary, tell me what it is."
"Never you mind, Tom. You know if I say it's nice, it is nice."
"You bet you that's so, Mary. All right, I'll tackle it again."
And he did "tackle it again" −− and under the double pressure of curiosity and prospective gain he did it with
such spirit that he accomplished a shining success. Mary gave him a brand−new "Barlow" knife worth twelve and
a half cents; and the convulsion of delight that swept his system shook him to his foundations. True, the knife
would not cut anything, but it was a "sure−enough" Barlow, and there was inconceivable grandeur in that −−
though where the Western boys ever got the idea that such a weapon could possibly be counterfeited to its injury
is an imposing mystery and will always remain so, perhaps. Tom contrived to scarify the cupboard with it, and
was arranging to begin on the bureau, when he was called off to dress for Sunday−school.
Mary gave him a tin basin of water and a piece of soap, and he went outside the door and set the basin on a
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 11
little bench there; then he dipped the soap in the water and laid it down; turned up his sleeves; poured out the
water on the ground, gently, and then entered the kitchen and began to wipe his face diligently on the towel
behind the door. But Mary removed the towel and said:
"Now ain't you ashamed, Tom. You mustn't be so bad. Water won't hurt you."
Tom was a trifle disconcerted. The basin was refilled, and this time he stood over it a little while, gathering
resolution; took in a big breath and began. When he entered the kitchen presently, with both eyes shut and groping
for the towel with his hands, an honorable testimony of suds and water was dripping from his face. But when he
emerged from the towel, he was not yet satisfactory, for the clean territory stopped short at his chin and his jaws,
like a mask; below and beyond this line there was a dark expanse of unirrigated soil that spread downward in
front and backward around his neck. Mary took him in hand, and when she was done with him he was a man and
a brother, without distinction of color, and his saturated hair was neatly brushed, and its short curls wrought into a
dainty and symmetrical general effect. [He privately smoothed out the curls, with labor and difficulty, and
plastered his hair close down to his head; for he held curls to be effeminate, and his own filled his life with
bitterness.] Then Mary got out a suit of his clothing that had been used only on Sundays during two years −− they
were simply called his "other clothes" −− and so by that we know the size of his wardrobe. The girl "put him to
rights" after he had dressed himself; she buttoned his neat roundabout up to his chin, turned his vast shirt collar
down over his shoulders, brushed him off and crowned him with his speckled straw hat. He now looked
exceedingly improved and uncomfortable. He was fully as uncomfortable as he looked; for there was a restraint
about whole clothes and cleanliness that galled him. He hoped that Mary would forget his shoes, but the hope was
blighted; she coated them thoroughly with tallow, as was the custom, and brought them out. He lost his temper
and said he was always being made to do everything he didn't want to do. But Mary said, persuasively:
"Please, Tom −− that's a good boy."
So he got into the shoes snarling. Mary was soon ready, and the three children set out for Sunday−school −− a
place that Tom hated with his whole heart; but Sid and Mary were fond of it.
Sabbath−school hours were from nine to half−past ten; and then church service. Two of the children always
remained for the sermon voluntarily, and the other always remained too −− for stronger reasons. The church's
high−backed, uncushioned pews would seat about three hundred persons; the edifice was but a small, plain affair,
with a sort of pine board tree−box on top of it for a steeple. At the door Tom dropped back a step and accosted a
Sunday−dressed comrade:
"Say, Billy, got a yaller ticket?"
"Yes."
"What'll you take for her?"
"What'll you give?"
"Piece of lickrish and a fish−hook."
"Less see 'em."
Tom exhibited. They were satisfactory, and the property changed hands. Then Tom traded a couple of white
alleys for three red tickets, and some small trifle or other for a couple of blue ones. He waylaid other boys as they
came, and went on buying tickets of various colors ten or fifteen minutes longer. He entered the church, now, with
a swarm of clean and noisy boys and girls, proceeded to his seat and started a quarrel with the first boy that came
handy. The teacher, a grave, elderly man, interfered; then turned his back a moment and Tom pulled a boy's hair
in the next bench, and was absorbed in his book when the boy turned around; stuck a pin in another boy,
presently, in order to hear him say "Ouch!" and got a new reprimand from his teacher. Tom's whole class were of
a pattern −− restless, noisy, and troublesome. When they came to recite their lessons, not one of them knew his
verses perfectly, but had to be prompted all along. However, they worried through, and each got his reward −− in
small blue tickets, each with a passage of Scripture on it; each blue ticket was pay for two verses of the recitation.
Ten blue tickets equalled a red one, and could be exchanged for it; ten red tickets equalled a yellow one; for ten
yellow tickets the superintendent gave a very plainly bound Bible (worth forty cents in those easy times) to the
pupil. How many of my readers would have the industry and application to memorize two thousand verses, even
for a Dore Bible? And yet Mary had acquired two Bibles in this way −− it was the patient work of two years −−
and a boy of German parentage had won four or five. He once recited three thousand verses without stopping; but
the strain upon his mental faculties was too great, and he was little better than an idiot from that day forth −− a
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 12
grievous misfortune for the school, for on great occasions, before company, the superintendent (as Tom expressed
it) had always made this boy come out and "spread himself." Only the older pupils managed to keep their tickets
and stick to their tedious work long enough to get a Bible, and so the delivery of one of these prizes was a rare
and noteworthy circumstance; the successful pupil was so great and conspicuous for that day that on the spot
every scholar's heart was fired with a fresh ambition that often lasted a couple of weeks. It is possible that Tom's
mental stomach had never really hungered for one of those prizes, but unquestionably his entire being had for
many a day longed for the glory and the eclat that came with it.
In due course the superintendent stood up in front of the pulpit, with a closed hymn−book in his hand and his
forefinger inserted between its leaves, and commanded attention. When a Sunday−school superintendent makes
his customary little speech, a hymn−book in the hand is as necessary as is the inevitable sheet of music in the
hand of a singer who stands forward on the platform and sings a solo at a concert −− though why, is a mystery:
for neither the hymn−book nor the sheet of music is ever referred to by the sufferer. This superintendent was a
slim creature of thirty−five, with a sandy goatee and short sandy hair; he wore a stiff standing−collar whose upper
edge almost reached his ears and whose sharp points curved forward abreast the corners of his mouth −− a fence
that compelled a straight lookout ahead, and a turning of the whole body when a side view was required; his chin
was propped on a spreading cravat which was as broad and as long as a bank−note, and had fringed ends; his boot
toes were turned sharply up, in the fashion of the day, like sleighrunners −− an effect patiently and laboriously
produced by the young men by sitting with their toes pressed against a wall for hours together. Mr. Walters was
very earnest of mien, and very sincere and honest at heart; and he held sacred things and places in such reverence,
and so separated them from worldly matters, that unconsciously to himself his Sunday−school voice had acquired
a peculiar intonation which was wholly absent on week−days. He began after this fashion:
"Now, children, I want you all to sit up just as straight and pretty as you can and give me all your attention for
a minute or two. There −− that is it. That is the way good little boys and girls should do. I see one little girl who is
looking out of the window −− I am afraid she thinks I am out there somewhere −− perhaps up in one of the trees
making a speech to the little birds. [Applausive titter.] I want to tell you how good it makes me feel to see so
many bright, clean little faces assembled in a place like this, learning to do right and be good." And so forth and
so on. It is not necessary to set down the rest of the oration. It was of a pattern which does not vary, and so it is
familiar to us all.
The latter third of the speech was marred by the resumption of fights and other recreations among certain of
the bad boys, and by fidgetings and whisperings that extended far and wide, washing even to the bases of isolated
and incorruptible rocks like Sid and Mary. But now every sound ceased suddenly, with the subsidence of Mr.
Walters' voice, and the conclusion of the speech was received with a burst of silent gratitude.
A good part of the whispering had been occasioned by an event which was more or less rare −− the entrance of
visitors: lawyer Thatcher, accompanied by a very feeble and aged man; a fine, portly, middle−aged gentleman
with iron−gray hair; and a dignified lady who was doubtless the latter's wife. The lady was leading a child. Tom
had been restless and full of chafings and repinings; conscience−smitten, too −− he could not meet Amy
Lawrence's eye, he could not brook her loving gaze. But when he saw this small new−comer his soul was all
ablaze with bliss in a moment. The next moment he was "showing off" with all his might −− cuffing boys, pulling
hair, making faces −− in a word, using every art that seemed likely to fascinate a girl and win her applause. His
exaltation had but one alloy −− the memory of his humiliation in this angel's garden −− and that record in sand
was fast washing out, under the waves of happiness that were sweeping over it now.
The visitors were given the highest seat of honor, and as soon as Mr. Walters' speech was finished, he
introduced them to the school. The middle−aged man turned out to be a prodigious personage −− no less a one
than the county judge −− altogether the most august creation these children had ever looked upon −− and they
wondered what kind of material he was made of −− and they half wanted to hear him roar, and were half afraid he
might, too. He was from Constantinople, twelve miles away −− so he had travelled, and seen the world −− these
very eyes had looked upon the county court−house −− which was said to have a tin roof. The awe which these
reflections inspired was attested by the impressive silence and the ranks of staring eyes. This was the great Judge
Thatcher, brother of their own lawyer. Jeff Thatcher immediately went forward, to be familiar with the great man
and be envied by the school. It would have been music to his soul to hear the whisperings:
"Look at him, Jim! He's a going up there. Say −− look! he's a going to shake hands with him −− he IS shaking
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 13
hands with him! By jings, don't you wish you was Jeff?"
Mr. Walters fell to "showing off," with all sorts of official bustlings and activities, giving orders, delivering
judgments, discharging directions here, there, everywhere that he could find a target. The librarian "showed off"
−− running hither and thither with his arms full of books and making a deal of the splutter and fuss that insect
authority delights in. The young lady teachers "showed off" −− bending sweetly over pupils that were lately being
boxed, lifting pretty warning fingers at bad little boys and patting good ones lovingly. The young gentlemen
teachers "showed off" with small scoldings and other little displays of authority and fine attention to discipline −−
and most of the teachers, of both sexes, found business up at the library, by the pulpit; and it was business that
frequently had to be done over again two or three times (with much seeming vexation). The little girls "showed
off" in various ways, and the little boys "showed off" with such diligence that the air was thick with paper wads
and the murmur of scufflings. And above it all the great man sat and beamed a majestic judicial smile upon all the
house, and warmed himself in the sun of his own grandeur −− for he was "showing off," too.
There was only one thing wanting to make Mr. Walters' ecstasy complete, and that was a chance to deliver a
Bible−prize and exhibit a prodigy. Several pupils had a few yellow tickets, but none had enough −− he had been
around among the star pupils inquiring. He would have given worlds, now, to have that German lad back again
with a sound mind.
And now at this moment, when hope was dead, Tom Sawyer came forward with nine yellow tickets, nine red
tickets, and ten blue ones, and demanded a Bible. This was a thunderbolt out of a clear sky. Walters was not
expecting an application from this source for the next ten years. But there was no getting around it −− here were
the certified checks, and they were good for their face. Tom was therefore elevated to a place with the Judge and
the other elect, and the great news was announced from headquarters. It was the most stunning surprise of the
decade, and so profound was the sensation that it lifted the new hero up to the judicial one's altitude, and the
school had two marvels to gaze upon in place of one. The boys were all eaten up with envy −− but those that
suffered the bitterest pangs were those who perceived too late that they themselves had contributed to this hated
splendor by trading tickets to Tom for the wealth he had amassed in selling whitewashing privileges. These
despised themselves, as being the dupes of a wily fraud, a guileful snake in the grass.
The prize was delivered to Tom with as much effusion as the superintendent could pump up under the
circumstances; but it lacked somewhat of the true gush, for the poor fellow's instinct taught him that there was a
mystery here that could not well bear the light, perhaps; it was simply preposterous that this boy had warehoused
two thousand sheaves of Scriptural wisdom on his premises −− a dozen would strain his capacity, without a
doubt.
Amy Lawrence was proud and glad, and she tried to make Tom see it in her face −− but he wouldn't look. She
wondered; then she was just a grain troubled; next a dim suspicion came and went −− came again; she watched; a
furtive glance told her worlds −− and then her heart broke, and she was jealous, and angry, and the tears came and
she hated everybody. Tom most of all (she thought).
Tom was introduced to the Judge; but his tongue was tied, his breath would hardly come, his heart quaked −−
partly because of the awful greatness of the man, but mainly because he was her parent. He would have liked to
fall down and worship him, if it were in the dark. The Judge put his hand on Tom's head and called him a fine
little man, and asked him what his name was. The boy stammered, gasped, and got it out:
"Tom."
"Oh, no, not Tom −− it is −−"
"Thomas."
"Ah, that's it. I thought there was more to it, maybe. That's very well. But you've another one I daresay, and
you'll tell it to me, won't you?"
"Tell the gentleman your other name, Thomas," said Walters, "and say sir. You mustn't forget your manners."
"Thomas Sawyer −− sir."
"That's it! That's a good boy. Fine boy. Fine, manly little fellow. Two thousand verses is a great many −− very,
very great many. And you never can be sorry for the trouble you took to learn them; for knowledge is worth more
than anything there is in the world; it's what makes great men and good men; you'll be a great man and a good
man yourself, some day, Thomas, and then you'll look back and say, It's all owing to the precious Sunday−school
privileges of my boyhood −− it's all owing to my dear teachers that taught me to learn −− it's all owing to the
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 14
good superintendent, who encouraged me, and watched over me, and gave me a beautiful Bible −− a splendid
elegant Bible −− to keep and have it all for my own, always −− it's all owing to right bringing up! That is what
you will say, Thomas −− and you wouldn't take any money for those two thousand verses −− no indeed you
wouldn't. And now you wouldn't mind telling me and this lady some of the things you've learned −− no, I know
you wouldn't −− for we are proud of little boys that learn. Now, no doubt you know the names of all the twelve
disciples. Won't you tell us the names of the first two that were appointed?"
Tom was tugging at a button−hole and looking sheepish. He blushed, now, and his eyes fell. Mr. Walters' heart
sank within him. He said to himself, it is not possible that the boy can answer the simplest question −− why DID
the Judge ask him? Yet he felt obliged to speak up and say:
"Answer the gentleman, Thomas −− don't be afraid."
Tom still hung fire.
"Now I know you'll tell me," said the lady. "The names of the first two disciples were −−"
"DAVID AND GOLIAH!"
Let us draw the curtain of charity over the rest of the scene.
CHAPTER V
ABOUT half−past ten the cracked bell of the small church began to ring, and presently the people began to
gather for the morning sermon. The Sunday−school children distributed themselves about the house and occupied
pews with their parents, so as to be under supervision. Aunt Polly came, and Tom and Sid and Mary sat with her
−− Tom being placed next the aisle, in order that he might be as far away from the open window and the seductive
outside summer scenes as possible. The crowd filed up the aisles: the aged and needy postmaster, who had seen
better days; the mayor and his wife −− for they had a mayor there, among other unnecessaries; the justice of the
peace; the widow Douglass, fair, smart, and forty, a generous, good−hearted soul and well−to−do, her hill
mansion the only palace in the town, and the most hospitable and much the most lavish in the matter of festivities
that St. Petersburg could boast; the bent and venerable Major and Mrs. Ward; lawyer Riverson, the new notable
from a distance; next the belle of the village, followed by a troop of lawn−clad and ribbon−decked young
heart−breakers; then all the young clerks in town in a body −− for they had stood in the vestibule sucking their
cane−heads, a circling wall of oiled and simpering admirers, till the last girl had run their gantlet; and last of all
came the Model Boy, Willie Mufferson, taking as heedful care of his mother as if she were cut glass. He always
brought his mother to church, and was the pride of all the matrons. The boys all hated him, he was so good. And
besides, he had been "thrown up to them" so much. His white handkerchief was hanging out of his pocket behind,
as usual on Sundays −− accidentally. Tom had no handkerchief, and he looked upon boys who had as snobs.
The congregation being fully assembled, now, the bell rang once more, to warn laggards and stragglers, and
then a solemn hush fell upon the church which was only broken by the tittering and whispering of the choir in the
gallery. The choir always tittered and whispered all through service. There was once a church choir that was not
ill−bred, but I have forgotten where it was, now. It was a great many years ago, and I can scarcely remember
anything about it, but I think it was in some foreign country.
The minister gave out the hymn, and read it through with a relish, in a peculiar style which was much admired
in that part of the country. His voice began on a medium key and climbed steadily up till it reached a certain
point, where it bore with strong emphasis upon the topmost word and then plunged down as if from a
spring−board:
Shall I be car−ri−ed toe the skies, on flow'ry BEDS
of ease,
Whilst others fight to win the prize, and sail thro' BLOODy
seas?
He was regarded as a wonderful reader. At church "sociables" he was always called upon to read poetry; and
when he was through, the ladies would lift up their hands and let them fall helplessly in their laps, and "wall" their
eyes, and shake their heads, as much as to say, "Words cannot express it; it is too beautiful, TOO beautiful for this
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 15
mortal earth."
After the hymn had been sung, the Rev. Mr. Sprague turned himself into a bulletin−board, and read off
"notices" of meetings and societies and things till it seemed that the list would stretch out to the crack of doom −−
a queer custom which is still kept up in America, even in cities, away here in this age of abundant newspapers.
Often, the less there is to justify a traditional custom, the harder it is to get rid of it.
And now the minister prayed. A good, generous prayer it was, and went into details: it pleaded for the church,
and the little children of the church; for the other churches of the village; for the village itself; for the county; for
the State; for the State officers; for the United States; for the churches of the United States; for Congress; for the
President; for the officers of the Government; for poor sailors, tossed by stormy seas; for the oppressed millions
groaning under the heel of European monarchies and Oriental despotisms; for such as have the light and the good
tidings, and yet have not eyes to see nor ears to hear withal; for the heathen in the far islands of the sea; and
closed with a supplication that the words he was about to speak might find grace and favor, and be as seed sown
in fertile ground, yielding in time a grateful harvest of good. Amen.
There was a rustling of dresses, and the standing congregation sat down. The boy whose history this book
relates did not enjoy the prayer, he only endured it −− if he even did that much. He was restive all through it; he
kept tally of the details of the prayer, unconsciously −− for he was not listening, but he knew the ground of old,
and the clergyman's regular route over it −− and when a little trifle of new matter was interlarded, his ear detected
it and his whole nature resented it; he considered additions unfair, and scoundrelly. In the midst of the prayer a fly
had lit on the back of the pew in front of him and tortured his spirit by calmly rubbing its hands together,
embracing its head with its arms, and polishing it so vigorously that it seemed to almost part company with the
body, and the slender thread of a neck was exposed to view; scraping its wings with its hind legs and smoothing
them to its body as if they had been coat−tails; going through its whole toilet as tranquilly as if it knew it was
perfectly safe. As indeed it was; for as sorely as Tom's hands itched to grab for it they did not dare −− he believed
his soul would be instantly destroyed if he did such a thing while the prayer was going on. But with the closing
sentence his hand began to curve and steal forward; and the instant the "Amen" was out the fly was a prisoner of
war. His aunt detected the act and made him let it go.
The minister gave out his text and droned along monotonously through an argument that was so prosy that
many a head by and by began to nod −− and yet it was an argument that dealt in limitless fire and brimstone and
thinned the predestined elect down to a company so small as to be hardly worth the saving. Tom counted the
pages of the sermon; after church he always knew how many pages there had been, but he seldom knew anything
else about the discourse. However, this time he was really interested for a little while. The minister made a grand
and moving picture of the assembling together of the world's hosts at the millennium when the lion and the lamb
should lie down together and a little child should lead them. But the pathos, the lesson, the moral of the great
spectacle were lost upon the boy; he only thought of the conspicuousness of the principal character before the
on−looking nations; his face lit with the thought, and he said to himself that he wished he could be that child, if it
was a tame lion.
Now he lapsed into suffering again, as the dry argument was resumed. Presently he bethought him of a treasure
he had and got it out. It was a large black beetle with formidable jaws −− a "pinchbug," he called it. It was in a
percussion−cap box. The first thing the beetle did was to take him by the finger. A natural fillip followed, the
beetle went floundering into the aisle and lit on its back, and the hurt finger went into the boy's mouth. The beetle
lay there working its helpless legs, unable to turn over. Tom eyed it, and longed for it; but it was safe out of his
reach. Other people uninterested in the sermon found relief in the beetle, and they eyed it too. Presently a vagrant
poodle dog came idling along, sad at heart, lazy with the summer softness and the quiet, weary of captivity,
sighing for change. He spied the beetle; the drooping tail lifted and wagged. He surveyed the prize; walked
around it; smelt at it from a safe distance; walked around it again; grew bolder, and took a closer smell; then lifted
his lip and made a gingerly snatch at it, just missing it; made another, and another; began to enjoy the diversion;
subsided to his stomach with the beetle between his paws, and continued his experiments; grew weary at last, and
then indifferent and absent−minded. His head nodded, and little by little his chin descended and touched the
enemy, who seized it. There was a sharp yelp, a flirt of the poodle's head, and the beetle fell a couple of yards
away, and lit on its back once more. The neighboring spectators shook with a gentle inward joy, several faces
went behind fans and handkerchiefs, and Tom was entirely happy. The dog looked foolish, and probably felt so;
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 16
but there was resentment in his heart, too, and a craving for revenge. So he went to the beetle and began a wary
attack on it again; jumping at it from every point of a circle, lighting with his fore−paws within an inch of the
creature, making even closer snatches at it with his teeth, and jerking his head till his ears flapped again. But he
grew tired once more, after a while; tried to amuse himself with a fly but found no relief; followed an ant around,
with his nose close to the floor, and quickly wearied of that; yawned, sighed, forgot the beetle entirely, and sat
down on it. Then there was a wild yelp of agony and the poodle went sailing up the aisle; the yelps continued, and
so did the dog; he crossed the house in front of the altar; he flew down the other aisle; he crossed before the doors;
he clamored up the home−stretch; his anguish grew with his progress, till presently he was but a woolly comet
moving in its orbit with the gleam and the speed of light. At last the frantic sufferer sheered from its course, and
sprang into its master's lap; he flung it out of the window, and the voice of distress quickly thinned away and died
in the distance.
By this time the whole church was red−faced and suffocating with suppressed laughter, and the sermon had
come to a dead standstill. The discourse was resumed presently, but it went lame and halting, all possibility of
impressiveness being at an end; for even the gravest sentiments were constantly being received with a smothered
burst of unholy mirth, under cover of some remote pew−back, as if the poor parson had said a rarely facetious
thing. It was a genuine relief to the whole congregation when the ordeal was over and the benediction
pronounced.
Tom Sawyer went home quite cheerful, thinking to himself that there was some satisfaction about divine
service when there was a bit of variety in it. He had but one marring thought; he was willing that the dog should
play with his pinchbug, but he did not think it was upright in him to carry it off.
CHAPTER VI
MONDAY morning found Tom Sawyer miserable. Monday morning always found him so −− because it began
another week's slow suffering in school. He generally began that day with wishing he had had no intervening
holiday, it made the going into captivity and fetters again so much more odious.
Tom lay thinking. Presently it occurred to him that he wished he was sick; then he could stay home from
school. Here was a vague possibility. He canvassed his system. No ailment was found, and he investigated again.
This time he thought he could detect colicky symptoms, and he began to encourage them with considerable hope.
But they soon grew feeble, and presently died wholly away. He reflected further. Suddenly he discovered
something. One of his upper front teeth was loose. This was lucky; he was about to begin to groan, as a "starter,"
as he called it, when it occurred to him that if he came into court with that argument, his aunt would pull it out,
and that would hurt. So he thought he would hold the tooth in reserve for the present, and seek further. Nothing
offered for some little time, and then he remembered hearing the doctor tell about a certain thing that laid up a
patient for two or three weeks and threatened to make him lose a finger. So the boy eagerly drew his sore toe from
under the sheet and held it up for inspection. But now he did not know the necessary symptoms. However, it
seemed well worth while to chance it, so he fell to groaning with considerable spirit.
But Sid slept on unconscious.
Tom groaned louder, and fancied that he began to feel pain in the toe.
No result from Sid.
Tom was panting with his exertions by this time. He took a rest and then swelled himself up and fetched a
succession of admirable groans.
Sid snored on.
Tom was aggravated. He said, "Sid, Sid!" and shook him. This course worked well, and Tom began to groan
again. Sid yawned, stretched, then brought himself up on his elbow with a snort, and began to stare at Tom. Tom
went on groaning. Sid said:
"Tom! Say, Tom!" [No response.] "Here, Tom! TOM! What is the matter, Tom?" And he shook him and
looked in his face anxiously.
Tom moaned out:
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 17
"Oh, don't, Sid. Don't joggle me."
"Why, what's the matter, Tom? I must call auntie."
"No −− never mind. It'll be over by and by, maybe. Don't call anybody."
"But I must! DON'T groan so, Tom, it's awful. How long you been this way?"
"Hours. Ouch! Oh, don't stir so, Sid, you'll kill me."
"Tom, why didn't you wake me sooner ? Oh, Tom, DON'T! It makes my flesh crawl to hear you. Tom, what is
the matter?"
"I forgive you everything, Sid. [Groan.] Everything you've ever done to me. When I'm gone −−"
"Oh, Tom, you ain't dying, are you? Don't, Tom −− oh, don't. Maybe −−"
"I forgive everybody, Sid. [Groan.] Tell 'em so, Sid. And Sid, you give my window−sash and my cat with one
eye to that new girl that's come to town, and tell her −−"
But Sid had snatched his clothes and gone. Tom was suffering in reality, now, so handsomely was his
imagination working, and so his groans had gathered quite a genuine tone.
Sid flew down−stairs and said:
"Oh, Aunt Polly, come! Tom's dying!"
"Dying!"
"Yes'm. Don't wait −− come quick!"
"Rubbage! I don't believe it!"
But she fled up−stairs, nevertheless, with Sid and Mary at her heels. And her face grew white, too, and her lip
trembled. When she reached the bedside she gasped out:
"You, Tom! Tom, what's the matter with you?"
"Oh, auntie, I'm −−"
"What's the matter with you −− what is the matter with you, child?"
"Oh, auntie, my sore toe's mortified!"
The old lady sank down into a chair and laughed a little, then cried a little, then did both together. This restored
her and she said:
"Tom, what a turn you did give me. Now you shut up that nonsense and climb out of this."
The groans ceased and the pain vanished from the toe. The boy felt a little foolish, and he said:
"Aunt Polly, it SEEMED mortified, and it hurt so I never minded my tooth at all."
"Your tooth, indeed! What's the matter with your tooth?"
"One of them's loose, and it aches perfectly awful."
"There, there, now, don't begin that groaning again. Open your mouth. Well −− your tooth IS loose, but you're
not going to die about that. Mary, get me a silk thread, and a chunk of fire out of the kitchen."
Tom said:
"Oh, please, auntie, don't pull it out. It don't hurt any more. I wish I may never stir if it does. Please don't,
auntie. I don't want to stay home from school."
"Oh, you don't, don't you? So all this row was because you thought you'd get to stay home from school and go
a−fishing? Tom, Tom, I love you so, and you seem to try every way you can to break my old heart with your
outrageousness." By this time the dental instruments were ready. The old lady made one end of the silk thread fast
to Tom's tooth with a loop and tied the other to the bedpost. Then she seized the chunk of fire and suddenly thrust
it almost into the boy's face. The tooth hung dangling by the bedpost, now.
But all trials bring their compensations. As Tom wended to school after breakfast, he was the envy of every
boy he met because the gap in his upper row of teeth enabled him to expectorate in a new and admirable way. He
gathered quite a following of lads interested in the exhibition; and one that had cut his finger and had been a
centre of fascination and homage up to this time, now found himself suddenly without an adherent, and shorn of
his glory. His heart was heavy, and he said with a disdain which he did not feel that it wasn't anything to spit like
Tom Sawyer; but another boy said, "Sour grapes!" and he wandered away a dismantled hero.
Shortly Tom came upon the juvenile pariah of the village, Huckleberry Finn, son of the town drunkard.
Huckleberry was cordially hated and dreaded by all the mothers of the town, because he was idle and lawless and
vulgar and bad −− and because all their children admired him so, and delighted in his forbidden society, and
wished they dared to be like him. Tom was like the rest of the respectable boys, in that he envied Huckleberry his
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 18
gaudy outcast condition, and was under strict orders not to play with him. So he played with him every time he
got a chance. Huckleberry was always dressed in the cast−off clothes of full−grown men, and they were in
perennial bloom and fluttering with rags. His hat was a vast ruin with a wide crescent lopped out of its brim; his
coat, when he wore one, hung nearly to his heels and had the rearward buttons far down the back; but one
suspender supported his trousers; the seat of the trousers bagged low and contained nothing, the fringed legs
dragged in the dirt when not rolled up.
Huckleberry came and went, at his own free will. He slept on doorsteps in fine weather and in empty
hogsheads in wet; he did not have to go to school or to church, or call any being master or obey anybody; he
could go fishing or swimming when and where he chose, and stay as long as it suited him; nobody forbade him to
fight; he could sit up as late as he pleased; he was always the first boy that went barefoot in the spring and the last
to resume leather in the fall; he never had to wash, nor put on clean clothes; he could swear wonderfully. In a
word, everything that goes to make life precious that boy had. So thought every harassed, hampered, respectable
boy in St. Petersburg.
Tom hailed the romantic outcast:
"Hello, Huckleberry!"
"Hello yourself, and see how you like it."
"What's that you got?"
"Dead cat."
"Lemme see him, Huck. My, he's pretty stiff. Where'd you get him ?"
"Bought him off'n a boy."
"What did you give?"
"I give a blue ticket and a bladder that I got at the slaughter−house."
"Where'd you get the blue ticket?"
"Bought it off'n Ben Rogers two weeks ago for a hoop−stick."
"Say −− what is dead cats good for, Huck?"
"Good for? Cure warts with."
"No! Is that so? I know something that's better."
"I bet you don't. What is it?"
"Why, spunk−water."
"Spunk−water! I wouldn't give a dern for spunkwater."
"You wouldn't, wouldn't you? D'you ever try it?"
"No, I hain't. But Bob Tanner did."
"Who told you so!"
"Why, he told Jeff Thatcher, and Jeff told Johnny Baker, and Johnny told Jim Hollis, and Jim told Ben Rogers,
and Ben told a nigger, and the nigger told me. There now!"
"Well, what of it? They'll all lie. Leastways all but the nigger. I don't know HIM. But I never see a nigger that
WOULDN'T lie. Shucks! Now you tell me how Bob Tanner done it, Huck."
"Why, he took and dipped his hand in a rotten stump where the rain−water was."
"In the daytime?"
"Certainly."
"With his face to the stump?"
"Yes. Least I reckon so."
"Did he say anything?"
"I don't reckon he did. I don't know."
"Aha! Talk about trying to cure warts with spunkwater such a blame fool way as that! Why, that ain't a−going
to do any good. You got to go all by yourself, to the middle of the woods, where you know there's a spunk−water
stump, and just as it's midnight you back up against the stump and jam your hand in and say:
'Barley−corn, barley−corn, injun−meal shorts, Spunk−water, spunk−water, swaller these warts,'
and then walk away quick, eleven steps, with your eyes shut, and then turn around three times and walk home
without speaking to anybody. Because if you speak the charm's busted."
"Well, that sounds like a good way; but that ain't the way Bob Tanner done."
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 19
"No, sir, you can bet he didn't, becuz he's the wartiest boy in this town; and he wouldn't have a wart on him if
he'd knowed how to work spunkwater. I've took off thousands of warts off of my hands that way, Huck. I play
with frogs so much that I've always got considerable many warts. Sometimes I take 'em off with a bean."
"Yes, bean's good. I've done that."
"Have you? What's your way?"
"You take and split the bean, and cut the wart so as to get some blood, and then you put the blood on one piece
of the bean and take and dig a hole and bury it 'bout midnight at the crossroads in the dark of the moon, and then
you burn up the rest of the bean. You see that piece that's got the blood on it will keep drawing and drawing,
trying to fetch the other piece to it, and so that helps the blood to draw the wart, and pretty soon off she comes."
"Yes, that's it, Huck −− that's it; though when you're burying it if you say 'Down bean; off wart; come no more
to bother me!' it's better. That's the way Joe Harper does, and he's been nearly to Coonville and most everywheres.
But say −− how do you cure 'em with dead cats?"
"Why, you take your cat and go and get in the graveyard 'long about midnight when somebody that was
wicked has been buried; and when it's midnight a devil will come, or maybe two or three, but you can't see 'em,
you can only hear something like the wind, or maybe hear 'em talk; and when they're taking that feller away, you
heave your cat after 'em and say, 'Devil follow corpse, cat follow devil, warts follow cat, I'm done with ye!' That'll
fetch ANY wart."
"Sounds right. D'you ever try it, Huck?"
"No, but old Mother Hopkins told me."
"Well, I reckon it's so, then. Becuz they say she's a witch."
"Say! Why, Tom, I KNOW she is. She witched pap. Pap says so his own self. He come along one day, and he
see she was a−witching him, so he took up a rock, and if she hadn't dodged, he'd a got her. Well, that very night
he rolled off'n a shed wher' he was a layin drunk, and broke his arm."
"Why, that's awful. How did he know she was a−witching him?"
"Lord, pap can tell, easy. Pap says when they keep looking at you right stiddy, they're a−witching you.
Specially if they mumble. Becuz when they mumble they're saying the Lord's Prayer backards."
"Say, Hucky, when you going to try the cat?"
"To−night. I reckon they'll come after old Hoss Williams to−night."
"But they buried him Saturday. Didn't they get him Saturday night?"
"Why, how you talk! How could their charms work till midnight? −− and THEN it's Sunday. Devils don't slosh
around much of a Sunday, I don't reckon."
"I never thought of that. That's so. Lemme go with you?"
"Of course −− if you ain't afeard."
"Afeard! 'Tain't likely. Will you meow?"
"Yes −− and you meow back, if you get a chance. Last time, you kep' me a−meowing around till old Hays
went to throwing rocks at me and says 'Dern that cat!' and so I hove a brick through his window −− but don't you
tell."
"I won't. I couldn't meow that night, becuz auntie was watching me, but I'll meow this time. Say −− what's
that?"
"Nothing but a tick."
"Where'd you get him?"
"Out in the woods."
"What'll you take for him?"
"I don't know. I don't want to sell him."
"All right. It's a mighty small tick, anyway."
"Oh, anybody can run a tick down that don't belong to them. I'm satisfied with it. It's a good enough tick for
me."
"Sho, there's ticks a plenty. I could have a thousand of 'em if I wanted to."
"Well, why don't you? Becuz you know mighty well you can't. This is a pretty early tick, I reckon. It's the first
one I've seen this year."
"Say, Huck −− I'll give you my tooth for him."
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 20
"Less see it."
Tom got out a bit of paper and carefully unrolled it. Huckleberry viewed it wistfully. The temptation was very
strong. At last he said:
"Is it genuwyne?"
Tom lifted his lip and showed the vacancy.
"Well, all right," said Huckleberry, "it's a trade."
Tom enclosed the tick in the percussion−cap box that had lately been the pinchbug's prison, and the boys
separated, each feeling wealthier than before.
When Tom reached the little isolated frame schoolhouse, he strode in briskly, with the manner of one who had
come with all honest speed. He hung his hat on a peg and flung himself into his seat with business −like alacrity.
Tumblr media
Did you know? Tumblr DOES have a post length limit. Strangely, though, it's based on how many blocks of text you have. Supposedly this implies that you can have any length post so long as it's one block of text? Very strange, will have to investigate further.
37K notes · View notes
aalbedo · 4 years ago
Text
injured!tartaglia x reader (part 2)
part two of this
request: Hello I absolutely loved your one shot of Tartaglia helping an injured reader sdjgksjfkf if you don't mind I'd like to request a part 2 where reader asks him the story behind that big scar he pointed out? Maybe reader finds HIM injured and returns the favor and asks about his other scars while they treat his wounds?? Ahaha reader's just like "fuck I can't just leave you here to bleed out but don't you dare think this means I care for you or anything" lmao
format: two-parter (again, read part one first)
ship: tartaglia x reader
tags: fluff, reader is the traveler-ish (a completely separate character from aether and lumine, but still the traveler, does that make sense?), author forgets basic wound care halfway into the fic
warnings: blood, mildly graphic depiction of injury, stitches and needles
words: 3027
notes: hey so uhhhhhhhh i kinda went off the rails with this one, i didn't really follow the prompt in some points since uh... the part about the stories behind the scars... i kinda forgot about that... or like... eh you'll see, anyway, - banner still fucked up it will be fixed i prommy
Tumblr media
Despite the high number of hilichurl camps, abyss mages, fatui agents, ruin hunters and ruin guards, Lisha was still one of your favorite places to explore, it was full of treasure chests to open, sweet flowers to pick and ore to mine. Plus, the atmosphere managed to still be peaceful, the open fields where the sun would shine uninterrupted for hours and hours on end were your favorite place to sit down and bask in the sunlight.
Your leg was still recovering from the tough hit you had taken a few weeks prior, which meant that you had to take more breaks while adventuring. Not that you would complain, taking breaks, putting some numbing cream on your wound, eating some reinvigorating food and drinking fresh water was just as satisfying as exploring.
After resting for about half an hour, you decided to get up, careful not to put any pressure on your injured leg. You threw your bag over your shoulder and walked north-west, towards the road to the chasm.
In the distance, you started hearing sounds of fighting, and as you got closer to them, you could see a tall figure fighting not one, but two separate ruin hunters, with a bow. It was too far away to see the person’s face, but you had half an idea of who it could be.
Then, out of nowhere, a bright purple flash, and in less than a second the ruin hunters were both on the ground, completely destroyed. Yep, it’s Tartaglia.
You thought about turning away and changing your direction before he could see you. You had already reluctantly thanked him for helping you that day, as well as paying for your medication out of his own pocket, but you still felt like you owed him a favor that you really did not want to fulfill. He was still the guy that almost destroyed Liyue, and made you fight for your life, despite everything.
Until you saw him fall to his knees, and as he turned to face your direction you could see his chest covered in blood.
You acted on instinct, ignoring your brain telling you to leave him alone, that he could tend to his own wounds, and you sprinted towards him. He may be an asshole, but you just want to avoid him, not leave him to die.
He was resting his back on a wall, head thrown back. Even from far away, you could see that he was breathing heavily. That same backpack you had seen on him the day he helped you was now sitting next to him, his left hand already rummaging through it.
His head shot up, he had definitely heard you coming towards him, his eyes widened as you kneeled down right in front of him and got a better look at his condition. You could see a cut crossing his chest, from his right shoulder to the middle of his torso, right over his heart. His grey coat was soaked in blood, as it pooled on the bend of his hips and slid down to the ground.
“So you do care about me.” he broke the silence, struggling to talk through heavy breaths and groans. He was completely out of breath, covered in blood, definitely in pain, and all he could think about was joking.
“I don’t. Just because I hate you, it doesn’t mean I want to see you dead.” You didn’t have time to get mad at him. “Also - I owe you a favor, I guess.” The only thought in your head was to help him, so you did not think twice before quickly unbuttoning his coat and undercoat and moving them out of the way.
You got a look at his chest and through the blood you could see several other scars, most of them looked years old, a few of them looked pretty large, carving his chest and abdomen. You wondered if his entire body looked like this, and why his face didn’t.
“Like what you see?” he joked again, his voice sounded hoarse, strained, very clearly struggling to talk. You sighed, couldn’t he just shut up for a minute?
You turned to your own bag to pull out anything you might need to help him. Potions, numbing cream and even a stitching kit laid next to you. You had bought the kit after that day, and started learning how to stitch wounds.
“No,” you dismissed him again. He whined quietly, you weren’t sure if it was because of your response or the wound.
All of the sudden, you felt… fear? Fear of what? Him passing out? And anger, at the fact that he wasn’t taking the situation as seriously as you were. He could easily die from this wound and all he was doing was making jokes.
You quickly started cleaning the blood with a cloth in one hand, while holding a bottle of antiseptic potion in your left, ready to pour it on top of the cut. You were being quick, passing your hand over his chest as fast as you could, trying to gather all the blood while avoiding the open skin, but there was so much of it that in mere seconds the cloth was soaked and completely useless.
You looked up at him and he was staring at the ground, his eyes completely unfocused. “Childe,” you called him and he squeezed his eyes closed, “try to stay awake.”
“Easy to say,” he muttered. At least he was awake.
You threw away the bloody cloth, and poured the antiseptic potion directly on his scar with no warning. Despite knowing that you were just helping him, a wave of guilt washed over you as you heard him cry out from the pain and throw his head back, wincing again when he hit the wall.
Half a bottle of potion and another clean cloth drenched in blood later, the wound had completely stopped bleeding, and you finally breathed out all the tension you were holding in your body.
His face, and body, were completely pale from the blood loss. His mouth was agape, eyelids half closed - looking at you, he sighed, barely letting any air out. You glared back, but by the way his head was positioned, you couldn’t help but look at his lips, the way they moved slightly every time he breathed out, they seemed so… soft, sweet. You brushed aside a thought that had snaked into your brain. His mouth curled up and he barked a laugh, but he stopped immediately and groaned again. Had he noticed that you were looking?
“Don’t laugh, it’ll hurt you,” you reminded him as you threw away the second blood drenched cloth.
“Sure,” he replied, voice still strained. “Whatever you say.”
You find a third cloth, the only clean one you had left, used some water from your bottle to make it damp and used it to wash your hands.
“Don’t talk either,” you looked at him as you opened a small glass jar containing numbing cream. “What were you thinking, being here alone and fighting two ruin guards?” He opened his mouth. “Don’t answer, you’ll tell me later.”
“I was just collecting some debts when those two attacked me.” He groaned again.
“I said, don’t talk if it hurts.” You made it clear from your tone that you were annoyed at the way that he was acting.
You dipped a couple of fingers into the cream, and hesitated before placing your bare hand on his chest, carefully placing the cream around the wound, so that he would not feel pain when you would be stitching it closed. As you got a better look at the cut, you noticed how the skin had been basically mangled, it looked like it would not be an easy recovery.
“You look like you know what you’re doing,” he pointed out, before groaning again. You were starting to wish you had taped his mouth with something.
“Because I know what I’m doing, I’m not an idiot. And you’re making me regret helping you, just shut up already.”
“Make me.”
Your hand froze over his skin. You moved your eyes back up to him, trying to decipher his expression. Was that an invitation, or just teasing? He hadn’t even tried to put on a smug face, his expression just looked tired and worn out, which made it even harder to decipher.
The longer you looked at him, the weirder it would get, you would have to do something before it got awkward and that thought from earlier slammed back into your head.
You wanted to wish you had run the other way, but the truth was that you were glad you hadn’t. Maybe it was all of the tension you had accumulated while seeing all that blood flow out of him, maybe it was the heavy lidded look he was giving you, but you placed your clean hand on the side of his face, cupping his cheek. His eyes widened, mouth parted ready to say something, but, before he could, your lips were on his.
The kiss was fast, you pulled back almost immediately and averted his gaze right away. You could feel him staring at you as you put your hand back into the jar and picked up some more cream.
“I didn’t think you would actually-” he didn’t finish the sentence.
You quickly caught a glimpse of his expression before focusing on taking care of the wound. You contained a laugh as you saw him look absolutely dumbfounded and flustered, he had seriously been rendered completely speechless by what could barely be considered a kiss. If he hadn’t lost that much blood that day, his cheeks would definitely be red.
Honestly, you couldn’t believe what had happened either. You couldn’t believe you had even done it. You could’ve just laughed it off and kept medicating him in silence. But you were glad that you didn’t.
Neither of you uttered a word for a while, and even though the atmosphere wasn’t explicitly awkward, you wished he would say something. After a thick layer of numbing cream and several minutes of silence, you finally gathered the courage to look back at him. He was clearly pretending to look away, as if he hadn’t spent the entire time looking at you working.
“Is the pain gone? Can I stitch it now?” Your voice came out unexpectedly soft. You touched the skin around the wound, waiting to get a reaction from him.
His head snapped back to face you, and he nodded. “Can’t feel a thing,” he said as he touched his own chest. “I can stitch it though, if you wa- Ah!” He lifted his right arm, the injured one, and immediately stopped mid-air, “fuck- shit, not this,” he almost yelled.
“You ripped a tendon.” You gently took his right arm, putting it back down for him, and looked at his shoulder. “I’ll stitch it, don’t worry - I’ve learned.”
He didn’t say anything, and you took it as permission. You opened the kit you had bought at Bubu pharmacy weeks prior: recurved needle, thread and tweezers. You could feel Tartaglia’s gaze on you as you struggled passing the thread through the needle, but in the end you managed to do it.
As you hovered over the wound, your gaze fell on a large scar, the one that would normally be visible from over his coat on his neck, and it went down over the left side of his body down until his hip. It looked pretty old, but it was still very visible.
“Can I ask you… how did you get that?”
“Mh?”
You pointed at the scar with your pinkie and slightly traced over it, “this scar, what happened?”
He followed your finger with his gaze, and kept his eyes on the scar even as you moved back to the still open wound. “Oh, that?” You passed the needle through the skin and pulled it out on the other side. “I was 14.”
You saw some blood trickle from the cut as you carefully pulled the thread and passed the needle through one more time. By the way he had spoken, you felt like he was going to continue talking, so you didn’t interrupt.
“Uhm, when I was 14, I-” you heard him pass his tongue over his lips, “the Abyss, you know.” You nodded quietly as you passed the needle through a few more times.
“You don’t have to talk about it, if you don’t want to,” you reassured him, you knew that it was a pretty sensitive topic, or at least you imagined it would be. You stitched a few more loops with ease, getting progressively more comfortable with what you were doing.
“It’s fine, I- I was in-” his voice was starting to shake the slightest bit, but you noticed the change of tone in his voice.
You finally reached the end, and you cut the thread, tying it tightly at the end. You put the needle and the tweezers back into their container.
“I had to fight this… huge- and when-” once you looked up at him, you realized how lost in thought he was, looking at his scar, unable to take his eyes off it, he was probably getting some flashbacks. “I-” his voice cracked, his lower lip trembled ever so slightly, and you could not bear it anymore. Without even thinking about it, you grabbed the side of his face and dragged him in for an actual, proper kiss.
He fell right into it and reciprocated immediately, placing his left hand on the side of your waist. It was sweet, and tender, and you got a better feel of what his lips were like: just as soft as they looked.
You pulled back first once again, and as you got to look at his surprised face, eyebrows raised and everything, your mind started racing. You had just kissed not just a Fatui, not just a Harbinger, but the Harbinger that had tried to kill you, that manipulated you and that nearly destroyed Liyue for the second time. And he was sitting in front of you looking like an idiot.
You couldn’t figure out what you were feeling, but there was something going on deep in your chest, and stomach.
“This doesn’t mean anything,” you quickly clarified before he could say anything. “Neither of them do, they were just to shut you up.”
“Were they?” he asked. And just like that, he came full circle back to the false smugness.
You really, really did not want to think about the weird feeling that was growing in your stomach. “Look at what I got from Baizhu.” From your bag, you pulled out a thick strip made out of cotton and a small vial full of Slime concentrate.
“You’re avoiding the question.”
“What do they mean to you?” you bit back, waiting to see if he would face the question himself, or back out like a hypocrite.
“What did you get from Baizhu?”
You both chuckled, and you noticed his bare chest rising and falling back down as he laughed. “He said it’s a new type of bandaging, you use slime concentrate to stick it to the skin.”
He lifted an eyebrow. “I don’t love the sound of that, actually.”
“I was skeptical too the first time I tried it, but trust me - it’s much more comfortable.” You heard him sigh in defeat as you already spread some of the slime condensate over the strip, and set down the half empty vial. “It won’t hurt.”
“Do you promise?”
He looked into your eyes with a relaxed expression, you looked right back. “I promise,” you replied with a kind smile, before turning your attention to the strip and stuck it over the wound, carefully placing it so that it would cover the entire cut.
“All done,” you said as you started getting up, but you felt a hand grabbing your arm, another one grabbing the side of your face, and tugging you back down, and before you could realize it your lips were once again on Tartaglia’s.
You couldn’t help but reciprocate the kiss, his lips were still soft, and at that point you felt like you could get used to them. The kiss was exactly as gentle as the one before, you could feel your fluttering in your chest as Tartaglia’s thumb started gently rubbing your cheekbone.
He pulled back first this time, and as you opened your eyes back you could see a wide smile on his face.
“Sending me mixed signals, huh?” you pointed out.
“I told you, I never had anything against you personally,” he said as he put his clothes back on, trying to fix them as much as possible, despite the very clear cut on his chest and the blood covering them completely.
“I’m gonna need some time before I’ll believe that.” You got up and reached down a hand for him to get up. “You’re gonna need to prove it to me.”
He grabbed it with his non-injured hand and stood up beside you. “While you take your time, care to walk me to Bubu pharmacy, so I can buy some of these sticky bandages?” he asked, a wide smile still on his face.
“Sure,” you simply replied, picking up both of your back and tossing them over your shoulder.
You watched him move his injured arm slightly, to figure out how much he could move it. Unsurprisingly, not much.
He hummed. “I’m gonna have to take some time off from duty, hopefully they won’t kill me for it,” he said in a joking manner, but you could sense that he wasn’t kidding about the killing part.
“Well,” as you both started walking back to the harbor, you got an idea, “you could use the time off to show me that you truly don’t hate me.”
“Like what?” You could feel his gaze on you.
“Like, we could go out for dinner,” you suggested, keeping your eyes in front of you. “In a completely neutral way, and then see what happens from there.”
“Sounds good.”
“It’s a plan, then.”
Tumblr media
281 notes · View notes
fandomficsnstuff · 4 years ago
Text
Little Dragon - Part 8
Summary: You were a child slave of Meereen, when one day a silver haired woman sets you free. Though your master isn’t too keen on letting you go, and Daenerys took personal action to see you freed and taken care of.
Tumblr media
High Valyrian is in cursive
You were listening intently to the conversations going on in the war room, so many faces that you wanted to remember, their names, their houses, their history, but for now you settled on staying silent and listening, “are you really sure we can discuss this around her?” your head snapped towards the accented voice, seeing a beautiful woman with olive skin, black hair and dark brown eyes, and you wanted to look to your mother for help, but decided that you couldn’t use her as a pillar forever “(Y/N) Targaryen, Lady…?” you couldn’t help your tone, you were not a little girl wearing a collar around her neck anymore, jumping at the slightest of sounds. You were still timid and childish with Daenerys and Missandei, because you knew you could afford it, but you didn’t know these people, they were allies of your mother, but you didn’t know them.
“Ellaria” she sounded tense as she responded, she probably hadn't known you were the daughter of Daenerys, but you merely nodded “well, Lady Ellaria, I would prefer that if you are done questioning who your Queen trusts, perhaps we could get back to planning the war we are currently in” you heard a short laugh, your eyes glancing to none other than Olenna Tyrell, the Queen of Thorns, and the only living Tyrell left. “Are you sure you did not birthe her? She has the spirit of a dragon that one” Daenerys did everything to not smirk proudly at Olenna’s comment, and even Ellaria looked a bit surprised at your response “now… I agree that a foreign army would send the wrong signal, but an army from Westeros, it would show that we are not here to raid and pillage, the Dothraki will not do so unless their Khaleesi orders and my mother never will, the Unsullied are obedient and loyal, so they won’t either, but we need Westeros with us, and showing that their own houses are turning on Cercei is a good way to win quickly and without a lot of losses, on either side”, you studied the map as you spoke, unaware of the impressed looks everyone gave you, Tyrion being the first to speak up “well… I agree” you glanced at him and sent him a quick smile, one of the few smiles you had offered him, but you didn’t really know him either, so it was justified that you didn’t treat him, or Varys, as warmly as the rest of your mother’s allies.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
You stood impatiently besides Daenerys in the throne room, and Daenerys couldn’t help the amused glance she shared with Missandei “alright go, but change before you do!” you barely even heard the rest of her sentence, you were already off, heading towards your room. In record breaking time you changed from your formal dress to a special outfit you had made for you. You had been riding Rhaegal much more frequently, and today were the day of the arrival of Jon Snow, King in the North, and you had promised to stay for his arrival and then ride Rhaegal after, but you couldn’t help fidgeting, and were more than happy that Daenerys excused you. You put on your leather trousers, securing them with a harness that was connected to them, ensuring that they didn’t fall down, not even an inch, you had a tunic under your harness, pulling a shortened cloak over your shoulders and tying it to the harness, making sure the knots were tight, the cloak was warm but light, it reached just below your hips, but kept you warm. Next you threw on a pair of gloves made from cloth on the inside and leather on the outside, and then your boots, they were high, they almost reached your knees, and you pulled the laces tight, so they wouldn’t fall off during the flight.
Your room had an open balcony, just like Daenerys’, and you approached the edge, grinning widely as you waited. You couldn’t help the excited giggle you let out as you heard him roar as he came closer, and in a leap of faith you jumped off of the balcony, you let out a little huff as you landed on scales, and a few moments later you got a good grip, holding onto Rhaegal as you flew away from the castle, going high up and then soaring, admiring the landscape below, seeing a ship you presumed belonged to Jon Snow, you flew towards Drogon and Viseryon who were flying on the other side of the island. You could still just about watch Tyrion greet Jon Snow, and saw them making their way towards the entrance.
A wicked smile grazed your lips as you got an idea, and somehow Drogon, Viserion and Rhaegal knew what your plan was, Rhaegal let out an ear shattering roar as you held on tightly, flying towards Tyrion and the two men he were leading up the long stone staircase. You leaned forward as you flew closer to the ground, Rhaegal barely managing to not hit the small people below, something that made you laugh loudly and you couldn’t help but cheer, Tyrion seeing you on Rhaegal as you waved at him, and you could see him shake his head, but you also knew of the smile he tried to hide, he was probably telling Jon that he himself wasn’t used to the presence of the dragons.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
You heaved heavily as you ran into the throne room, your hair wild from the wind, your chest rising dramatically as you tried to catch your breath, standing besides Daenerys who did her very best to not smirk at you proudly, instead she tried to look as regal as ever, waiting patiently for this, Jon Snow, to arrive.
Rhaegal had barely managed to throw you off on the open balcony you jumped out of earlier, you almost bumped into a few tables on your way to the throne room, a fact that made you smile amused before trying to hide it. “Well, at least you made it back in time” her words could be mistaken as scolding, but you knew her better, and you couldn’t help the breathless giggle you let out “think I scared an inch or so off of Lord Tyrion” Daenerys let out a short, although quiet, laugh at your comment, shooting you a very poor attempt of a scolding gaze before looking back towards the large doors at the end of the throne room, making you straighten your back, your smile faltering and your hands placed in front of yourself, as you always did when you had attended any court meeting.
You watched the two strangers as Missandei went down the list of titles that your Queen had acquired along the way, something you took great pride in, she was your mother after all.
“And this is (Y/N) Targaryen, daughter of Queen Daenerys Stormborn, princess of the Seven Kingdoms and heir to the throne” Missandei finally ended, and the two men looked at you confused, giving you the impression that they didn’t know that much about your mother, and therefore you, they had probably only heard rumours, lies or other falsehoods, and therefore didn’t know of your existence, which was probably not a bad thing. You had heard of how the usurper King Robert Baratheon had sent assassins to kill Daenerys, even while she was pregnant, so who says they wouldn’t have been sent after you, back then nothing more than a little girl, had the usurper's children heard of your existence, and Daenerys’ love for you. You were snapped out of your day dream as Daenerys got up, approaching Jon Snow and his adviser, and first now you tuned in on their conversation, a small frown resting on your brows, hearing her words, but you couldn’t deny the pride it gave you, despite hearing all that she had suffered, “I was born at Dragonstone. Not that I can remember it. We fled before Robert's assassins could find us. Robert was your father's best friend, no? I wonder if your father knew his best friend sent assassins to murder a baby girl in her crib. Not that it matters now, of course. I spent my life in foreign lands. So many men have tried to kill me, I don't remember all their names. I have been sold like a broodmare. I've been chained and betrayed, raped and defiled. Do you know what kept me standing, through all those years in exile? Faith. Not in any god, not in myths and legends. In myself. In Daenerys Targaryen. The world hadn't seen a dragon in centuries, until my children were born. The Dothraki hadn't crossed the sea, any sea. They did for me. I was born to rule the Seven Kingdoms, and I will, and so will my daughter.” Her gaze turned to you for a brief moment and you smiled proudly, one she proudly returned before turning back to Jon Snow.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
You frowned as you watched your mother study the map in silence, you wanted to say something, you really did, but what could you say? The Iron Fleet was gone, Yara and Ellaria had been taken prisoner and Jon Snow refused to bend the knee and instead only wants to hack away at some mysterious stone somewhere in a cave on the island, claiming that an army of undead people and giants are the true enemy.
You couldn’t help the sigh that escaped your lips, you being the only one to actually make a sound in the entire map room “maybe…” you dared a glance at your mother, not that you feared her, but more that you knew of the thin ice you were balancing on “maybe you should just let him mine this… ‘dragonglass’... it means nothing to you after all” Daenerys looked to you slowly, and for a second everyone in the room were praying to whoever and whatever that you hadn’t crossed a line, but when you received no response, you continued, “you didn’t know it was there, no one did… there are two options here, either he’s right, in which it doesn’t hurt you or your army or your dragons to comply, or he’s mad, and it won’t hurt you, your army or your dragons either. There’s no outcome here where anything bad is an outcome, you complying will also show that yes, you are to be feared, but you are also complying and reasonable, and allowing one man, one person to mine something of no value is a sign that you are with the people of Westeros” there was another second of silence, but eventually Daenerys smiled at you, walked over to you and placed a gentle hand on your cheek, looking at you with a proud look in her eyes before walking off.
“Where is she going?” Tyrion looked at you baffled and confused, but you simply shrugged “to allow Jon Snow to mine the Dragonglass” you leaned over the map table, studying the different areas, looking at the different highlighted places, such as King’s Landing, Winterfell, all the places you’ve only ever read about, you couldn't wait to see them for real.
131 notes · View notes
randomshyperson · 4 years ago
Text
Wanda Maximoff/Reader - Land of Thieves - #ChapterSix
Tumblr media
Read on AO3 (EN)
Summary: When you were a child, you swore that no matter how high the reward in your head, she could always count on you. Life as an outlaw in the west is not easy, but you believe that train robberies are still easier than asking a pretty girl to dance. Land of Thieves, also know as your love story with Wanda Maximoff in the Wild West.
Chapter Resume: The one where you hunt a bear, and gather wood to make a fire.
Warnings:  18+, explicit language, explicit violence, slow burn, childhood friends to lovers, cursing, blood.
tags: @mionemymind
It didn't take long for you to realize that this was not a good hunting area. It had been a long time since you had separated from Pietro and Wanda, and it seemed as if you were walking in circles without really finding any animals.
You walked in the direction you thought you came from, feeling your boots sink against the wet grass. And then you saw on the ground, the footprints you will learn to recognize with Thor. You realized that the reason you hadn't found any animals yet was because of the recent bear tracks. One animal of this size, and you would have enough food for the days you would be here.
Taking the rifle that was slung over your shoulder to hold it with both hands, you moved toward the trail of footprints, as quietly as possible.
The majestic creature was only a few meters away, its brown fur glistening in the sunlight. You noticed that it was feeding on some fish that were probably from the same lake that surrounded the cabin.
Moving forward in slow steps, you raised your rifle toward the bear, hoping to get a good shot of it. 
And then you stepped wrongly, a stick breaking at your feet, attracting the animal's immediate attention. You hurried to shoot, but your gun locked up.
- Oh shit. - You grumbled, throwing the rifle to the ground, and rushing to run, the bear noticing you the same second you moved.
The animalistic sound of the bear's roar filling the entire room as it got up to chase you, you ran as fast as you could, and just when you thought you had put some distance between you, you spotted Pietro and Wanda, meeting you halfway down the path from opposite directions.
- I found a bear. - You shouted, as you threw yourself to the ground to get under a log. Wanda and Pietro were quick enough to pull you off the ground. You shivered at the sight of the approaching creature, but you drew your revolver, just as Wanda and Pietro aimed their rifles.
The creature fell to the ground with a thud as the shots hit it squarely in the head.
- Does that mean we tie? - asked Pietro after a moment, while the three of you were standing there staring at the dead animal. It took a second, then you all burst out laughing.
- Come on, folks, help me skin it. - You asked, stepping closer to the bear. 
You spent the next few minutes skinning the animal, and a lot of meat was taken. And then you frowned as you realized that you had no way to carry it.
- Do you have any idea how we are going to get all this stuff to the cabin? - you ask, looking at the twins. All of you are covered in blood.
- Shit, it's true. - Pietro says as he looks at the pieces of meat. - I wonder if it will slip off if we take it in our hands.
You nod in agreement, and he sighs. Then you say:
- Take off your shirt. 
Pietro looks at you with surprise, and then he smiles with amusement.
- Look, I'm flattered...
You roll your eyes, interrupting him: - To use for carrying idiot.
Pietro laughs, but raises his eyebrows.
- And why don't you take off your shirt? 
Without patience, you start to unbutton your own shirt, while grumbling:
- You don't have the slightest bit of chivalry.
Pietro laughed, holding your hands to stop you. 
- Okay okay, sorry. I wouldn't want you to feel uncomfortable in front of Stark either. - he says before pulling off his own shirt. 
You can carry some pieces of meat on it, and on the jacket that Wanda was wearing. You wish you had your jacket too, but it was soaked with Steve's blood somewhere in the cabin. 
Walking back, you share the weight of the makeshift "suitcase". When you finally reach the cabin, Steve is outside waiting for you, worried about the noise of the gunshots.
You show him the meat and take it to the small makeshift kitchen, dumping the supplies on the table. 
- Okay, I'll take care of our dinner, you get cleaned up right away. - He says, pushing the three of you out of the hut. 
- We provide your food and you kick us out of the house? - Pietro dramatizes being pushed out, Steve just laughs. 
You and Wanda come out in front, laughing while Pietro tries to avoid being pushed out.
- Come on, Pietro! You stink! - said Steve.
Pietro laughs before giving up, then walks off, throwing his arms around both your shoulders and Wanda's.
- You know, girls, I've been thinking. - He starts to say, keeping his arm around you as you walk towards the lake. - I would love to be best man at your wedding.
You laugh, feeling your cheeks flush. 
- If you promise to take a shower, we might consider it. - You retort, and try not to look so nervous at the almost worshipful look Wanda gives you. Pietro agreed, pretending to swear an oath. You laugh, telling him to shut up.
When you reached the lake, you exchanged a look with Wanda, and the two of you pushed Pietro into the water, laughing as he fell, struggling dramatically. 
- Damn, it's cold! - he exclaimed, and then started moving his arms, throwing water on you and Wanda. The redhead sidestepped your body, trying to escape the jets of water as you both laughed. She threw you into the lake the next second, and you felt the icy water soak your clothes.
Pietro jumps on you as soon as you fall, and you start playing fight, while throwing water at each other. Pietro lands a quick blow on you that knocks you to the ground, he strikes a dramatic pose as he says:
- Do you accept your defeat, foreigner?  
- My god you are such an idiot. - You say between laughs as you stand up. Pietro laughs and steps back a bit, only to take off his soaked boots and pants
Wanda sat on the edge of the lake while you played, and she had a tender look on her face when you approached. You looked away in embarrassment as you began to undress. Unbuttoning your shirt completely, you removed it, placing it on the edge of the lake to let it dry. You removed your boots, tossing them beside your shirt, and then you began to unbutton your pants. You felt like you were being watched, and looked up to find Wanda staring at you with a glint in her eyes that you didn't quite know what it was, her cheeks red. When she noticed you watching, she looked away, focusing on unbuttoning her own blouse. 
- Ouch, I think a fish just bit my ass! - shouted Pietro, jumping around the lake while looking down.
- God, Pietro. - said Wanda laughing. 
- No fish will want to bite you, you stinker! - You jokingly said, making the twins laugh, while Pietro gave you a gentle shove.
You spent a lot of time at the lake, running around and throwing water at each other. 
The sun was setting when Steve left the cabin.
- God you guys are still there? - he asked in a disapproving tone. - Get out before you catch cold.
It had been so hot all day that this probably wouldn't happen. You picked your clothes up off the floor, now completely dry, and put them on. And then you remembered your jacket, and went into the cabin looking for it.
- What is it, kid? - Steve asked as soon as you walked in. You noticed that he and Tony had taken all the sheets off the furniture, and now the cabin was extremely cozy. Tony was crouched over the fireplace, probably trying to see how to light it. 
- My jacket. - You say, looking around. - I wore it to...
- To stop the bleeding. - Steve interrupts. - I remember. - He says with amusement, walking towards the room where Bucky was sleeping. - I cleaned it up shortly after you went out hunting. - He says, and his voice is a little low because of the distance. He returns next, handing the jacket to you.
- Thank you, Steve. - You say and he smiles, ruffling your hair.
- Let's build a fire outside, okay? - He says. - Just like old times.
You nod your head in agreement, smiling. He asks you to fetch wood to light the fire, signaling that there should be a wood storage compartment under one end of the hut.
Leaving the hut, you smile when you see Wanda and Pietro playing with their hands, like those games you used to play as children. You tell them that you are going to look for some wood to make a fire, and Pietro starts looking for bigger logs for you guys to use as a seat. Tony then leaves the cabin and asks Wanda to get some wood for the cabin fireplace, and he joins Pietro in dragging a fallen log to the center of the yard.
You try not to think too much about being alone with Wanda again, walking beside her through the forest as you search for sticks, your hands rubbing together occasionally between stolen glances.
Returning to the cabin area, you look for the storeroom Steve mentioned, finding it on the outer side, almost at the back of the cabin. You let out a contented exclamation as you spot it.
- Steve says to keep some firewood here. - You say without turning to Wanda. You bend down to put away some branches, leaving the amount needed for the fire. - Let's split the weight. - You say to Wanda as she puts away the branches she has split and gets up with the others she is going to take to the fireplace. She smiles at you as you try to keep the amount the same, maybe even adding more branches for yourself. - There you go. - You smile and look at Wanda, only to find her looking at you with intensity. - Is everything mmm...
The question dies in your throat as Wanda moves forward, bringing her mouth to yours. You sigh, while closing your eyes. Wanda drops the sticks on the ground, grabbing you by the waist as she pushes you against the wood of the hut. You lift your hands to her face, the sticks long forgotten at your feet.
Wanda runs her tongue across your lower lip, asking for passage, and you open your mouth slightly to feel her tongue meet yours. When your tongues touch, you feel a sharp twinge under your stomach, and you let your fingers slide to the nape of Wanda's neck, running through the strands of her hair.
The kiss is intense, and leaves you with weak knees. Your brain goes blank, the feel of Wanda's tongue takes your breath away.
You feel Wanda push your body against the wood, the sensation draws a gasp from you as it chills your entire body. 
You think you hear laughter, everything around you seems muffled. But you force yourself to focus on something other than Wanda, and then you remember where you are. 
- Wanda. - You call her between kisses, completely breathless. - Wands. 
And then she presses you against the cabin once more, her knee coming up between your legs, and you see stars. You really thought that there was your doom there, and you would take her for yourself at that moment, but then another noise, which sounded like Pietro shouting with joy as he managed to carry the logs, caught Wanda's attention. 
She parted your mouths, probably startled by the noise, and you whimpered at the sudden loss of contact. Wanda quickly brings your mouths together again, a smile on her lips, and this time she kisses you with less intensity. A moment passes before you end the kiss completely, keeping your foreheads resting together as Wanda pulls the rest of her body away a bit so that she's no longer pressing you against the cabin, which makes you miss her body heat in the same second.
You were going to tell her that you need to take the firewood, but then Pietro's voice sounded in the distance.
- Stop making out in secret and get over here! I'm hungry! - he shouted. 
You and Wanda let out a half breathless laugh. Stepping back a little, you stared into her emerald eyes, swearing that she never looked so beautiful.
- Let's go before Pietro comes to get us. - Wanda says in a playful tone. You nod in agreement, as you bend down to gather the twigs.
Before you leave in the direction of the lake, you steal a lingering kiss from her, which makes her blush and flush. You just smile, and she hurries to get in your way, kissing you firmly before walking away. She takes one last look at you before turning toward the cottage, and you try to stop grinning like an idiot as you walk toward the garden.
As you finished setting up and lighting the campfire, the others sat around the fire, warming themselves from the cold night. Steve brought blankets, and mugs, while Tony loaded the raw meats for roasting.
You and Wanda share a blanket, sitting side by side on the makeshift bench, while Pietro sat next to his sister. You tried not to blush as you felt Wanda's hand entwine with yours under the blanket.
As the meats roasted, Steve began to hum softly. 
- Help yourselves. - He said after a moment, and you noticed him taking a piece for Bucky. He then got up and walked towards the cabin, signaling that he would be back in a few minutes.
- So, you're sort like his children? - Stark asked as you served yourselves. Pietro let out a little chuckle.
- I think Y/N is yes. - He teased and you rolled your eyes. Tony looked at you, looking really interested to know.
- He is not a biological father if that is what you are asking. - You said. - But he has been taking care of me since I was a child, so I guess we are like father and daughter.
Tony nodded slightly, a gleam in his eyes that you couldn't recognize. Maybe it was relief, but you couldn't tell why.
- What about you two? Are your parents with the rest of the gang? - Tony asked the twins. You guessed that he knew about the rest of the gang because Steve should have told him during the conversation this afternoon. Pietro and Wanda exchanged a look with each other, as if deciding whether to trust Tony. 
- No, our parents are dead. - Said Wanda after a moment, you felt her squeeze your hand lightly. - We joined the gang as children too. Stephen, you don't know him, took us off the streets.
- Oh, I see. - Said Tony - I'm sorry about that.
Wanda shrugged. - It was a long time ago.
You were silent for a moment, enjoying the dinner. The meat had a strong flavor, and was not usually what you eat, but it was tasty. Steve returned after a while, looking pleased.
- Bucky finally woke up. - He commented as he sat up, then helped himself. - He managed to eat a little.
- He'll be fine. - You assured him, and Steve smiled at you tenderly. 
When everyone was finished eating, you just sat quietly, enjoying the warmth of the fire. Tony was the first to get up, telling you that he was going to check if Bucky didn't have a fever, and Steve quickly followed him. 
Pietro quickly switched places, sitting on the log in front of you and Wanda, looking at you both with mischievous amusement.
- So girls, let's do something fun? - he suggested.
- There's not much to do in this place. - You commented, looking at him. Pietro blinked, thoughtful for a moment.
- We can always hunt another bear. - He joked, making you and Wanda laugh. After a moment, his expression changed to concern, causing you to frown.
- What's up, Pietro? - you asked, and he looked away from you into the fire.
- Do you think everyone is all right? - he asked, but didn't expect an answer. - With all those O'Driscolls and guards, how can we be sure that they got out without being seen? And even if they did, where do we go from here?
Wanda gave your hand a squeeze, before letting go and getting up to sit beside Pietro, hugging him by the shoulders.
- We'll be fine, Pietro. - She said in a tender tone. - Stephen will find a place for us.
You wanted to tell Pietro that everything would be all right, and that you would be home with everyone soon. But you were overcome by your own insecurities, worrying too much about everyone. You could only nod in agreement to Wanda, forcing a smile from your lips.
- We take care of each other right? - Pietro grumbled after a moment, his eyes filled with tears. Wanda smiled.
- Of course. Y/N and I will take care of you. - She teased, and Pietro let out a hoarse laugh, wiping the tears from his eyes.
You fell silent for a moment, until Pietro said that you should sleep, and you actually agreed, finally acknowledging how tired you were from the robbery. You put out the fire while the twins got up, and then you walked together to the cabin.
Steve was tidying up the rooms when you came in, carrying blankets to the wooden beds. You were pleased to hear that there were mattresses in the cabin.
- So, how are you going to share the beds? - He asked, and you were about to say that you would sleep on the floor if you had to, but Peter was quicker to make an ironic comment.
- Well, wives should sleep in the same bed. - He joked and Wanda slapped him on the head, and he just laughed along with Steve.
- We can all sleep together, Steve. - Wanda then said.
- Actually, Pietro might be right. - Steve said with humor in his voice, and looking at the confused and surprised expressions of the three of you, he clarified. - We have a queen-size bed in the empty room. And then two bunk beds in the room where Bucky is. Maybe it would be better if the girls slept together.
You felt your face get very hot, and maybe Wanda had the same expression, because Steve took on a mixed look of seriousness and humor when he said:
- Behave yourselves, girls. - He teased, and you heard Pietro laugh. He remarked something like "early honeymoon" but you ignored it. Steve dragged Pietro into the bedroom next, and the boy wished you both a good night.
You followed Wanda into your bedroom in silence, feeling out of place. You tried not to think too much in the double bed. You took a deep breath, trying to calm your anxious brain. It was only Wanda, you had slept together hundreds of times before. You closed the door as you entered, while Wanda sat up in bed.
You gave her a shy smile as you took off your boots and jacket. She did the same. 
You lay in silence, your eyes staring up at the ceiling. You sighed, turning your body to face her as you waited for her to do the same. Wanda turned around, and you smiled at her, who was looking at you with flushed cheeks.
- Hi - you whispered.
- Hi. - She said in the same tone.
You rested your head against your arm, and raised your other hand to Wanda's hair, playing with the strands in your fingers.
- Why is that strange? - she asked, looking away from you. You smiled slightly. - We've slept together before.
- Because now I want to kiss you. - You answered, tucking her hair behind her ear. Wanda blinked, surprised at your honesty. She bit her lower lip, and you let your fingers run across her face and around her cheeks. Wanda grimaced slightly when you touched her on the top of her nose, and you smiled tenderly, feeling your heart inflate with love for her.
- I want to kiss you too. - She confessed after a moment, looking into your eyes. You remembered the three men in the next room, and let out a sigh.
- We don't have to do anything just because we're in a bed together. - You said, and then let the palm of your hand rest against Wanda's cheek, who leaned into your touch. - We have all the time in the world.
Wanda nodded, closing her eyes. You moved closer, placing a kiss on her forehead. She had a smile on her lips when you pulled away. 
- Goodnight, Wanda. - you whispered.
- Good night. - She answered in the same tone, practically asleep. You watched her for a few more moments before closing your eyes.
It had been three days since you had been in the cabin. Your routine consisted of waking up completely entwined in Wanda's body, smiling like an idiot, and then having coffee with Pietro. Then bathing in the lake, and spending time in their company. Sometimes you chopped wood, or tried to fish, but most of the time you just joined Pietro and Wanda in song, or you played the deck of cards he had found in one of the cabinets. The best moments were the stolen kisses that Wanda would take from you, leaving you breathless and clumsy as she walked away as if nothing had happened.
The problem was that Steve's nervousness about the delay in hearing from the camp was palpable, and it made everyone quite uncomfortable. Bucky was finally awake, and this cheered Steve up a bit, but he still had a distracted look whenever you looked at him.
And then, you finally got a letter. Peggy sent a coded message, and after a few minutes of reading and rereading the paper, Bucky finally deciphered it. They had set up camp in the Rhodes region, and everyone was safe. You let out a sigh of relief when you heard these words.
Steve signaled for you guys to have some coffee, and then said that you needed to arrange some horses.
- We are going to walk to the Esmerald Ranch. - He said while putting on his boots - And then me, Pietro and Y/N will steal the horses.
Everyone nodded in agreement, Tony looked slightly uncomfortable, but you guessed he was going to take the train as soon as he arrived at the ranch.
Then you covered the cabin furniture again, and checked that you didn't leave anything important behind. 
The way to the ranch was slightly long, and halfway there Pietro started carrying his sister on his back, while everyone sang a song excitedly. You kept the pace slow so as not to tire Bucky too much.
When you finally spotted the ranch, you stopped walking, finding a place for the others to hide while you, Steve and Pietro stole the horses.
- So you see the stables? - Steve asked, pointing to the place. You and Pietro nodded. - There are only pawns inside. Don't hurt anyone, and go around the bars so as not to be seen. Now, masks please.
You and Pietro quickly put on their masks. Steve turned to Tony.
- The station is on the other side. - He said signaling. Tony shifted the weight of his feet, before shaking everyone's hand, saying goodbye. He waved last before walking the distance.
- What are the chances of him going straight to the police? - Pietro asked looking at the distance image of Tony.
- Don't worry about it. - Said Steve, he looked at Bucky fondly before pushing you and Pietro lightly by the shoulders, so that you were heading for the stables.
Stealing horses wasn't hard, you had done it many times before. So you just picked the one that looked healthiest, and you were glad he didn't knock you down. You and Pietro followed Steve out. He had to confront one of the ranchers, pointing his gun at the man, who backed away at the same second, before you left
Riding quickly to the corner where Wanda and Bucky were, you watched as Wanda helped Bucky onto Steve's horse. And then she climbed on with you, ignoring Pietro's teasing. The feeling of having her hugging your waist was good.
You didn't start riding more slowly until you were a good distance away from the Esmerald Ranch. 
- Do you know where the camp is exactly? - Pietro asked Steve, while riding beside him.
- We will find it, relax. - replied Steve. - I have some idea of good places in this region, hidden enough.
You were trying not to smile so hard as you felt Wanda hugging you, and then your face flushed when you noticed Pietro's suggestive expression.
It took a few hours, but you finally reached the spot where Steve believed the camp was set up. He entered the forest ahead of you, followed by you.
- Hey, look who decided to show up! - shouted a voice, and you heard Steve laugh. You didn't recognize Thor until he walked towards you, no longer hidden by branches.
The reunion was quite exciting. Thor helped Bucky dismount, leading him to a cabin, while the other members ran up to you. Nat almost knocked you to the ground when she jumped up to hug you, making you laugh. You felt your chest lighten when you noticed that everyone was safe.
- Come, come, you must see the place. - Signaled Potts cheerfully. Nat held your arm as you walked together, and you looked back a moment, exchanging a smile with Wanda, who was walking along with Monica and Pietro.
The new camp was in an open area, which contained two tall trees. It was on the edge of a large lake, and you were happy to know that you could fish without leaving the camp. Potts signaled the location of everyone's tent, and then the group split up. Nat escorted you to your tent, which had been stowed. You made a mental note to thank Potts for this later.
Nat threw herself on your bed as soon as you came in, and you laughed as you took off your jacket. That region was very hot.
- So, dear, what's your news? - she asked, and you sat down in the chair at your makeshift little table, taking off your boots.
- Well, I hunted a bear with a revolver. - You joke, and Nat looks at you with confusion. You shrug. - Wanda and Pietro saved my ass actually. And then we had bear meat for days.
- Hmm, speaking of Wanda. - Nat started, sitting up in bed, and you just laughed, looking away. - I just mentioned her name and you were all smiles and giggles.
- Shut up. - You retorted, finishing taking off your boots. You got into a more comfortable position in the chair. Nat laughed at your embarrassment.
- Go on, tell me. - She asked. - I saw you exchanging passionate glances. 
You sighed, laughing slightly. Scratching your head absently, you looked away before speaking again.
- Wanda kissed me. A few times.
- WHAT? - Nat shouted wide-eyed. You felt your cheeks heat up even more when you noticed some gang members looking at your tent with curiosity.
- God, can you keep your voice down? - You asked as you stood up and closed the tent, without first nodding awkwardly at the ones who looked at you.
- My God, what do you mean? - she asked excitedly, pulling you to sit beside her. - And it wasn't just one kiss, it was several? How long have you been hiding this?
You laughed, cradling your face in both hands, clumsily. Nat giggled, nudging you and making you look at her.
- The night before the robbery. - You told her. - I apologized for ignoring her and she kissed me outside the tent.
- And I missed this? - She shouted, and you signaled her to keep it down with a laugh. - That explains your little smile that morning. - You shrugged, smiling shyly. Nat assumed a mischievous expression. - But did you say several kisses? Girl, you're standing there grabbing Wanda in the middle of a robbery?
You laughed, pushing Nat lightly.
- Of course not, Nat, my goodness. - You denied it. - After we escaped, Steve found us a place to stay.
- If you say a brothel, I'll punch you in the face.
You laughed, and Nat smiled lightly. And then she waved her hands signaling for you to keep telling her.
- It was a cabin, somewhere near the Esmerald Ranch. - You explained. - Wanda kissed me again there.
You felt your cheeks heat up as you remembered how she had kissed you, and looked away quickly. Nat frowned, and then laughed, putting her hand over her mouth.
- My God, you want to sleep with her! - she exclaimed, and you widened your eyes. - Look at your face! 
- There's no face at all. - you mumbled clumsily.
- Oh yes, you do. The face of someone who won't even wait for the wedding. My God, does Pietro know you're trying to deflower his sister?
- Oh my God, Nat. - You said closing your eyes, Nat just laughed at your shame.
- And here I thought you were an innocent girl. - She teases. - But tell me, are you two officially dating then?
You frown, looking at Nat, realizing that you didn't know the answer. You certainly wanted to, but you and Wanda hadn't talked about it.
- I will take your silence and your stupid face as "we haven't talked about it yet because our mouths were busy. - Nat joked with irony and you let out an embarrassed exclamation of shame, laughing ruefully. - My God, you two are a disaster.
- We just haven't had time to talk yet. - you said after a moment. - I think I'll invite you into town. We can do something fun.
- Look at you, planning dates and all. - Nat teased, and you rolled your eyes humorously. 
- Can you tell me what happened here now? - you say, and Nat just shrugs.
- The usual I guess. We set up the camp and got busy with the daily chores. - She said and you nodded. But then Nat exclaimed as if she remembered something. - Sorry, you haven't seen them yet. Bruce and Carol have improved! I think Carol went to Rhodes, by the way.
- What? - You exclaimed excitedly. - This is amazing. 
- Yes, and now that everyone is available for work, you'll have plenty of free time to date.
You laughed, telling her to shut up. Nat just smiled, looking away.
- Have you talked to Bruce yet? - you ask after a moment. Nat bites her lip, slightly embarrassed.
- We don't have much to talk about. - She says. - He still thinks we shouldn't happen.
You sigh, and hold Nat's hand, who gives you a sad smile.
- Banner is an idiot to let someone like you escape. - You say. - Maybe things will work out for you two over time. If not, I'll go over there and kick his ass myself.
Nat laughed, nodding. You fell into a comfortable silence, until Nat remembered that she had chores to keep up with, and hugged you before leaving the cabin, telling you to talk to Wanda soon. You nod, feeling your heart race with anticipation, and Nat leaves.
A new camp always generates a lot of new tasks, so you force yourself out of bed to help the rest of the gang. As soon as you leave your tent, Potts signals for you to go talk to her. She had some papers spread out on one of the camp's wooden tables, and seemed to be trying to organize everything you guys had.
- Everything okay there, Pepper? - you comment as soon as you reach her, who looks nervous. - By the way, thank you for organizing my tent. 
- No worries, really. And yes, everything is fine. I'm just trying to keep this place running. - she says. And then she fiddles with the papers, reading for a few seconds, before handing one of them to you. - I need these items. 
- Right. - You say as you pick up the list. And then you frown at the number of items.
- We don't have any money. - She tells you. You sigh, tucking the list in your jacket pocket. - Maybe you can rob a grocery store.
- No, it' s okay. I can do some robbing in some other town, and then buy the items. - You say, knowing that robbing stores was much more work than robbing travelers.
- Okay, thanks Y/N. - She says, but you don't leave yet, remembering something.
- Pepper, any chance that you have found Knight? - you ask. - He knocked me down during the shootout at Heartlands.
Potts assumes a mixed expression of confusion and sorrow.
- Damn it, Y/N, I'm sorry, I thought you saw him. - She says and you look at her with confusion. - Unfortunately, he did not survive.
- Oh. Oh, shit. Damn, that's really too bad. - You grumble, feeling immediately upset. You think crying over a horse would be childish, so you just nod, telling Potts that it's okay, and that you'll get the supplies. You walk toward the makeshift camp stables, where the horse you stole could serve as a mount. As you are fixing the saddle, you feel your face wet. And then you realize that you were crying. Wiping your face quickly with your forearm, you mount the horse in front of you. Trying to ignore the feeling that this really wasn't your horse.
124 notes · View notes
spencesglasses · 4 years ago
Text
sweet creature (spencer reid x f! reader) pt 3
a/n: no spence in this part, sorry to disappoint you simps. but uhh, y/n and jj rights! but as besties <3
tw! there are mentions of sexual assault and a minor character death! please be aware before reading!!
part one | part four
Tumblr media
“St. Augustine, Florida,” Penelope starts, showcasing the most recent case. “Two bodies were found early this evening in a remote wooded area just west of the city. Neither have been identified yet.”
“This woman’s complexion…” Tara said, looking at the pictures of a woman with various injuries on her face.
Y/N looked at the board beside Penelope. “… she was exsanguinated.” she hissed.
“Correct, my dearest, which is a really fun word to say, but I didn’t know its terrible meaning until I started working here.”
“Odd that the only female had her blood removed,” Rossi said across the round table.
“Well, the male victim might have been collateral damage or a witness that needed to be silenced.” JJ added.
“I mean, it is the kind of message that would be sent to each other. The Curiel Syndicate recently set up shop in Florida,”
“Except it looks like these two were meant without anyone the wiser. How is that a message?” Asked Rossi.
“Well, cartels have also been known to use murder as a form of voodoo.” Derek pointed out. “In 1989, a University of Texas student was murdered by a satanic gang while on spring break.”
Y/N leaned further into the table, reviewing the photos they were given. “My guess is that this has nothing to do with drugs. Maybe someone with a blood fetish-”
“Vampirism?” JJ asked.
Y/N hums in response, glancing at her for a brief moment.
“It’s late and we need to hit the ground running. Wheels up in 30.” Hotch said as he closed the file he held, gathering any necessary belongings for the case.
Without another word, the team mirrored his actions and followed him out. This was one of the first few cases she has worked on with the team without Spencer. She didn’t mind it, of course. The team welcomed her with open arms and treated her as if she had always been there, which she appreciated. She had gotten used to everything that came with the job, and grew closer to the team, but she wouldn’t be lying if she said that some things she sees still make her skin crawl.
-
Y/N looked out the window of the jet, admiring the contrast of the dark, star filled sky beneath the white clouds. She was seated with JJ, Hotch, and Morgan at the small table, the rest of the team claiming their spot to the seats to their right.
“The coroner attributed the lacerations on the bodies to animal bites.” Morgan said. “Apparently there are a lot of raccoons in that area.”
Y/N felt JJ nudge her slightly and brought her attention back to the file on her lap, flipping through the photos. “The media’s going on about satanic mutilation.”  
“It’s happened before. The West Memphis three case showed how animal activity on a corpse can be mistaken for a ritualized torture.” Hotch noted.
“After the first bite, the insect infestation expands and distorts the open wounds,” Said Rossi.
Y/N heard Garcia groan over the laptop speaker, seeing her face scrunch up in disgust on the screen. “Ok, here’s my finger, here’s the mute button. Are you guys done talking about the critter damage?”
JJ and Y/N shared a look, and she smiled. “You can put your finger down, Pen, we’re done,”
“Thank you, and Y/N’s right; local news and radio outlets are going wild with this being a blood-worshipping cult murder.” she continues typing. “Hey, new information. Both of those bodies have just been identified, Cheyenne Pravato, 23 and George Henning, 71.”
The team leaned forward to inspect the photos of the recent victims popping up on the screen.
“Any connection?” asked Hotch.
“My level-one search says no, my level 2 through 20 await. Cheyenne was a waitress that is currently unemployed. Henning was a retired steelworker from Pennsylvania, lived in Florida a few years. They both went missing 3 days ago.”
“3 days?” Tara questioned. “Coroner estimated the time of death as less than 24 hours from the time of discovery?”
“Preliminary indicators show no sign of torture or sexual assault,” JJ said.  
Y/N’s eyebrows knit together in thought, trying to piece together the information. “What was he doing with them?”
The team brought their attention to Hotch, and he said, “Dave, you find out what you can about Cheyenne from friends and family. Morgan, you do the same thing for Henning. JJ, I need you to rein in the media. And, Lewis, Y/L, you two go to the M.E.. Hysteria’s growing and we need to contain it.”
-
“Still waiting on the full tox screen for the male victim,” said the medical examiner.
“We think they may have been held for up to two days.” Tara said. “Were they fed?”
“Stomach contents were empty, but nutrition and hydration levels were normal. My guess is they were both fed through an I.V.” he said, lifting the fabric that covered the body. “I did find one curiosity,”
He uncovered the victim's calf, showing a mark on the skin with red rings around it. Y/N furrowed her brows, her eyes scanning the injured spot. “It looks like an animal bite?”
“Not under magnification. It’s actually a surgically precise triangle,”
She saw Tara’s face harden in the corner of her eye; she turned to her and they shared a questioning look. They heard the telephone ring from across the room, and the medical examiner was quick to answer it. Tara lifted the fabric once more, bending down to look closer at the injury.
“You’re positive of that?” Y/N heard him ask over the phone. The medical examiner hung up the phone, turning on his heel to face the two women. “The tox screen and DNA tests on George Henning just came back. You ready for this? Most of the blood in his body isn’t his…”
Y/N tilted her head. “Then whose…”
“It’s Cheyenne’s…”
Her whole body tensed at his words, and Tara’s jaw dropped in shock.
-
Y/N tapped her pencil against the table as she read over the tox screening. “The blood drained from Cheyenne was put into George Henning?” Morgan questioned, gesturing to the document in her hand.
She slid the paper across the table for him to read. “It is strange, a triangle was cut into his calf muscle too,”
“And there’s still something in the toxicology screen that the M.E. can’t identify.” Hotch said.
“Yeah, we’re hoping to find something more in the next few hours,”
Morgan slid back the report to her. She heard footsteps coming closer to the room they occupied and turned to see JJ walking in.  She greeted her with a small wave and smile, to which she returned. JJ leaned against Y/N’s chair, resting her hand on the back of it. “So, it took a little arm-wrestling,” she starts. “But the media finally saw the wisdom in toning down the whole demon worship angle,”
“Don’t take a victory lap just yet,” Rossi said, Y/N handing her the tox report.
“You’re kidding,” JJ huffed.
Tara picked up the photos from the M.E., flipping them over for JJ to see. “Y/L and I are just trying to work out this whole calf muscle business,”
“Triangles are big in illuminati symbolism.” Rossi recounted.
Morgan let out a sharp exhale. “This is just bending back toward cult behavior.”
“What did you find out about George Henning?” Hotch asked him.
“According to the neighbors, the guy was a shut-in. No friends, a lot of health problems — hypertension, parkinson’s,”
“Cheyenne was the opposite,” Rossi interjected. “Vegan, into new age lifestyles. Never met a harmonic convergence she didn't want to converge on.”
“Well, I mean, I get it with him; he was a recluse, but how did nobody notice her missing for 3 days?”
“Her friends said that Cheyenne was flighty. It was not unusual for her to take off without notice for a week or two.”
“Transfusions and sustained I.V. feeding takes skill, planning and access to materials, and as crude as it was, the replacing of old blood with new is dialysis.” Hotch said.  “ What if the triangle isn’t a symbol, but a tissue sample? Could this be medical experimentation?”
“Yeah, I mean, you’ve got a youthful, healthy host in Cheyenne and a sick test subject in Henning,”
“If the new missing girl’s his next victim, the unsub could be getting ready to try again,” JJ said, clutching the back of Y/N’s chair.
Y/N gave her a look of confusion. “New missing girl?”
“A missing persons report came in earlier today, Andrea Gambrell,” JJ explained. “Her car was found abandoned at a cemetery near Jacksonville. Cheyenne and Andrea waitressed at the same restaurant.”
“If Andrea mirrors Cheyenne, then who mirrors George?” Y/N asked.
“I guess that’s what we have to figure out.”
-
Y/N stood with JJ and Hotch looking over photos they’ve gathered throughout the case, trying to come up with a conclusion. She tapped her foot anxiously against the tile beneath her feet, her brows furrowing as she looked closely at the photos. The sound of Hotch’s phone ringing startled her, making her jump. She let out a deep breath and tucked a strand of hair behind her ear. JJ took notice of a very flustered looking Y/N and placed a hand on her shoulder gently. “You okay there?”
She gave her a half-hearted smile, moving past her to stand next to Hotch. “‘m fine.”
“What do you have, Garcia?” he asked.
He asked her to search for doctors or any medical professionals in the area, anyone that could pop up as a red flag, and of course, Garcia was quick to find just what they needed. “Nothing on my crimson flag doctor search, but I did learn about something with a super cool name,” she said through the speaker. “The mad scientist club,”
JJ took a step, now standing beside Y/N. “And what is that?’ she asked.
“They’re a student group from the Florida College of Medicine in Jacksonville. Before the disbanded, they used to get together and talk about experimental ways to cure disease.”
“Do you have any names of the people in the club?” Y/N questioned.
“Uh, kinda, sorta, not really. They were totally informal. Here’s the part that made me sit up straight. They used to meet at a local cemetery,”
JJ scoffed. “Let me guess, the same cemetery where Andrea Gambrell disappeared.”
“Yeah! The very one!”
“Alright,” Hotch started. “Keep working on the names and see if you can find out what the club disbanded.”
“Okay,” Garcia said before hanging up.
Before the three of them could say another word, Y/N's own phone started ringing. She reached into her back pocket and held the phone up to her ear. “Agent Y/L,”
“Yes, agent, I’ve got the full tox screen of George Henning,” he said, Y/N bringing her phone from her ear so she could put it on speaker. “There were massive levels of massive levodopa in his system.”
“The parkinson's drug?”
“Correct,”
Y/N bit the inside of her cheek. “But the blood was replaced with Cheyenne’s. Does that mean the levodopa was introduced into his system after the transfusion?”
“Yes, ma’am. We got the results of the other DNA samples and the surprises keep coming. Found traces of mesoglea and testudinata keratin,”
“That is…” she urges him to continue.
“Jellyfish and turtle. George Henning had animal DNA in his system.” He said.
Y/N scrunched her nose, looking up to see JJ with her mouth slightly agape and Hotch with a deep frown. Y/N quickly says ‘thank you’ before hanging up. But before she could turn her phone off, a quiet ding! went off notifying her about a new message.
“Guys,” she alerted. “Another body was found.”
“You two check that out, see what you can find. I’ll brief the team on the tox screening.”
-
Y/N and JJ walked in silence, their shoulders bumping as they made their way to the site where the latest victim was found.  “Okay so, a homeless man found him,” Y/N breaks the silence, lifting the police tape for her and JJ to go under. The officer close by handed them both gloves to search the area and a bag of belongings found on the victim. “We I.D.’d him as Harold McDermott, longtime local resident.”
“He didn’t even bother hiding the body this time.” JJ said. “The unsub might be unraveling,”
“He must’ve been the new George Henning.” Y/N muttered, crouching down and her eyes scanning the injuries the man ensued. “I don’t even want to think about what might be swimming around in his bloodstream.”
JJ crouched down to her level. “No obvious tissue removal, bruising on his face and chest.” she looked at Y/N, then to the bag in her hand. “What’s in there?”
Y/N eyebrows rose, following JJ’s gaze to the items in the clear bag. She stood up, opened the bag and it was a wallet. With a medical card. Ah, of course we’d find something like this in here, she thought. “It’s a medical I.D. card” she said, pulling it out for JJ to see. “Our victim suffered from epilepsy and cortico-basal degeneration…”
They tore their eyes away from the card, glancing up to each other. “We better deliver the profile.”
-
It’s been a few hours since they’ve delivered the profile to local authorities, and since then, they’ve gotten more information to help them solve the case. The M.E. had found more animal DNA in George Hennings body: sea urchin and some other type of tropical parrot neither of them could identify.
Penelope was able to locate one of the former members of the Mad Scientist Club, Diane Haller, and she was able to go in to talk to Tara; finding out that there was a man that could be a potential lead. Robert, or Richard, Diane couldn’t remember his name, but the club called him the magic man. He only went to the gathering a few times, according to Diane, and while he was there he would go on about how they were in a ‘magical place’. He attended the Florida College of Medicine in Jacksonville while the club was still active, his interest being in neuroscience.
A local doctor went missing, Laura Braga. She was a neurologist, which they believed was a connection to the unsub. Dr. Braga was heading back to her office to get files she’d forgotten when she discovered that the unsub broke into her office trying to get extra levodopa.  
“Garcia compiled a list of every medical student in the North Florida area with the first name of Richard or Robert, and I got to tell you guys, it’s a long list.” Tara said as she stood to the side of a board filled with photo evidence and a map of the area.
“So which one is our magic man?” JJ asked.
Y/N sat in the chair next to her, facing the board. She spun her chair around to face the other way and noticed a peculiar look on Rossi’s face. “What is it, Rossi?”
“They identified the bird DNA in Henning as coming from a scarlet macaw,”
“Mmhm. And?”
“That got me thinking about Turritopsis Dohrni,”
“Turri… what?’ Tara questioned him.
“It’s called the immortal jellyfish,” he explains. “Endlessly recycles its own cells through a process called transdifferentiation, a kind of lineage reprogramming.”
“Oh, my goodness. Dr. Spencer Reid, master of disguise.” JJ joked.
Y/N quirked an eyebrow, the corners of her mouth rising slightly. “If I didn’t know any better, I would’ve assumed that you were the resident genius, Rossi,”
He let out a soft chuckle. “No disguise. I called the kid last night.”
“Ahh,” Y/N and JJ said in unison.
“But think about it, jellyfish, turtle, sea urchin, and now a scarlet macaw. What do they all have in common?”
“A long lifespan.” Tara answered.
“Exactly, longer than a human’s.”
“So that means the unsub may not be focused on a specific disease but longevity,” Said JJ.
“Oh, God. Guys,” Tara gasped. “I think I know why the magic man thought this place was so magical,” She uses the file in her hand to point at the map. “We are right around the corner from the legendary Fountain of Youth.”
-
A local zoo reported a macaw stolen, the owner suspecting it to be a former employee, Robert Boles, who they’d believed to be the unsub. He went to medical school and flunked out in the middle of his first year. They found key information linking him to the case when Penelope found that he currently worked at the same hospital as Dr. Braga. The team rushed to the location where Boles did his experiments on his victims.
“All right, so, in high school Robert Boles got a summer job at a gift shop near the Fountain of Youth archaeological park.” JJ explained. “He got fired for breaking in after hours.”
Y/N and JJ sat in the back seat of the car, leaving Morgan and Hotch in the front. “That’s probably where his obsession with eternal youth started.”
-
They trudged through the hallways of the abandoned building with their guns pointed forward, ready to shoot if needed. “And I won’t let you get in the way!” they heard a man shout from one of the rooms.
The team followed the sound of the voice and turns the corner to see two men standing over a young woman. The younger man they’d identified as Robert Boles, and the young woman being Andrea Gambrell, Y/N assumed.
“Robert Boles, drop the weapon.” Hotch said sternly.
He whipped his head around to them.
“It’s over, man. You’re not getting out.” Morgan steps closer to him.
“Put the knife down, slowly.” JJ said.
Y/N watches as Boles lifts his arms in surrender, opening his hand to drop the knife. Morgan hurried to cuff him, while JJ rushed to untie Andrea strapped to the hospital bed.
“My wife needs help!” The other man, Ben Kebler, tells Hotch urgently.
“Where is she?”
“In the next room!” Mr. Kebler rushed out.
“Show me.” Hotch said, following him, and Y/N followed along. “Call an ambulance,” he tells her.
-
“Medics are on their way,” Y/N said softly, entering the room Hotch and JJ were in and she stood between them.
She looked down to see Eileen Kebler in the hospital bed, her husband leaning over her her. And her heart breaks. Eileen was dying.
“How is she?” Ben Kebler asked, eyes brimming with tears.
The three of them stayed silent, Y/N unable to comprehend what's happening, let alone come up with words to say in that moment. Hotch peers down at him, and Ben knows. He frantically shakes his head, hand shaking as he grabs his wife's hand. “What have I done?!”
“I’m cold,” Eileen mutters.
His face scrunched up. “Eileen, stay with me!” he pleads.
“I am always with you…” she whispers. “Always…”
And she was gone. Sobs echoed throughout the empty building, and Y/N could feel her heart bursting out of her chest. Her eyes watered with tears, then suddenly she felt a hand interlock with hers. It was JJ’s. She squeezes her hand gently, JJ rubbing soothing circles along her knuckles. She let out a soft exhale and used her free hand to wipe away any tears, trying to regain her composure. This part of the job was something she could never get used to. Something the rest of the team couldn’t get used to, no matter how long they’ve worked there.
-
It was safe to say that Y/N was not a night owl. The team were on their way home and she laid on the couch in the jet with a small pillow and blanket that could barely cover her. She smiled to herself as the memory of her finding Spencer snuggled with a far too small blanket the morning after their first movie night. She still cringes at the fact that she accidentally fell asleep barely into the first few movies, but smiles when she remembers what she woke up to. Y/N thought it was sweet that he stayed there with her, and finding Spencer curled up in a messy bundle of blankets made her heart grow twice its size. She took a mental note to call Spencer when they land, and she finally lets her eyes flutter shut, finally being able to rest.
-
tag list: @eevee0722 @ceeellewrites
101 notes · View notes
chaoticevilbean · 4 years ago
Text
Firebender!Sokka AU
Just a Scene Part 1/?
Pakku and Katara separated from their hug, smiles still firmly in place. Katara opened her mouth to continue their conversation, but snapped it shut as a realization hit her.
“Where’s Sokka,” she asked, her head swiveling to look for the other. Pakku’s brow furrowed as the waterbending master came to the same thought. The boy hadn’t come over, despite his sister’s exclamation at the sight of her old teacher and now grandfather.
“He’s over there, Sugar Queen,” Toph pointed from where she stood by Zuko and Suki. All three seemed at least slightly confused and waiting for some sort of explanation. Katara glanced over at where Toph pointed, seeing her brother speaking with the masters, and strode over to the rest of the team. It would be better to clarify the situation now instead of waiting.
Master Pakku did not walk over to another person. He did not call after his student and granddaughter. He did not move in any way besides turning to face the other adults. His mind was reeling at the sight before him.
Sokka was speaking to Piandao with more respect than the waterbender had ever seen the boy use. He spoke in a similar manner to Jeong Jeong, but he was also looser with the former admiral, occasionally nudging the man on the shoulder in a playful way. Bumi did not receive any formality or the respect he might elicit as a king. Instead, the royal threw his arm around Sokka, and even from his distanced position, Pakku could hear the terrible jokes his colleague was interjecting with. All four of the people were acting friendly with each other, and Sokka fit in with them like the winning move in a game of Pai Sho.
Pakku had heard about the other masters’ experiences with the Avatar and his friends. He had shared his own at the same meeting. He would’ve joined the group if it had just been the strange behaviors. He was not in any way prepared for when Jeong Jeong threw a fireball at Sokka’s head and the teen caught it, laughing like it was an inside joke.
His grandson… his Water Tribe grandson… was a firebender. A strong one if he could catch such a close attack with the ease he did. And had he not been informed from the others about the firebender of non-Fire Nation heritage? The very same men now conversing as though there had been no fire, no strangeness to the situation. His grandson, the very same he had passed off as an annoyance; who he’d assumed was as idiotic as his actions; who was cocky and was cut from the very mission he’d joined despite having a team to protect; that very same boy was one of the most powerful, if not the most, powerful firebender in the world.
And the boy hadn’t even greeted Pakku in passing. He’d simply joined the other elders and struck up easy conversation. It hit home in him more than learning that he’d attacked his granddaughter. More than finding out that Kanna had left him and married another. It somehow even hit harder than realizing he had driven his love further away by not fighting for what she’d believed in so passionately. Sokka had no reason to greet the waterbender. When had Pakku been anything but brusque with him? Shown any interest in the boy or his life? He’d ignored him for Katara and her strong bending.
It seemed Pakku was destined to keep driving his family away.
~_~_~_~_~_~
Sokka wasn’t paying attention to his sister’s reunion with her teacher. He knew she’d missed the grouchy old man despite the fact that he was, well, grouchy. Sokka could now understand it better himself, having missed Jeong Jeong after their group had had to flee. So he gave the two space and instead moved over to greet his friends and masters.
“Master Piandao,” he greeted, bowing to his mentors, “Master Jeong Jeong… Bumi.” For the last man, he changed the bow to that of the Earth Kingdom, beaming at the King as he did so. It really was just for show when it came to the royal.
The bows were instantly returned, despite the superior positions of the elders not demanding it. Jeong Jeong rose swiftly from his, making intense eye contact as he did. Sokka remained calm, remembering the first time he’d been subject to the almost-glare.
“Is there something you need, Master Jeong Jeong?” he tried. It was apparently the wrong move as the deserter’s gaze hardened sharply.
“You’re injured.”
“No…”
“Then why did you call me by name?” Sokka frowned before the question clicked.
“You seriously think I’m injured just because I didn’t call you J2?”
“J2,” Piandao repeated, a grin forming quickly at the nickname.
“We can discuss my questionable naming skills later,” the younger firebender intervened before the conversation could wander. “Now is the time to discuss what is going on and what is going to happen before we try to avoid dying tomorrow.”
“When did you develop aangxiety?” Bumi asked as he threw his arm across the teen’s shoulders. A few chuckles escaped before he could stop them, not that he was trying that hard.
“I’ve always had anxiety. Then I got a little airhead and suddenly I can’t go a day with aangst.”
“Agni, there’s two of them,” Piandao muttered, running a hand down his face. Jeong Jeong let out a huff of amusement at the duo, who were giggling at the puns. “What is it you wished to talk about, Sokka?” the master swordsman continued, now making his own attempt at changing the subject. The Water Tribe warrior raised an eyebrow at the mock pain in his master’s expression but obliged the man.
“I wanted to discuss what you’re all doing together, as well as the plan for Sozin’s Comet. Both Aang and Momo,” Sokka directed that last part at Bumi, “have disappeared. We know that Aang will likely show up when the Comet comes to fight the Firelord, but we don’t have a solid plan. Until Zuko informed us of Ozai’s plan to wipe out the Earth Kingdom, Aang was going to wait for the Comet to pass before he fought.”
“So our intel was correct,” Jeong Jeong stated solemnly. “Ozai plans to destroy the other nations as his grandfather destroyed the Air Nomads.”
“It will be easier to thwart the plan if Aang handles the Loserlord,” Bumi earned himself a couple of snickers at that, “and we have these kids to help.”
“I believe it would be best to discuss this with the other masters.”
“There are more of you?” Sokka asked curiously, wondering what other old people had gathered.
“There are a few, but only one will likely be available with all of our preparations. General Iroh, the Dragon of the West.” The teen nodded at that. It fit with what he had seen of the group's apparent association.
“I’ll go get the others and then you can lead us to your camp. I’m guessing you’re going to take back Ba Sing Se?”
“Yes. We will wait,” Piandao told his former pupil. Sokka bowed once more to the trio before hurrying back to his team. He passed Pakku again, surprised that the old man had not joined his companions seeing as Katara was no longer speaking to him. He ignored the thought in favor of addressing his friends.
“Gaang, pack up quickly. We’re gonna head to the old people camp and plan for tomorrow. Do any of you want to forgo the meeting?”
“I’m coming and you can’t stop me,” Toph stated firmly. Sokka nodded and looked to the others.
“I’ll sit this one out,” Suki said. “I think I’d be better with helping preparations.”
“I’ll sit out, too,” Katara added, drawing surprised faces from her comrades. “I don’t think I’ll be much help with the planning.”
“Alright. Zuko?”
“I don’t know. I’m not one for planning but I know more about the Fire Nation.”
“Well, your uncle is here, and he’ll be at the meeting.” The prince startled slightly at the comment, likely remembering their parting. He’d never mentioned the terms they ended on, but the group assumed they weren’t good ones.
“I’ll go,” Zuko finally decided. “But I might leave.”
“Understandable. I’ll keep that in mind. Now put the gear away and we’ll head out.” The team split up seamlessly, heading to do the jobs they each unspokenly had. The only ones who didn’t move to join were Toph and Sokka, the latter because the earthbender had latched onto his arm.
“Not so fast, Snoozles.”
“What’s the matter, Toph?” Sokka studied his younger companion. For the first time in a long while, she appeared uncertain or uneasy. The firebender couldn’t figure out which.
“Why don’t you like your grandfather?” she inquired quietly. It was so uncharacteristic of her and, coupled with the weird question, caused the young chief to pause.
“My grandfather? Both my grandfathers are dead,” he informed the girl before him.
“Pakku’s marrying your Gran-Gran, at least according to Katara.”
“Oh.” He paused again. “I don’t… not like Pakku. It’s just that I don’t really have anything to talk to him about. He’s closer to Katara than me.”
“But you ignored him.”
“He was talking to Katara.” Toph opened her mouth to continue, but Sokka cut her off, feeling the conversation was going nowhere. “Is this all you were concerned about? Because he’s a good man, if still a little sexist. And I have no problems with him. So let’s help the others and then we can head out. If you’re still worried, talk to him on the way over.” The preteen huffed, blowing her bangs to the side as she turned on her heel and stomped away. Sokka sighed as he went over to pack up his tent and help Katara with the sleeping roll. He would definitely need to watch how he acted around his apparent-grandfather.
~_~_~_~_~_~
The Gaang were at the large camp where the Order of the White Lotus, the group that the masters belonged to, had set up for the taking back of Ba Sing Se. Suki and Katara quickly left to lead Appa to a safe place and begin aiding in the preparations. Zuko and Toph noticeably pressed closer to Sokka, drawing comfort from the father of the group. He noticed their tension and discreetly started rolling his tile, knowing that the motion would likely only draw attention from his teammates. Predictably, the flanking duo relaxed at the sight of the round piece of wood. Sokka would need to paint it again after the meeting.
Piandao walked off to wake up Iroh, who had taken an early night, while the others entered a large tent with a table and exactly eight chairs within, one on each end and three on either side. A map was weighted on the wooden surface, several Pai Sho tiles marking different spots of the world. Jeong Jeong and Bumi sat on the right side of the table with Pakku across from them, a seat saved for Piandao next to the waterbender. Sokka moved to sit near Jeong Jeong but found Toph pushing Zuko into the chair. Upon moving to sit across from the prince, Sokka was shoved out of the way by Toph, who smirked as she made herself a rock stool.
“Toph, from the bottom of my heart, why?” She smirked more.
“You’re forgetting that I’m nobility. I know how we’re supposed to be seated, Snoozles.”
“Yeah, I do, too,” he retorted. “The most important people go on either end, and the ones on their right are the second most important. But I’m not the highest in position. Zuko is.”
“Zuko’s a prince,” Toph smiled smugly. “And I’m a lady.”
“Exactly. So why did you reverse our positions?”
“You are absolutely right. I’ll fix that for you.” With a stomp, the stool was pushed back into the ground and Toph stalked over to Zuko. She tugged him up and dragged him over to the other side of the table, pressing him into the chair she’d just vacated. With yet another smirk, she sat in his old seat, feet once again propped up.
“Toph, I’m not higher than a lady, and definitely not a prince.”
“Oh really?” Sokka did not like that look. “Remember when you and Katara told us about the Southern Water Tribe’s hierarchy? Well, I do. Actually really interesting to learn about the Water Tribe since no one ever thought to teach me. You’re going to teach me more when Loserlord’s dead. Anyways, you and Katara are royalty by your Tribe’s standards. You’re the children of the Chief. Only, Katara told us something after you left to meditate.”
“She didn’t,” the firebender groaned out, throwing his head back in annoyance.
“She did,” the little earthbender responded proudly. “You, Snoozles, are the Chief of the Southern Water Tribe, which means you not only outrank me, but also everyone else here including our resident prince.”
Sokka didn’t attempt to fight it at that point. He simply sat down at the head of the table between his two friends, resigned to just accept Toph’s unusual behavior. Normally, she would take any opportunity to be the one in charge, but here she was, pushing the lead onto the older kid.
“Sokka, are you really the Chief?” Pakku’s questions caught three adolescents off guard, Zuko having been fully invested in seeing who would win the argument.
“Yeah,” the boy confirmed, settling back as they waited for Piandao and Iroh. “Dad left with the other warriors, so I was made Chief. Gran-Gran’s Chief in Absence.”
“She told me such, but I assumed her son was still leading.”
“That was Dad. He knew that they weren’t going to be back for a long time, so he seceded the position to me. He was following tradition and passing it to me as I was the eldest male and his son. Should’ve just given it to Gran-Gran.”
“But you’re fifteen,” Jeong Jeong interrupted, leaning forward with a glare. “How long ago did you become Chief?”
“It was about four years ago. I was eleven.”
“Wait, you ran a nation at eleven?”
“Not you, too! C’mon Zuko!”
“You ran a nation at eleven! Yet when I came for Aang, you said you were a warrior, not a chief!”
“Why are you all shouting?”
Everyone sitting at the table jerked towards the entrance to the tent, staring in surprise at the duo standing there. Piandao walked in first, sitting between Pakku and Zuko and peering around the prince at his old student. General Iroh entered after, moving to take his place across from Sokka, at the other head of the table.
“Apparently no one but the Gaang knew Sokka’s a king.”
“Toph! Chief, not king!”
“Same thing.” There was a loud thud as the teen’s forehead hit the wood, which was repeated at a lower volume as he began to bang lightly with his skull against the surface. It continued for about thirty seconds with the others staring amusedly at him, before Zuko slid his hand between the two opposing forces. Sokka looked up at his friend with a tiny pout before exhaling and pulling himself upright.
“Whatever, let’s just start this meeting. General Iroh, what are your plans for tomorrow?” The atmosphere snapped into a tenser feel, a seriousness falling over the group.
“Earthbenders will aid in our entrance, with all firebenders directly behind. Once we are within, we masters and the more experience benders will combat those aided by the Comet. All other warriors will begin taking down the lesser threats, such as nonbenders and earthbenders. We assumed your team would have a plan for fighting my brother.” Sokka nodded, lips pursed in concentration as he studied the map. He was able to figure out what most of the pieces marked, and it was with that that his mind worked out a strategy. He began rolling his tile again, something he had stopped when entering the tent. It was a movement done under the table but still visible to his friends.
“There’s going to be an airfleet, correct?” Iroh tipped his head in confirmation at the inquiry. “That means that they can travel far and fast in the relatively short time of the Comet. And they could split up easily to cover more area. It’s a given that Ozai will be there with the fleet. When Aang comes to fight, that will separate them from the ships. We’ll then need to take them out, or else the destruction will be exponentially larger.”
“No one but powerful and loyal Fire Nation engineers ever saw the blueprints,” Piandao commented. “We don’t have the time to get them and figure out how to take them down or find a way around the crew.”
“Why would you- oh, you guys don’t know. Makes sense.”
“What don’t we know?”
“I invented airships. You won’t need to get blueprints, I’ll just go there myself. They’re made of metal, so Toph will need to come as well. A smaller team will be better, so us and maybe one or two more people. That will nullify the fleet and prevent most of the destruction. Someone will need to take out Azula as well. She’ll be controlling the Fire Nation while Ozai makes the attack. I would suggest Zuko for that, as he’s got the best knowledge of the Caldera and Azula’s tactics.”
“Regarding your attack, I think that it would be best if you sent your most powerful earthbenders underground with a strong group of warriors. If you go deep enough, only the Dai Li could possibly sense you and you could make an attack from within the city, forcing the soldiers to fight on two fronts. From what Zuko told me, most of the Dai Li went with Azula. Maybe all of them but it’s better to assume some are there. They could be defeated easily by Bumi, so he definitely should go. If the nonbenders went through the tunnels after the main group, then some of the weaker earthbenders could make separate paths and pop up at different places throughout Ba Sing Se. Not only would that ensure that they aren’t attacked by Dai Li, it would also allow them to sneak up on the nonbenders and any other combatants they might meet. Warn them that some people have been brainwashed. We don’t have a way to figure out who and with the Fire Nation, who knows what they did with that technology.”
“Healers and medics should remain behind for the first ten minutes or so before following the second group underground. That way they won’t be attacked. They should wear something to distinguish them from soldiers. Maybe have them wear white, as it’s not going to be a color that blends in. If they help everyone regardless of the side they’re on, then they also won’t be attacked.”
“When did you have the time to plan this?” Jeong Jeong asked, his tone shocked.
“He’s the Schedule Master,” Toph spoke up in glee. She always loved seeing people on the opposite side of Sokka’s plans.
“Right now, it doesn’t matter when I made the plan. We just need to figure out who will go and where they’ll go to. Toph and I for the airfleet, Aang fighting Ozai, and Zuko with someone else against Azula. Katara can take on the role of both healer and fighter, so she can fit anywhere, and Suki’s a great warrior.”
“Very well.” Iroh moved a few of the markers around, rearranging them to represent the modified plan. A white tile in the Caldera’s location was moved to the center instead of the outer edge and a yellow one was placed on top of a red. Zuko and Aang. Without waiting to see the tile that Iroh would move for himself, Sokka took his white lotus and placed it on the coast of the Earth Kingdom most likely to be attacked.
“I see you kept the tile,” Piandao mused, a proud look in his eyes.
“Yes. You gave it to me, after all.” It came to the boy’s realization that the Order of the White Lotus probably had some special meaning to the tile, especially since they held Pai Sho in such a high regard that even Jeong Jeong had a board.
“Piandao was right to do so,” Bumi stated with a finality that moved them back to the plan.
“The strategies would work, and it is a thought none of us had to include healers in our battle. A fine idea to lessen any causalities on both sides. However, we need to decide on the whereabouts of your team. And we need to discuss the effects the Comet might have on you, given your peculiarity.”
“Katara can go with Zuko. She’ll fight with him and keep him alive. That’s extremely necessary, both because he’s a friend and because he’s next in line. Zuko, you’ll need to take over as fast as possible. The Fire Sages should be there due to Azula’s possible coronation. I don’t really understand how all that works, but if they’re there and you defeat her, you still have the most right to the throne outside of your father and any position held by Azula is rightfully yours. They’ll listen to you if Katara’s there to yell at them.”
“Are you sure we can take my sister? She’s insane and incredibly powerful.”
“Who knows dragon fire? Not her. Who is the only person Lan stays with besides myself? Not her. You are powerful enough to stop her in a fight, and you have the world’s greatest waterbender to aid you if anything goes wrong, which it will. You can do this.”
“Who is Lan?” Sokka, Toph, and Zuko all stared at Pakku for a moment, before their expressions changed. Toph was grinning with mischief, knowing perfectly well how the reactions would go. Zuko became utterly embarrassed as he would have to admit he was special when it came to the little Bluey. Sokka was grinning like Toph, but his was in pride at the thought of showing off his baby. With steady hands, the Spirit-touched boy reached into his shirt and withdrew the complacent being.
What occurred next was hysterical in many different ways. Jeong Jeong tipped over his chair as he jumped back in his seat, and Bumi barely managed to get out of his own before it, too, was knocked over. Piandao fell into Pakku, who caught the man and tilted back as far as he could go. Iroh sat frozen and tense at the end, eyes unbelieving. A huge slew of expletives exploded into the air from various masters, drawing Toph into a cackling fit. Sokka was clutching Lan protectively against his chest, angry at how no one seemed to appreciate his baby, and Zuko was trying to comfort the boy without breaking down into laughter.
Lan, sensing her caretaker’s distress and woken from her nap, wrapped carefully around Sokka’s neck and growled. When the attention was successfully drawn her way, she moved further up into the black hair above her, and hit her small paws against the firebender’s head. It was an action that somehow conveyed “be nice” without any previous knowledge of Lan’s antics.
“You all need to be nicer to my baby,” Sokka pouted, gently tugging said baby into his arms again. “She deserves better.”
24 notes · View notes
aceavatar · 4 years ago
Text
Let the Sunshine In
Zuko x Female Reader
Genre: angst
Warnings: death
Word count: 2441
Inspired by Hair the musical
This is a reupload! My old acc went wonky but I’m back now!! :)
Tumblr media
She was beautiful.
So was he, but he’s not the focus of the story. She is.
She’s the one who changed his life and perception on his country.
It all started when a girl named y/n entered a little tea shop in Ba Sing Se.
“Good morning, Lee.” She said to the boy that she was attracted to for no real reason.
“Hey y/n.” He said, scratching his head. “The usual?”
She nodded. She eyed the shop, looking at the walls, chairs, tables, and the sweet old man who runs the shop with Lee.
“Good morning, y/n.” He told the girl.
She nodded at him, a small smile on her lips.
She knows something, Iroh thought to himself.
And she did.
Being a member of a aristocratic family from the fire nation, she obviously recognized Prince Zuko and the Dragon of the West.
She decided to wait a couple days and come back at closing time to confront the two.
It went better than she expected:
“Hi, y/n! I’m sorry, we were just closing.” Iroh said.
“Oh, I know.” Y/n said nervously.
“Is everything okay?” Lee/Zuko asked.
“I know.” The small girl said.
The two men looked at each other, then at her.
“Know what?” Iroh asks calmly. “I doubt you know my tea recipe, it’s been passed down in my family for generations.”
“I know who you are.” The truth hit them, and they instantly froze. “I won’t turn you in or anything though, I promise.”
Zuko trusted the girl. She knew this whole time, but said nothing. Maybe she was running from something to. From that moment on, he was determined to find out what it was.
“I’d like to work at your tea shop.” She says hopefully. “I miss my people. And I’m a fire bender, too. If that’s important at all.” She blurted.
“We’d love to have you working alongside us.” Iroh says, glancing at Zuko.
Iroh was aware of his little crush on the young lady; every time she came in, he would rush to take her order.
Zuko nodded. “So, us y/n your real name?”
“Yeah. Wasn’t smart enough to go under a fake one when I moved here.” She chuckled.
And that was the start of the three of them living a happy live in Ba Sing Se. It was cut short far too soon though.
“Thank you for taking me here.” She whispered to Zuko.
He looked down at their intertwined hands, and their legs dangling off the roof of a tall building.
“My pleasure, y/n.” He said, leading his head on hers, which was situated on his shoulder.
They looked out at the lights of the lamps which danced in the cool evening air.
For the first time, Zuko felt peace. His mind wasn’t preoccupied with honor, or the Avatar, or his father, sister, or mother. Just her.
For the first time, she felt loved. Growing up in a cold, unforgiving family has cons. Like never accepting yourself, anxiety, stress, and constant unhappiness.
She was content.
She wasn’t trying to impress anyone. Not her parents, the masters who taught her bending, not the eyes of society.
She was happy. She felt safe. She felt love. And she loved right back.
As if on que, the two lifted their heads and looked at each other.
She lifted a hand to Zuko’s face, moving her thumb agains his cheek. He was warm.
She took a risk. She was never a risk taker, but with Zuko, she was willing to.
She gently kissed the boy, enjoying the feeling of his hot breath when he sighed.
She pulled away.
He didn’t like that. He quickly closed the space between them, kissing her back. He kissed her like she was the most important thing in the world. He looked at her like she was the most beautiful thing in the world.
To him, she was.
Zuko wasn’t the only one who took a liking to y/n.
Iroh quite enjoyed having the girl around. He taught her how to play Pai Sho, and how to make the best tea. He also taught her ancient firebending techniques that only a few people on earth knew.
He especially liked having her around because of her affect on his nephew.
——————
“Hey pretty lady,” a voice erupted from next to y/n, making her skin crawl.
“Excuse me?” She asked, disgusted. She stepped away from where the voice came from to see an older man, maybe on his 40’s.
“You heard me.” He said.
Y/n made a face. She knew she could defend herself.
He smirked and moved to whisper something in her ear. Before she could move away, he grabbed her arm with an iron grip.
Y/n’s instinct was to send a fireball to his face, but she restrained. She placed her hand on his shoulder and burned him. She held on until the “tsssss” sound went on for a couple seconds.
“Gotcha.” The man said.
That’s when she realized she had fallen into a trap.
Dai Li agents dropped down from all over, grabbing the girl and bending restraints on her arms.
“Let me go!” Y/n screamed, making a fight.
Needless to say, they didn’t let her go.
They took her to some lake, where she was given a choice.
1- Be brainwashed and be relocated in the city somewhere
Or
2- Fight against her own nation for the Earth Kingdom.
While it went against her instincts to fight her own nation, she was determined to remember her new family, Zuko and Iroh.
“I’ll fight.” She said, new determination in her voice.
“Very well.” An agent said.
“Let me enjoy one last day, though?” She asked. “I just want some tea from my favorite tea shop.”
“Very well, but we will have someone follow you there and listen to you.”
“Okay.”
And that’s what they did.
They could hear her, not see her.
She walked into the shop, only to be greeted by the two men she adored.
She gave them a look, then put a finger to her lips to signal silence.
They looked at her puzzled, but nodded anyway.
She mimicked a pen and paper, so Iroh rushed to the back to grab some.
“Hello, sir. I’d like a cup of your finest tea.” Y/n said calmly, sitting at the counter.
Zuko nods and grabs some random brew, knowing that you didn’t really care about the kind.
“Thank you sir.”
Zuko nodded, shooting the girl he loved a concerned look.
“Here is a napkin.” Iroh said, putting down paper, ink, and a quill.
“Thank you.” Y/n said, grabbing the quill and beginning to write like there was no tomorrow.
She wrote:
I love you two so much.
The Dai Li caught me firebending. I need to fight in the war. It was either that or forget that I met you and who I was. I can’t risk that.
I’ll see you after the war.
Please live good lives here. I’ll see you again.
Iroh: you’re more of a father to me than my actual dad. You’ve made my life richer.
Zuko: i know now isn’t the best time to tell you this, but I’m in love with you. Just in case i don’t make it back, i wanted to tell you.
Stay out of trouble, you two.
-Y/n
She slid the note across to them. They glanced over it.
Zuko, now teary eyed, looked up.
He mouthed “i love you too” to her.
“I must be on my way.” She said, her heart full.
She leaned over the counter and kissed Iroh on the cheek.
She then moved to kiss Zuko on the lips.
“Goodbye.” She said, standing up and pushing in the stool.
“Goodbye dear. Come again.” Iroh said, his voice shaky with sadness.
“Bye, y/n.” Zuko said, his heart happy because she loves him, his heart breaking because she was forced into war.
——————
Y/n wound up with the Avatar’s group, readying for the solar eclipse.
While fighting her own nation hurt her, she recognized the corruption.
She was fighting the corrupt Ozai, not her nation. Not the innocent people. She was fighting the man that burned her love.
With determination, she sat next to Sokka, Aang, and Toph, ready to go defeat the firelord.
While y/n didn’t have her bending during the eclipse, their plan was to use her help to escape and to fight off fire. She was the only fire bender, and while they mistrusted her somewhat, they could tell she was wiser than to blindly fight for a nation.
Even though she was forced into it, she was fighting for the good of the world.
——��———
Before she knew it, y/n was on the hunt for Ozai.
Sokka got distracted by Azula, but y/n saw through it and decided to go on and see if she could find where the firelord was hiding.
She found more than that.
She found her love.
“Zuko?” Y/n asked, her jaw dropped.
He whipped his head around.
Before him was the person that made him question his past. The one that woke him up.
She was a little beat up, a little rougher around the edges, but still beautiful, if not more.
“Y/n!” He whispered.
The two of you ran to each other, hugging each other tight.
“You’re okay.” He whispered.
Y/n nodded, stepping back. “I’ve got to find Aang before it’s too late. I’ll be right back.” She quickly kissed him and sprinted back to where she was.
“Aang!” She yelled, making the boy turn his head to her. She nodded back behind her, telling him to follow her.
They were running toward’s Ozai’s chamber, until it happened.
The sun came back.
“Y/n watch out!” Zuko yelled, pointing behind her.
She turned around, but it was too late.
Azula was there, fingertips steaming, and y/n was on the ground, with a burned spot over her heart.
Aang and Zuko stared at the girl on the ground, then at each other.
They both nodded, silently agreeing on a plan. Aang took after Azula, while Zuko grabbed y/n and carried her outside.
As Y/n looked up at the sky, she knew it was coming to an end.
“We almost had everything.” She said hoarsely to the scarred boy who was cradling her in his arms.
“We will.” He said, fighting back tears, trying to stay strong.
She shook her head with a smile. “Live a good life, Zuko.” She cringed, pain surging through her chest.
“Don’t go, please.” He said, his voice breaking.
“I can’t help it.” She shook her head, scrunching her eyebrows together, trying to hang on. She knew she won’t last long, and he did too. He just didn’t want to admit it.
“Somewhere, inside something, is a rush of greatness,” y/n whispered.
“What?” Zuko asked, trying to understand her.
She looked at him, her golden eyes losing their sparkle. “Who knows what stands in front of our lives.”
“I know that I’ll always love you, y/n,”
“Silence tells me everything, singing songs of space,” she said, trying to focus on the breaking boy above her.
“Life is around you,” she said, and looked at Zuko. She touches his chest, over his heart. “And in you.”
She looked past Zuko, at the sun. It didn’t look so blindingly bright any more.
It’s telling her something.
Let the sunshine in.
So she did.
"Let the sunshine in." she gently whispered with her last breath.
Her eyes fluttered shut, causing the boy to break. He allowed himself to cry, holding her tight to him.
“Please, y/n, no.”
It hurt him. Bad. But he decided that what you would’ve wanted is to work to fight the firelord with Aang.
He pulled y/n’s limp body to a nice shady spot, he didn’t have much time.
He kissed her forehead, tears rolling down his cheeks.
“I love you.” He said, running off to follow Aang and his group. To join them this time, not capture them.
And the story went on.
We all know what happens. Aang wins, Zuko becomes firelord, Aang marries Katara, and everyone lives happily ever after.
But Zuko, he waited.
He got married, had kids, grandkids, and got to meet the next avatar. He led a good life.
Every morning, every single day of his life, he woke up to watch the sun rise. He felt like the first rays over the horizon was y/n telling him hello.
It was.
After that day, y/n awoke in a beautiful place. The place had mystical creatures, kind ones and frightening ones. She lived a life there, too.
She lived there for years. Everything was fine and dandy until the new avatar, Korra was her name, opened the spirit portals.
That changed everything.
Y/n stayed in the spirit world. She didn’t feel like it was her place to return into the human world, she already spent her time there.
One morning, she got a pull to go look at the portals.
She did. She learned that if something comes up in your head and you’re not sure why, to just do it. In the spirit world, things have a reason.
She stood and looked at the beautiful swirls of light from the portals, admiring it.
Then she saw a figure.
It was an old man, but familiar.
What old men did she know? Iroh, but he was in the spirit world with her. They’d run into each other every so often and catch up and have tea from Ravaa’s teapot.
But no, it wasn’t Iroh.
Her jaw dropped when the image became clearer.
She saw a very old man in fire nation robes, with grey hair, and a scar across his eye.
It was Zuko.
He walked through the portal, gently but with strength.
“Zuko!” She shouted with glee.
As he fully steps through, he’s not the old man any more. He’s the 17 year old she knew so many years ago.
"y/n." he said, his voice tired but happy.
She jumped into his arms, enjoying the feeling she missed so much.
He hugged her back, closing his eyes in bliss.
She pulls back gently, still keeping herself in Zuko's arms.
She put her hand on her chest and felt light and warmth.
"You did it." she whispered.
"Did what?" he said, leaning his forehead on hers, gently placing his hand over y/n's on his chest.
"You let the sunshine in."
Tumblr media
65 notes · View notes
adventuresloane · 4 years ago
Text
The Wanted (Revised Hurloane Fic) - Chapter 1
Summary:
"They had nearly as many names as they had stories told about them. Ram. Raven. Red. Devil. Deputy. Outlaw. Short 'n Long. Ghosts of the Rapids."
Hurley's a bounty hunter, the Raven is an outlaw, and the desert is a lonely place.
(The 50k+ Old West Hurloane AU Where Hurley Becomes A Thief Too that no one asked for. Updates every Friday. Edited and reposted from an old version of the story--more significant changes to come in later chapters. T for non-graphic violence and discussions of death/injury/trauma.)
Read on AO3
They had nearly as many names as they had stories told about them. 
Ram. Raven. Red. Devil. Deputy. Outlaw. Short 'n Long. Ghosts of the Rapids. 
What happened to them depends on who you ask. Some say the Raven twisted the Ram, but then again, the Ram might have been born with badness in the marrow of their bones. They say the outlaw was a thief, that her glittering horde still lies somewhere out in the desert among the canyons. They say the deputy was a sharpshooter with twenty notches on their pistol, one for every man who tried to take them. They say they were very much in love.
Maybe they still are. People who camp alone by the river say at night, they hear too-loud whispers over the rush. 
If you ask the only man who was there that day, he'll tell you the same thing every time, and nothing more: "They went over the cliff and into the river. Never found the bodies."
He won't tell you whether they were dead before they hit the water. He won't even tell you whether they were shot at all. Maybe, as some say, the two of them just tipped, hand-in-hand, falling backwards over the edge together as children let themselves fall into soft grass.
--------------------------
"I don't give a rat's ass what Bane said. She so much as looks at me wrong, I'm shooting."
Hurley heard the murmuring and looked over their shoulder. The two men were lagging, their mounts clopping along at a lackadaisical pace. Barbra and Lil' Jerry rode side-by-side and leaned toward each other in their saddles as they spoke in what could charitably be called a whisper. Hurley slowed their own horse a bit to get closer and listen.
"Yeah, as if you'd live long enough to press the trigger," Lil' Jerry snickered in response. "You couldn't outdraw a tin can."
"Oh, fuck off! I take care of myself fine."
"Ah, whatever."
"Besides, I'll have my gun drawn the whole time we're giving chase. I'm not taking chances on this one. You've heard the stories. Even saw the blood in one of those train cars that one time, remember?"
"Yeah, I remember," Lil' Jerry muttered.
"Everyone's quicker on the trigger when they know their gun's the only thing between them and the Big Sleep," Barbra declared. "That's just survival instinct."
"That poor Abernathy fuck wasn't. Quicker, that is."
"That doesn't mean you just wave a gun around if there's nothing in sight to shoot," Hurley piped up. They took more than a little satisfaction in how the two men looked at them, first with surprise and then with frustration, as if they'd really thought they were getting away with something. 
"We weren't talking to you."
"You might as well have been. You were loud enough. Bane told us we have to start moving quietly. The Raven's probably in this area."
"Trust you to do whatever he tells you." Hurley bristled as Lil' Jerry went on, "This is only your first time out, so we don't need you telling us what to do with our mouths or our guns."
"I know my way around a gun just fine, and you know tha--"
"All of you," said a deep voice, causing Hurley to stop instantly, "would be better off if you paid more attention to what's around you instead of whatever bullshit you're going on about."
Hurley said, "Sorry" while the boys behind them mumbled the word vaguely. At once, they prompted their horse to pick up speed and catch up with Bane as he led the way. 
When they had been riding alongside him for a few minutes, he leaned their way a little. "Though I would say," he started conspiratorially, "having seen both of you at target practice, I trust you to point a pistol the right way quite a bit more than I trust Barbra."
They snickered a little. "I'd hope so, Sheriff."
"You've got a head on your shoulders, even if you've got to be reminded to use it now and again." They looked down and smiled a little sheepishly, though the way he said it made it sound more compliment than critique. "The problem is that anyone can take a look at a thousand-dollar 'wanted' poster and suddenly decide they're a bounty hunter. They try to be heroes.”
"I don't suppose a lot of bravado does you much good out here."
"Oh, no, it can. You need to be tougher in the face of some damn tough criminals. Another reason I think you'll be good to have around." He was grinning. "But the people who come in guns blazing are also the ones who turn tail the quickest when things get to be too much for them."
"You won't have that problem with me, sir."
"No, I don't think I will. I've known you long enough to know you're here because you want to put things right. I think you and I could do that back at home, too."
"It needs it. Goldcliff's broken, if you ask me."
"Hey, now, that's my town you're talking about."
"I'm sorry. I don't mean it that way. It's just I've seen so many people there try to cheat and hustle and steal ever since I came there, and now this...murdering a man on his own doorstep in the middle of the afternoon." They shook their head. "I can't stand it."
"You don't have to. You can help stop it if you want."
"I do. And I think I'll have a much better chance of doing it with you and the law. No more of me challenging cheaters to tavern fights to sort them out," they said with a small laugh. "Thank you again, by the way, for letting me come out here with you."
He nodded before turning to address the whole group. "We're about to enter the canyon. Be careful how you go, now. It echoes in there."
Their heart began to bounce inside their chest as they thought of facing their quarry. Their horse sped up to a trot. 
“Hurley.” 
They looked behind them to find a stern-faced Bane and a posse that had stopped moving altogether. Trying to swallow down the blush working up their face, they got back in line behind Bane. 
The four moved single-file as they made their way downward. By the time they reached the bottom, there was still no activity, not so much as a lizard skittering through the grit on the ground. Quiet filled up the gaps between the stone walls, washed over them like the long-dead rivers that had once carved out these canyons. All they could hear was the clacking of the horses' footfalls, thrown back at them louder.
At various points, Bane sometimes whispered, more often simply signalled with his hands for one of them to break off and explore another path. They would return empty-handed.
Now, Bane held up a hand for them all to stop. Hurley heard, then, just for a moment, the sound of hoofbeats that belonged to none of their rides. With the way sound played off the stone, they couldn’t determine how far it was. 
It kept coming as none of them moved, noise bouncing and skipping off the walls like a mockery. Sometimes distant, sometimes nearer, sometimes seemingly next to their ears. The canyon was sinuous and full of unexpected branches and side-paths. They tried to pinpoint the source of the noises that seemed to come from everywhere, from out of the ether. 
Or they did until a resounding bang interrupted. It made a couple of the horses spook and rear as it blasted apart the near-silence. This time, it wasn't hard to tell that it came directly from behind.
Everyone else turned to see Barbra holding the smoking gun, looking more shocked than anyone.
"For fuck's sake, Barb," Lil' Jerry muttered.
And then a flash of dark around a corner. 
Their galloping set the whole place rumbling as they all shot off. Hurley’s horse nearly skittered on the sand several times as they whipped the reins sharply to the side. It was what was necessary to wind through the narrow passages that curled deeper and deeper into the canyon.
Whenever there was a widening of the path that might allow more than one horse through at a time, Hurley tried to shove past the others. They had to be up front. They could barely see anything past Bane, leading at the front and shouting things they couldn’t hear.
He grabbed his lasso as they came around one bend. There was nothing on his face except the same solid determination as usual, only sharpened. 
The posse pulled around the corner and came to an instant halt, scraping hooves stirring sand. Hurley craned their neck to see the dead end at the end of this passage, a sheer wall of redstone. But no Raven.
Not until there was sound well behind the whole group as the dark form reappeared and shot off in the other direction.
"Dammit," he spat as he yanked the reins back hard and turned his horse around. "Stay together!"
Hurley kept pace with the rest of the group, until they didn't. By degrees, they drew their horse back into a canter, then a slow trot. As expected, the others were too fixated on their path to notice that they were losing Hurley, as they leaned low over the manes of their galloping animals. The posse twisted around a sharp corner and out of their sight.
You're thinking with your belly again, they heard their mother say, while she poked the round ball of their seven-year-old tummy.
None of them were about to outpace the Raven while she stayed three turns ahead of them. She knew the canyon, maybe so well that she knew where her pursuers were just by hearing the echo of them along the red stone walls. But if just one of them could out-maneuver...
They bid their horse to turn around and move at a quiet walk. This was not a betrayal of Bane's orders, they convinced themself. Not really, anyway. Maybe he had told them to keep up with the group, but surely the higher order was to find the thief. If they did that, he could forgive the unconventional methods.
And they would do it.
They started to pick their way through the tangle of paths. The Raven had traveled back this way, running in front of the posse, only to disappear around a bend and re-emerge behind them all. This, perhaps, was where a number of the narrow natural trails converged. They might part only to circle back and rejoin each other elsewhere. If that were true, she would be likely to stay near the place where she had a number of exit routes. This was where she expected she'd be safe. 
They chose their directions nearly at random, only knowing that they wanted to roughly parallel the path that their team had been taking before. They could meet up with them and maybe head the Raven off, if they could only keep track of where the others might be. They went left, left again, right. When they reached a slot-like passage in the rock face too narrow for a horse, they bit their lip, then dismounted and left the gelding behind as they sidled sideways through.
Occasionally, the others' calls and the pounding of their horses' hooves would come to Hurley, and they would stop to hear more. By then, though, the echoes would have already receded. They still had no way of knowing where the source of the sounds could be found--they got bounced around and lost in the network of paths until they seemed entirely disembodied. They might as well have been the chattering of specters wafting their way through the cavernous, lonely canyon. Right, left. No route here was distinct from the rest. For all they knew, they were wearing circles into the sand. 
Right, right again, and then, suddenly, no further. They pulled themself back behind a boulder and instinctively clapped a hand over their mouth. It was some time before they were able to make themself crane their neck back around, to determine whether they had seen what they'd thought they'd seen.
From behind, they saw a figure sitting atop her steed. Long black duster turned sepia by the caked-on dust of the desert and a wide-brimmed, jet bolero with a sharp feather sticking up straight from the hatband. She was still. Just waiting.
Their mouth felt dry. At some point, they realized that it was gaping open, and they snapped it shut. The clack of their teeth sounded far too loud in their mouth. 
They took a single step around the large stone that they hid behind. The half-elf's ears swiveled around and moved to pick up on sound. They seemed to fixate on nothing, though. Certainly, she didn't look Hurley's way as they gripped the long rope and positioned it in their hands. Their every movement was measured now. With every scrape of the rough hemp coil against their fingers, they felt certain that she would turn around, but she didn't. Another step, placed on the ground deliberately. The sand did not crunch beneath them. 
From where they stood behind the boulder, they did not have a clear shot at her, but they did not dare step out fully into the open. They could still get her, though. They would still get her. It probably should have been fear that sent the eager blood blazing through them--the fear that she would see them and be gone in an instant, the fear that they would be gone in an instant when she spun to blow them away--but that wasn't it. This was the familiar thrill of the final blow and the bullseye. It ran through them whenever they knew they were about to prove what they could do. They clenched their lasso as the world shrunk to what was right in front of them. What was right in front of them was an opportunity.
They threw. The Raven had a half-second to look at the loop that had snapped tight around her ankle before Hurley pulled with all they could, and down she went to the ground. When she impacted, it was with a choked noise that might have been a yell, had the wind not been punched out of her lungs. 
They almost wanted to cheer as her horse spooked and ran off.
But then they turned to look at just what it was they had caught. The figure at the end of their tether lay on her back for several moments, unmoving. For a moment, they wondered if she had been stunned by a blow to the head. They saw that, certainly, she was still hurting from the way her spine had slammed into the baked-hard earth. Low, creaking groans came from the back of her throat along with her exhales.
Suddenly, as though startled awake, her eyes snapped wide open to the sky. She scrambled to push herself onto her elbows and look at the place where her ride had been, then spun her whole body around to face Hurley.
There was a bandana tied around her face, black and patterned with feathers, puffing out slightly with every breath. It covered up everything except her eyes, but the eyes were enough. Now unshielded by the hat that had fallen from her head, they snatched Hurley's gaze and held it tight. They were big, for one thing, and youthful, with the cool-toned brown skin around them unlined. What hit them, though, was how they went wide and got wider, caught bare and off-guard. Like they took in everything and understood none of it. Disbelief at being brought down so far and so fast.
They matched her gaze. They might have been smiling. Hurley liked making people believe they could do things previously thought impossible.
The Raven's eyes flitted down to the rope around her foot twice, the first time almost as an afterthought, the second with a look of mounting rage, and it occurred to Hurley just then that they had not really restrained her much at all. They tightened their grip on the lasso just as she went to stand and yanked so that she could not get her footing. She fell back onto her butt with an indignant grunt and tried again. They pulled again, becoming more aware all the while that they were just bringing her closer to them. 
That was when the sound returned to them like rocks tumbling over each other. Both they and the Raven turned just in time to see Barbra and Jerry come riding up, and for possibly the first time ever, Hurley was relieved to see them both. It was just seconds before each of them tossed a rope around her torso and pinned her arms to her sides. She squirmed against the bonds for a few moments and then went still, glaring between the three of them there. That was that. 
A fine thread of blood had begun to trickle out from beneath her hairline, barely skirting her eye, where she could not wipe it away. It ran all the way down to her neck. Hurley's doing. They were about to step forward when they felt a large hand press down on their shoulder.
"So you lost us a horse, it seems."
Hurley looked up in surprise, but Bane had a warm grin for them, the kind that let a person in on a joke. They smiled back, probably more broadly than they strictly needed to. "Still glad you brought me along?"
"Well, had you been a little worse at this job than I thought you'd be, you would've gone off and done something stupid and not gotten anywhere." He gave them a couple of firm pats. "But turns out, you're just as good as I thought you'd be. Better, considering you got the Raven on your first try."
"I wasn't expecting it either," they laughed.
He chuckled lightly, and then they watched him turn his attention to the captive in front of him. Barbra had her by the back of her collar and had already pulled her up to her knees. A bit of her hair was caught in his fist.
"She's younger than I thought," Hurley commented. 
He gave the thief an assessing look. "Not more than a year or two younger than you, I'd say. I don't see outlaws too much older than this, quite frankly. They tend to live fast and die faster."
"I guess so," they mumbled mostly to themself as they watched Bane walk over to her. The boys weren't easing up on the lassos, and already her breathing was shallower as her chest tried to expand against the rope.
He didn't tell them off for it, though. Instead he stepped close to her so that the tips of his boots nearly touched her knees. He cast her into shadow as he stood over her, making her lean back in order to match his gaze. Then, with a forefinger and thumb, he gripped the mask around her face and pulled it down in one motion. They saw all of her hard countenance now. A pale scar ran over the bridge of her nose, another down across her lips in a perfect vertical.
With the same hand that had felt warm and strong on Hurley's shoulder a moment ago, he suddenly grabbed her jaw. His fingers pressed into the skin of her cheek, his thumb dug into the bone beneath her ear. They released a minute gasp. They could see it from where they stood, how he kept squeezing as though to wring something out of her, which perhaps he did when her mouth was forced open a bit. 
"So that's what you look like," he said coolly. "You'll really get your picture in all the papers now, isn't that right?"
Her expression stayed hard and solid as stone. Her lower jaw was gritted and jutted. Hurley didn't know how she wasn't even trying to pull away. How she stood it rather than trying to whip her head out of his grasp. That was what they would have done, they thought.
"Bind her hands and arms both." He dropped his hand, finally. "And make sure those knots are damn tight. She's been known to try sneaking off."
This was the only time she fought, really. Jerry came up behind her, and she glanced backwards, gritted her teeth, got one of her feet underneath her and tried to stand before being shoved back to the ground. Bane was over there and assisting before it even occurred to Hurley that they might help their posse. A hand on her bent back, right at the vertebra where the neck met the spine. She kept struggling as her arms were crossed behind her, with each wrist bound against the opposite elbow. It was only when Barbra pulled back on the rope hard enough to make her wince that she stopped. That left her leaning over a little. Her chest and the muscles of her belly worked hard on every rasping inhale. Her breathing stayed heavy and open-mouthed when she was half-pulled and half-kicked to her feet and started walking behind the horses as they moved in the direction of their base camp.
Hurley walked too, though Bane offered more than once to let them ride on his horse while he walked awhile. On the way, they kept turning back to look. The Raven just went and went. She drove her gaze into the ground like a plough and hardly moved or lifted it, except to glare when she felt an extra tug on the ropes around her torso. Other than that, she looked almost listless. Concussed, maybe, they thought. But she wasn't uncoordinated or struggling to focus. She simply didn't react.
It wasn't until they got back to their base camp that she showed some resistance. Hurley saw as she finally picked her head up and watched while Barbra opened the padlocked back door to the wagon, with its couple of small, square, barred windows. She hesitated before the wide dark opening, tried to take a couple steps back even as she was pulled forward. But it didn't matter. Barbra yanked and Lil' Jerry shoved and Hurley saw her look backward over the boys' heads, at something far away, before the door closed and locked on her again.
They stared for a bit longer before shaking their head. "I can go untie her for you while she's in there, Sheriff--"
"No," he said even as they started stepping forward. "It'll be good for tiring her out a bit if she stays like that for awhile."
"But that's dangerous," they responded without waiting a beat.
"It's only for a few hours, Hurley. It won't hurt anything."
They tried to keep from gaping at him. "It'll definitely hurt. It probably hurts now."
There was a force and urgency in their voice that they heard too late. He half-turned his head towards them, just enough that they could see the widening of his eye and the raising of his brow. "Hurley, you caught an outlaw on your first go, and that's to be commended, but you're still new to all of this. I've been here plenty of times. Trust me when I say I know what to do here." He nodded towards said outlaw, now unseen behind the door. "You suppose we were too rough?"
"I..." They bit the inside of their cheek. Hurley was included in that "we." Only one of them among the group, after all, had made the Raven bleed. "I just think we shouldn't do anything unnecessary."
"And I agree," he said almost somberly. "I try not to, unlike some people. If another group of bounty hunters had gotten her, she likely would've been beaten by now. That's if they bothered trying to bring her back alive at all."
They shivered a little. The cold here came on fast in the evenings.
"I call them one-person juries, people that just go out to kill or punish. It's a sorry state of affairs. She's lucky." He said it as though the sentence were a conversation ender.
It wasn't, in their mind. They weren't convinced that this got a pass just because other posses were far worse, and they were about to tell him as much, but only got as far as saying, "But, Sheriff--" before he brought them to a halt again.
"Hurley," he said. The word was a quiet warning. "Let yourself learn first."
They stared at him even after he turned around to walk away. For a long time, they stood dumbly and watched his back as he strode back towards the fire pit.
Again, this was not disobedience, they told themself as they covertly unlocked the wagon door while the others ate dinner a ways off. Bane said he wanted to bring his prisoners back alive? Then they were going to make sure this one stayed alive, whether he liked it or not.
The late amber light struggled in through the tiny windows, getting caught up in the smoky dust that rose from the floor. It was just bright enough to see the way the Raven lifted her hanging head, letting the long black hair fall away from where it covered her cheek. Without turning their way, she let her gaze slice across them.
After far too long of a pause, they opened with, "Hello," since it seemed like as good an introduction as any.
Behind the airtight line of her mouth, they could tell, her teeth were gritted. They could almost hear the scrape of them.
"That looks uncomfortable," they continued, stepping forward, because the alternative was going backwards, which they never did. "I'll get those ropes off of you if you'll let me."
They kept coming towards her until they saw her pulling her leg back slowly, winding up for a kick. "Hey. Easy." They took another small step forward, still out of her strike range. Their voice did not rise above a murmur. "Easy. There's no catch here, I promise. I'm still going to have to chain your ankles, but I'll untie you so you can move around. You just have to let me, please."
When they kept walking forward, nothing in her changed, including the intensity of her glare. But she didn't seem primed to kick them anymore either, which was good enough for them. 
She tracked their every motion, twisting her neck around to look at them over her shoulder as they went to undo the knots at her wrists. When their fingers brushed hers, she flinched, curled her hands up into fists. But they didn't miss the long sigh and slumping of her shoulders when the bonds fell away, the way her eyes shut slowly.
They moved so that they were back in front of her and saw, without a moment to spare, the way she eyed the key to the cuffs that had just been locked around her legs. They pulled back the hand that held it just as she swiped at it, catching only the air. Well, that escape attempt had taken all of thirty seconds for her to concoct. The three-day journey back to Goldcliff would be exciting.
"Nice try," they commented. They dropped the key into their breast pocket and reached for their canteen. "Do you want water?"
She looked at it like it was the first she had ever seen. When they held it out a little further to her, though, she brought her gaze back to them and kept it there. It didn't move away even as she took the metal container from them and unscrewed the cap. They thought, finally, that they saw something else other than the bitterness in her, even if it wasn't gone. Her head was angled curiously, to eye them as though she were looking through a keyhole.
"I'm Hurley, by the way. I know you didn't ask, which was a bit rude, but I thought if you needed--"
"It's not going to work."
They stopped. In an instant, her lips had become stretched thin into a tight smile. It stayed unchanged on her face even as Hurley searched it for answers. She didn't open her mouth, but still she laughed a low, heavy laugh, dredged up like phlegm. 
"What's not going to wo--"
She held up a finger to halt them as she brought up their canteen to her mouth and tipped her entire head back. They lost count of how many swallows she took, but they did wonder whether she was remembering to breathe. Finally, she pulled it away with a loud, refreshed exhale and tossed it back into their lap, half as heavy. "You," she began, casually wiping her mouth, "are trying to make this easier on yourself. You think if you throw me a bone or two I'll be docile and not give you any trouble while you're dragging me off to prison. Well, go fuck yourself, little Red." She dragged out the last sentence like she had all day to say it. Her voice had a sing-song tilt like a head rocking from side to side, slathered in mock sweetness.
They stayed sitting on their butt in front of her. Well. In all fairness, they didn't really know what else they should have expected. They ran a hand through the short puff of almost-auburn curls on the top of their head, of which they were suddenly quite conscious. "Fine, I'll go fuck myself," they mumbled. There was no truth to what she said, but they doubted there was any way to convince her of that. "Can I at least have your name, since I gave you mine? Though it seems like you forgot it already."
"My name is whatever you think it is, Red."
"What's that supposed to mean?"
"What have you heard me called? The Raven, I'm sure." She gave them a curl of her lips that was a smirk and a sneer and a snarl all at once. "What else?"
They matched her hard stare. "They call you Black Devil," they answered quietly.
She looked amused, but not surprised. 
"You seem pretty nonchalant about all this."
"What? Getting harassed by people like you? Yeah, you could say I'm used to it."
They had to almost chuckle at that. "Harassment seems like a stretch. What did you expect anyway? You think people will just ignore the murder of an innocent man and an unbroken streak of robberies stretching from one end of the territory clear to the other? That's not the kind of thing you get away with forever. If not us, some other posse would've--"
"What did you say?" 
For the second time, she brought them to a stop. While they had been speaking, the Raven had been staring at the spot of floor between her chained feet with slowly widening eyes. Her expression had gradually eroded into perplexion, her furrowed brow loosening into surprise. Now she turned to face Hurley directly. 
They found their voice again. "What do you mean?"
"About the murder."
Her bewilderment was genuine. Hurley could not see how it could have been otherwise, with the way that she blinked fast, as though trying to clear her vision of sleep in the morning. But she should have known, at least, that the murder conviction was a possibility. "I said we can't just ignore it." 
"Who..." The word came out cracked as her parched lips. She cleared her throat, then. She swallowed her spit and seemed to pull something back inside herself along with it, something that she had let spill out by accident. Her eyes didn't look quite so wild, even as she breathed more quickly. "So who do they say I killed?" 
She hadn't a goddamn clue.
"Bank teller. A Mr. Miles Abernathy, from the First Bank of Goldcliff. He was killed during the burglary. A whole bunch of witnesses spotted someone with your description running from the place." They weren't sure if the last sentence was to inform the Raven or to give themself a reminder. "You don't remem--you didn't know?"
"Didn't hear that, no." She had been nodding along as they spoke, as though she were still learning how to nod.
"So you didn't do it?"
She acted as if she hadn't heard.
"Well..." They grasped at anything. "Well, if you didn't do it, that'll come out in the trial."
That brought her back, seemingly, to herself. Her eyes went cold and narrow again, squinting at more than seeing what was before her. "Get out," she muttered, not looking their way.
11 notes · View notes
mxamalgam · 6 months ago
Text
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain
Table of Contents
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer.............................................................................................................................1
Mark Twain....................................................................................................................................................2
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
i
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer 1
Mark Twain
P R E F A C E
MOST of the adventures recorded in this book really occurred; one or two were experiences of my own, the
rest those of boys who were schoolmates of mine. Huck Finn is drawn from life; Tom Sawyer also, but not from
an individual −− he is a combination of the characteristics of three boys whom I knew, and therefore belongs to
the composite order of architecture.
The odd superstitions touched upon were all prevalent among children and slaves in the West at the period of
this story −− that is to say, thirty or forty years ago.
Although my book is intended mainly for the entertainment of boys and girls, I hope it will not be shunned by
men and women on that account, for part of my plan has been to try to pleasantly remind adults of what they once
were themselves, and of how they felt and thought and talked, and what queer enterprises they sometimes
engaged in.
THE AUTHOR.
HARTFORD, 1876.
T O M S A W Y E R
CHAPTER I
"TOM!"
No answer.
"TOM!"
No answer.
"What's gone with that boy, I wonder? You TOM!"
No answer.
The old lady pulled her spectacles down and looked over them about the room; then she put them up and
looked out under them. She seldom or never looked THROUGH them for so small a thing as a boy; they were her
state pair, the pride of her heart, and were built for "style," not service −− she could have seen through a pair of
stove−lids just as well. She looked perplexed for a moment, and then said, not fiercely, but still loud enough for
the furniture to hear:
"Well, I lay if I get hold of you I'll −−"
She did not finish, for by this time she was bending down and punching under the bed with the broom, and so
she needed breath to punctuate the punches with. She resurrected nothing but the cat.
"I never did see the beat of that boy!"
She went to the open door and stood in it and looked out among the tomato vines and "jimpson" weeds that
constituted the garden. No Tom. So she lifted up her voice at an angle calculated for distance and shouted:
"Y−o−u−u TOM!"
There was a slight noise behind her and she turned just in time to seize a small boy by the slack of his
roundabout and arrest his flight.
"There! I might 'a' thought of that closet. What you been doing in there?"
"Nothing."
"Nothing! Look at your hands. And look at your mouth. What IS that truck?"
"I don't know, aunt."
"Well, I know. It's jam −− that's what it is. Forty times I've said if you didn't let that jam alone I'd skin you.
Hand me that switch."
The switch hovered in the air −− the peril was desperate −−
"My! Look behind you, aunt!"
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 2
The old lady whirled round, and snatched her skirts out of danger. The lad fled on the instant, scrambled up the
high board−fence, and disappeared over it.
His aunt Polly stood surprised a moment, and then broke into a gentle laugh.
"Hang the boy, can't I never learn anything? Ain't he played me tricks enough like that for me to be looking out
for him by this time? But old fools is the biggest fools there is. Can't learn an old dog new tricks, as the saying is.
But my goodness, he never plays them alike, two days, and how is a body to know what's coming? He 'pears to
know just how long he can torment me before I get my dander up, and he knows if he can make out to put me off
for a minute or make me laugh, it's all down again and I can't hit him a lick. I ain't doing my duty by that boy, and
that's the Lord's truth, goodness knows. Spare the rod and spile the child, as the Good Book says. I'm a laying up
sin and suffering for us both, I know. He's full of the Old Scratch, but laws−a−me! he's my own dead sister's boy,
poor thing, and I ain't got the heart to lash him, somehow. Every time I let him off, my conscience does hurt me
so, and every time I hit him my old heart most breaks. Well−a−well, man that is born of woman is of few days
and full of trouble, as the Scripture says, and I reckon it's so. He'll play hookey this evening, * and [*
Southwestern for "afternoon"] I'll just be obleeged to make him work, to−morrow, to punish him. It's mighty hard
to make him work Saturdays, when all the boys is having holiday, but he hates work more than he hates anything
else, and I've GOT to do some of my duty by him, or I'll be the ruination of the child."
Tom did play hookey, and he had a very good time. He got back home barely in season to help Jim, the small
colored boy, saw next−day's wood and split the kindlings before supper −− at least he was there in time to tell his
adventures to Jim while Jim did three−fourths of the work. Tom's younger brother (or rather half−brother) Sid
was already through with his part of the work (picking up chips), for he was a quiet boy, and had no adventurous,
troublesome ways.
While Tom was eating his supper, and stealing sugar as opportunity offered, Aunt Polly asked him questions
that were full of guile, and very deep −− for she wanted to trap him into damaging revealments. Like many other
simple−hearted souls, it was her pet vanity to believe she was endowed with a talent for dark and mysterious
diplomacy, and she loved to contemplate her most transparent devices as marvels of low cunning. Said she:
"Tom, it was middling warm in school, warn't it?"
"Yes'm."
"Powerful warm, warn't it?"
"Yes'm."
"Didn't you want to go in a−swimming, Tom?"
A bit of a scare shot through Tom −− a touch of uncomfortable suspicion. He searched Aunt Polly's face, but it
told him nothing. So he said:
"No'm −− well, not very much."
The old lady reached out her hand and felt Tom's shirt, and said:
"But you ain't too warm now, though." And it flattered her to reflect that she had discovered that the shirt was
dry without anybody knowing that that was what she had in her mind. But in spite of her, Tom knew where the
wind lay, now. So he forestalled what might be the next move:
"Some of us pumped on our heads −− mine's damp yet. See?"
Aunt Polly was vexed to think she had overlooked that bit of circumstantial evidence, and missed a trick. Then
she had a new inspiration:
"Tom, you didn't have to undo your shirt collar where I sewed it, to pump on your head, did you? Unbutton
your jacket!"
The trouble vanished out of Tom's face. He opened his jacket. His shirt collar was securely sewed.
"Bother! Well, go 'long with you. I'd made sure you'd played hookey and been a−swimming. But I forgive ye,
Tom. I reckon you're a kind of a singed cat, as the saying is −− better'n you look. THIS time."
She was half sorry her sagacity had miscarried, and half glad that Tom had stumbled into obedient conduct for
once.
But Sidney said:
"Well, now, if I didn't think you sewed his collar with white thread, but it's black."
"Why, I did sew it with white! Tom!"
But Tom did not wait for the rest. As he went out at the door he said:
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 3
"Siddy, I'll lick you for that."
In a safe place Tom examined two large needles which were thrust into the lapels of his jacket, and had thread
bound about them −− one needle carried white thread and the other black. He said:
"She'd never noticed if it hadn't been for Sid. Confound it! sometimes she sews it with white, and sometimes
she sews it with black. I wish to geeminy she'd stick to one or t'other −− I can't keep the run of 'em. But I bet you
I'll lam Sid for that. I'll learn him!"
He was not the Model Boy of the village. He knew the model boy very well though −− and loathed him.
Within two minutes, or even less, he had forgotten all his troubles. Not because his troubles were one whit less
heavy and bitter to him than a man's are to a man, but because a new and powerful interest bore them down and
drove them out of his mind for the time −− just as men's misfortunes are forgotten in the excitement of new
enterprises. This new interest was a valued novelty in whistling, which he had just acquired from a negro, and he
was suffering to practise it undisturbed. It consisted in a peculiar bird−like turn, a sort of liquid warble, produced
by touching the tongue to the roof of the mouth at short intervals in the midst of the music −− the reader probably
remembers how to do it, if he has ever been a boy. Diligence and attention soon gave him the knack of it, and he
strode down the street with his mouth full of harmony and his soul full of gratitude. He felt much as an
astronomer feels who has discovered a new planet −− no doubt, as far as strong, deep, unalloyed pleasure is
concerned, the advantage was with the boy, not the astronomer.
The summer evenings were long. It was not dark, yet. Presently Tom checked his whistle. A stranger was
before him −− a boy a shade larger than himself. A new−comer of any age or either sex was an impressive
curiosity in the poor little shabby village of St. Petersburg. This boy was well dressed, too −− well dressed on a
week−day. This was simply astounding. His cap was a dainty thing, his closebuttoned blue cloth roundabout was
new and natty, and so were his pantaloons. He had shoes on −− and it was only Friday. He even wore a necktie, a
bright bit of ribbon. He had a citified air about him that ate into Tom's vitals. The more Tom stared at the splendid
marvel, the higher he turned up his nose at his finery and the shabbier and shabbier his own outfit seemed to him
to grow. Neither boy spoke. If one moved, the other moved −− but only sidewise, in a circle; they kept face to
face and eye to eye all the time. Finally Tom said:
"I can lick you!"
"I'd like to see you try it."
"Well, I can do it."
"No you can't, either."
"Yes I can."
"No you can't."
"I can."
"You can't."
"Can!"
"Can't!"
An uncomfortable pause. Then Tom said:
"What's your name?"
"'Tisn't any of your business, maybe."
"Well I 'low I'll MAKE it my business."
"Well why don't you?"
"If you say much, I will."
"Much −− much −− MUCH. There now."
"Oh, you think you're mighty smart, DON'T you? I could lick you with one hand tied behind me, if I wanted
to."
"Well why don't you DO it? You SAY you can do it."
"Well I WILL, if you fool with me."
"Oh yes −− I've seen whole families in the same fix."
"Smarty! You think you're SOME, now, DON'T you? Oh, what a hat!"
"You can lump that hat if you don't like it. I dare you to knock it off −− and anybody that'll take a dare will
suck eggs."
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 4
"You're a liar!"
"You're another."
"You're a fighting liar and dasn't take it up."
"Aw −− take a walk!"
"Say −− if you give me much more of your sass I'll take and bounce a rock off'n your head."
"Oh, of COURSE you will."
"Well I WILL."
"Well why don't you DO it then? What do you keep SAYING you will for? Why don't you DO it? It's because
you're afraid."
"I AIN'T afraid."
"You are."
"I ain't."
"You are."
Another pause, and more eying and sidling around each other. Presently they were shoulder to shoulder. Tom
said:
"Get away from here!"
"Go away yourself!"
"I won't."
"I won't either."
So they stood, each with a foot placed at an angle as a brace, and both shoving with might and main, and
glowering at each other with hate. But neither could get an advantage. After struggling till both were hot and
flushed, each relaxed his strain with watchful caution, and Tom said:
"You're a coward and a pup. I'll tell my big brother on you, and he can thrash you with his little finger, and I'll
make him do it, too."
"What do I care for your big brother? I've got a brother that's bigger than he is −− and what's more, he can
throw him over that fence, too." [Both brothers were imaginary.]
"That's a lie."
"YOUR saying so don't make it so."
Tom drew a line in the dust with his big toe, and said:
"I dare you to step over that, and I'll lick you till you can't stand up. Anybody that'll take a dare will steal
sheep."
The new boy stepped over promptly, and said:
"Now you said you'd do it, now let's see you do it."
"Don't you crowd me now; you better look out."
"Well, you SAID you'd do it −− why don't you do it?"
"By jingo! for two cents I WILL do it."
The new boy took two broad coppers out of his pocket and held them out with derision. Tom struck them to
the ground. In an instant both boys were rolling and tumbling in the dirt, gripped together like cats; and for the
space of a minute they tugged and tore at each other's hair and clothes, punched and scratched each other's nose,
and covered themselves with dust and glory. Presently the confusion took form, and through the fog of battle Tom
appeared, seated astride the new boy, and pounding him with his fists. "Holler 'nuff!" said he.
The boy only struggled to free himself. He was crying −− mainly from rage.
"Holler 'nuff!" −− and the pounding went on.
At last the stranger got out a smothered "'Nuff!" and Tom let him up and said:
"Now that'll learn you. Better look out who you're fooling with next time."
The new boy went off brushing the dust from his clothes, sobbing, snuffling, and occasionally looking back
and shaking his head and threatening what he would do to Tom the "next time he caught him out." To which Tom
responded with jeers, and started off in high feather, and as soon as his back was turned the new boy snatched up
a stone, threw it and hit him between the shoulders and then turned tail and ran like an antelope. Tom chased the
traitor home, and thus found out where he lived. He then held a position at the gate for some time, daring the
enemy to come outside, but the enemy only made faces at him through the window and declined. At last the
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 5
enemy's mother appeared, and called Tom a bad, vicious, vulgar child, and ordered him away. So he went away;
but he said he "'lowed" to "lay" for that boy.
He got home pretty late that night, and when he climbed cautiously in at the window, he uncovered an
ambuscade, in the person of his aunt; and when she saw the state his clothes were in her resolution to turn his
Saturday holiday into captivity at hard labor became adamantine in its firmness.
CHAPTER II
SATURDAY morning was come, and all the summer world was bright and fresh, and brimming with life.
There was a song in every heart; and if the heart was young the music issued at the lips. There was cheer in every
face and a spring in every step. The locust−trees were in bloom and the fragrance of the blossoms filled the air.
Cardiff Hill, beyond the village and above it, was green with vegetation and it lay just far enough away to seem a
Delectable Land, dreamy, reposeful, and inviting.
Tom appeared on the sidewalk with a bucket of whitewash and a long−handled brush. He surveyed the fence,
and all gladness left him and a deep melancholy settled down upon his spirit. Thirty yards of board fence nine feet
high. Life to him seemed hollow, and existence but a burden. Sighing, he dipped his brush and passed it along the
topmost plank; repeated the operation; did it again; compared the insignificant whitewashed streak with the
far−reaching continent of unwhitewashed fence, and sat down on a tree−box discouraged. Jim came skipping out
at the gate with a tin pail, and singing Buffalo Gals. Bringing water from the town pump had always been hateful
work in Tom's eyes, before, but now it did not strike him so. He remembered that there was company at the pump.
White, mulatto, and negro boys and girls were always there waiting their turns, resting, trading playthings,
quarrelling, fighting, skylarking. And he remembered that although the pump was only a hundred and fifty yards
off, Jim never got back with a bucket of water under an hour −− and even then somebody generally had to go after
him. Tom said:
"Say, Jim, I'll fetch the water if you'll whitewash some."
Jim shook his head and said:
"Can't, Mars Tom. Ole missis, she tole me I got to go an' git dis water an' not stop foolin' roun' wid anybody.
She say she spec' Mars Tom gwine to ax me to whitewash, an' so she tole me go 'long an' 'tend to my own
business −− she 'lowed SHE'D 'tend to de whitewashin'."
"Oh, never you mind what she said, Jim. That's the way she always talks. Gimme the bucket −− I won't be
gone only a a minute. SHE won't ever know."
"Oh, I dasn't, Mars Tom. Ole missis she'd take an' tar de head off'n me. 'Deed she would."
"SHE! She never licks anybody −− whacks 'em over the head with her thimble −− and who cares for that, I'd
like to know. She talks awful, but talk don't hurt −− anyways it don't if she don't cry. Jim, I'll give you a marvel.
I'll give you a white alley!"
Jim began to waver.
"White alley, Jim! And it's a bully taw."
"My! Dat's a mighty gay marvel, I tell you! But Mars Tom I's powerful 'fraid ole missis −−"
"And besides, if you will I'll show you my sore toe."
Jim was only human −− this attraction was too much for him. He put down his pail, took the white alley, and
bent over the toe with absorbing interest while the bandage was being unwound. In another moment he was flying
down the street with his pail and a tingling rear, Tom was whitewashing with vigor, and Aunt Polly was retiring
from the field with a slipper in her hand and triumph in her eye.
But Tom's energy did not last. He began to think of the fun he had planned for this day, and his sorrows
multiplied. Soon the free boys would come tripping along on all sorts of delicious expeditions, and they would
make a world of fun of him for having to work −− the very thought of it burnt him like fire. He got out his
worldly wealth and examined it −− bits of toys, marbles, and trash; enough to buy an exchange of WORK, maybe,
but not half enough to buy so much as half an hour of pure freedom. So he returned his straitened means to his
pocket, and gave up the idea of trying to buy the boys. At this dark and hopeless moment an inspiration burst
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 6
upon him! Nothing less than a great, magnificent inspiration.
He took up his brush and went tranquilly to work. Ben Rogers hove in sight presently −− the very boy, of all
boys, whose ridicule he had been dreading. Ben's gait was the hop−skip−and−jump −− proof enough that his heart
was light and his anticipations high. He was eating an apple, and giving a long, melodious whoop, at intervals,
followed by a deep−toned dingdong −dong, ding−dong−dong, for he was personating a steamboat. As he drew
near, he slackened speed, took the middle of the street, leaned far over to starboard and rounded to ponderously
and with laborious pomp and circumstance −− for he was personating the Big Missouri, and considered himself to
be drawing nine feet of water. He was boat and captain and engine−bells combined, so he had to imagine himself
standing on his own hurricane−deck giving the orders and executing them:
"Stop her, sir! Ting−a−ling−ling!" The headway ran almost out, and he drew up slowly toward the sidewalk.
"Ship up to back! Ting−a−ling−ling!" His arms straightened and stiffened down his sides.
"Set her back on the stabboard! Ting−a−ling−ling! Chow! ch−chow−wow! Chow!" His right hand, meantime,
describing stately circles −− for it was representing a forty−foot wheel.
"Let her go back on the labboard! Ting−a−lingling ! Chow−ch−chow−chow!" The left hand began to describe
circles.
"Stop the stabboard! Ting−a−ling−ling! Stop the labboard! Come ahead on the stabboard! Stop her! Let your
outside turn over slow! Ting−a−ling−ling! Chow−ow−ow! Get out that head−line! LIVELY now! Come −− out
with your spring−line −− what're you about there! Take a turn round that stump with the bight of it! Stand by that
stage, now −− let her go! Done with the engines, sir! Ting−a−ling−ling! SH'T! S'H'T! SH'T!" (trying the
gauge−cocks).
Tom went on whitewashing −− paid no attention to the steamboat. Ben stared a moment and then said:
"Hi−YI! YOU'RE up a stump, ain't you!"
No answer. Tom surveyed his last touch with the eye of an artist, then he gave his brush another gentle sweep
and surveyed the result, as before. Ben ranged up alongside of him. Tom's mouth watered for the apple, but he
stuck to his work. Ben said:
"Hello, old chap, you got to work, hey?"
Tom wheeled suddenly and said:
"Why, it's you, Ben! I warn't noticing."
"Say −− I'm going in a−swimming, I am. Don't you wish you could? But of course you'd druther WORK −−
wouldn't you? Course you would!"
Tom contemplated the boy a bit, and said:
"What do you call work?"
"Why, ain't THAT work?"
Tom resumed his whitewashing, and answered carelessly:
"Well, maybe it is, and maybe it ain't. All I know, is, it suits Tom Sawyer."
"Oh come, now, you don't mean to let on that you LIKE it?"
The brush continued to move.
"Like it? Well, I don't see why I oughtn't to like it. Does a boy get a chance to whitewash a fence every day?"
That put the thing in a new light. Ben stopped nibbling his apple. Tom swept his brush daintily back and forth
−− stepped back to note the effect −− added a touch here and there −− criticised the effect again −− Ben watching
every move and getting more and more interested, more and more absorbed. Presently he said:
"Say, Tom, let ME whitewash a little."
Tom considered, was about to consent; but he altered his mind:
"No −− no −− I reckon it wouldn't hardly do, Ben. You see, Aunt Polly's awful particular about this fence −−
right here on the street, you know −− but if it was the back fence I wouldn't mind and SHE wouldn't. Yes, she's
awful particular about this fence; it's got to be done very careful; I reckon there ain't one boy in a thousand, maybe
two thousand, that can do it the way it's got to be done."
"No −− is that so? Oh come, now −− lemme just try. Only just a little −− I'd let YOU, if you was me, Tom."
"Ben, I'd like to, honest injun; but Aunt Polly −− well, Jim wanted to do it, but she wouldn't let him; Sid
wanted to do it, and she wouldn't let Sid. Now don't you see how I'm fixed? If you was to tackle this fence and
anything was to happen to it −−"
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 7
"Oh, shucks, I'll be just as careful. Now lemme try. Say −− I'll give you the core of my apple."
"Well, here −− No, Ben, now don't. I'm afeard −−"
"I'll give you ALL of it!"
Tom gave up the brush with reluctance in his face, but alacrity in his heart. And while the late steamer Big
Missouri worked and sweated in the sun, the retired artist sat on a barrel in the shade close by, dangled his legs,
munched his apple, and planned the slaughter of more innocents. There was no lack of material; boys happened
along every little while; they came to jeer, but remained to whitewash. By the time Ben was fagged out, Tom had
traded the next chance to Billy Fisher for a kite, in good repair; and when he played out, Johnny Miller bought in
for a dead rat and a string to swing it with −− and so on, and so on, hour after hour. And when the middle of the
afternoon came, from being a poor poverty−stricken boy in the morning, Tom was literally rolling in wealth. He
had besides the things before mentioned, twelve marbles, part of a jews−harp, a piece of blue bottle−glass to look
through, a spool cannon, a key that wouldn't unlock anything, a fragment of chalk, a glass stopper of a decanter, a
tin soldier, a couple of tadpoles, six fire−crackers, a kitten with only one eye, a brass doorknob, a dog−collar −−
but no dog −− the handle of a knife, four pieces of orange−peel, and a dilapidated old window sash.
He had had a nice, good, idle time all the while −− plenty of company −− and the fence had three coats of
whitewash on it! If he hadn't run out of whitewash he would have bankrupted every boy in the village.
Tom said to himself that it was not such a hollow world, after all. He had discovered a great law of human
action, without knowing it −− namely, that in order to make a man or a boy covet a thing, it is only necessary to
make the thing difficult to attain. If he had been a great and wise philosopher, like the writer of this book, he
would now have comprehended that Work consists of whatever a body is OBLIGED to do, and that Play consists
of whatever a body is not obliged to do. And this would help him to understand why constructing artificial
flowers or performing on a tread−mill is work, while rolling ten−pins or climbing Mont Blanc is only amusement.
There are wealthy gentlemen in England who drive four−horse passengercoaches twenty or thirty miles on a daily
line, in the summer, because the privilege costs them considerable money; but if they were offered wages for the
service, that would turn it into work and then they would resign.
The boy mused awhile over the substantial change which had taken place in his worldly circumstances, and
then wended toward headquarters to report.
CHAPTER III
TOM presented himself before Aunt Polly, who was sitting by an open window in a pleasant rearward
apartment, which was bedroom, breakfast−room, dining−room, and library, combined. The balmy summer air, the
restful quiet, the odor of the flowers, and the drowsing murmur of the bees had had their effect, and she was
nodding over her knitting −− for she had no company but the cat, and it was asleep in her lap. Her spectacles were
propped up on her gray head for safety. She had thought that of course Tom had deserted long ago, and she
wondered at seeing him place himself in her power again in this intrepid way. He said: "Mayn't I go and play
now, aunt?"
"What, a'ready? How much have you done?"
"It's all done, aunt."
"Tom, don't lie to me −− I can't bear it."
"I ain't, aunt; it IS all done."
Aunt Polly placed small trust in such evidence. She went out to see for herself; and she would have been
content to find twenty per cent. of Tom's statement true. When she found the entire fence whitewashed, and not
only whitewashed but elaborately coated and recoated, and even a streak added to the ground, her astonishment
was almost unspeakable. She said:
"Well, I never! There's no getting round it, you can work when you're a mind to, Tom." And then she diluted
the compliment by adding, "But it's powerful seldom you're a mind to, I'm bound to say. Well, go 'long and play;
but mind you get back some time in a week, or I'll tan you."
She was so overcome by the splendor of his achievement that she took him into the closet and selected a
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 8
choice apple and delivered it to him, along with an improving lecture upon the added value and flavor a treat took
to itself when it came without sin through virtuous effort. And while she closed with a happy Scriptural flourish,
he "hooked" a doughnut.
Then he skipped out, and saw Sid just starting up the outside stairway that led to the back rooms on the second
floor. Clods were handy and the air was full of them in a twinkling. They raged around Sid like a hail−storm; and
before Aunt Polly could collect her surprised faculties and sally to the rescue, six or seven clods had taken
personal effect, and Tom was over the fence and gone. There was a gate, but as a general thing he was too
crowded for time to make use of it. His soul was at peace, now that he had settled with Sid for calling attention to
his black thread and getting him into trouble.
Tom skirted the block, and came round into a muddy alley that led by the back of his aunt's cowstable. He
presently got safely beyond the reach of capture and punishment, and hastened toward the public square of the
village, where two "military" companies of boys had met for conflict, according to previous appointment. Tom
was General of one of these armies, Joe Harper (a bosom friend) General of the other. These two great
commanders did not condescend to fight in person −− that being better suited to the still smaller fry −− but sat
together on an eminence and conducted the field operations by orders delivered through aides−de−camp. Tom's
army won a great victory, after a long and hard−fought battle. Then the dead were counted, prisoners exchanged,
the terms of the next disagreement agreed upon, and the day for the necessary battle appointed; after which the
armies fell into line and marched away, and Tom turned homeward alone.
As he was passing by the house where Jeff Thatcher lived, he saw a new girl in the garden −− a lovely little
blue−eyed creature with yellow hair plaited into two long−tails, white summer frock and embroidered pantalettes.
The fresh−crowned hero fell without firing a shot. A certain Amy Lawrence vanished out of his heart and left not
even a memory of herself behind. He had thought he loved her to distraction; he had regarded his passion as
adoration; and behold it was only a poor little evanescent partiality. He had been months winning her; she had
confessed hardly a week ago; he had been the happiest and the proudest boy in the world only seven short days,
and here in one instant of time she had gone out of his heart like a casual stranger whose visit is done.
He worshipped this new angel with furtive eye, till he saw that she had discovered him; then he pretended he
did not know she was present, and began to "show off" in all sorts of absurd boyish ways, in order to win her
admiration. He kept up this grotesque foolishness for some time; but by−and−by, while he was in the midst of
some dangerous gymnastic performances, he glanced aside and saw that the little girl was wending her way
toward the house. Tom came up to the fence and leaned on it, grieving, and hoping she would tarry yet awhile
longer. She halted a moment on the steps and then moved toward the door. Tom heaved a great sigh as she put her
foot on the threshold. But his face lit up, right away, for she tossed a pansy over the fence a moment before she
disappeared.
The boy ran around and stopped within a foot or two of the flower, and then shaded his eyes with his hand and
began to look down street as if he had discovered something of interest going on in that direction. Presently he
picked up a straw and began trying to balance it on his nose, with his head tilted far back; and as he moved from
side to side, in his efforts, he edged nearer and nearer toward the pansy; finally his bare foot rested upon it, his
pliant toes closed upon it, and he hopped away with the treasure and disappeared round the corner. But only for a
minute −− only while he could button the flower inside his jacket, next his heart −− or next his stomach, possibly,
for he was not much posted in anatomy, and not hypercritical, anyway.
He returned, now, and hung about the fence till nightfall, "showing off," as before; but the girl never exhibited
herself again, though Tom comforted himself a little with the hope that she had been near some window,
meantime, and been aware of his attentions. Finally he strode home reluctantly, with his poor head full of visions.
All through supper his spirits were so high that his aunt wondered "what had got into the child." He took a
good scolding about clodding Sid, and did not seem to mind it in the least. He tried to steal sugar under his aunt's
very nose, and got his knuckles rapped for it. He said:
"Aunt, you don't whack Sid when he takes it."
"Well, Sid don't torment a body the way you do. You'd be always into that sugar if I warn't watching you."
Presently she stepped into the kitchen, and Sid, happy in his immunity, reached for the sugar−bowl −− a sort of
glorying over Tom which was wellnigh unbearable. But Sid's fingers slipped and the bowl dropped and broke.
Tom was in ecstasies. In such ecstasies that he even controlled his tongue and was silent. He said to himself that
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 9
he would not speak a word, even when his aunt came in, but would sit perfectly still till she asked who did the
mischief; and then he would tell, and there would be nothing so good in the world as to see that pet model "catch
it." He was so brimful of exultation that he could hardly hold himself when the old lady came back and stood
above the wreck discharging lightnings of wrath from over her spectacles. He said to himself, "Now it's coming!"
And the next instant he was sprawling on the floor! The potent palm was uplifted to strike again when Tom cried
out:
"Hold on, now, what 'er you belting ME for? −− Sid broke it!"
Aunt Polly paused, perplexed, and Tom looked for healing pity. But when she got her tongue again, she only
said:
"Umf! Well, you didn't get a lick amiss, I reckon. You been into some other audacious mischief when I wasn't
around, like enough."
Then her conscience reproached her, and she yearned to say something kind and loving; but she judged that
this would be construed into a confession that she had been in the wrong, and discipline forbade that. So she kept
silence, and went about her affairs with a troubled heart. Tom sulked in a corner and exalted his woes. He knew
that in her heart his aunt was on her knees to him, and he was morosely gratified by the consciousness of it. He
would hang out no signals, he would take notice of none. He knew that a yearning glance fell upon him, now and
then, through a film of tears, but he refused recognition of it. He pictured himself lying sick unto death and his
aunt bending over him beseeching one little forgiving word, but he would turn his face to the wall, and die with
that word unsaid. Ah, how would she feel then? And he pictured himself brought home from the river, dead, with
his curls all wet, and his sore heart at rest. How she would throw herself upon him, and how her tears would fall
like rain, and her lips pray God to give her back her boy and she would never, never abuse him any more! But he
would lie there cold and white and make no sign −− a poor little sufferer, whose griefs were at an end. He so
worked upon his feelings with the pathos of these dreams, that he had to keep swallowing, he was so like to
choke; and his eyes swam in a blur of water, which overflowed when he winked, and ran down and trickled from
the end of his nose. And such a luxury to him was this petting of his sorrows, that he could not bear to have any
worldly cheeriness or any grating delight intrude upon it; it was too sacred for such contact; and so, presently,
when his cousin Mary danced in, all alive with the joy of seeing home again after an age−long visit of one week
to the country, he got up and moved in clouds and darkness out at one door as she brought song and sunshine in at
the other.
He wandered far from the accustomed haunts of boys, and sought desolate places that were in harmony with
his spirit. A log raft in the river invited him, and he seated himself on its outer edge and contemplated the dreary
vastness of the stream, wishing, the while, that he could only be drowned, all at once and unconsciously, without
undergoing the uncomfortable routine devised by nature. Then he thought of his flower. He got it out, rumpled
and wilted, and it mightily increased his dismal felicity. He wondered if she would pity him if she knew? Would
she cry, and wish that she had a right to put her arms around his neck and comfort him? Or would she turn coldly
away like all the hollow world? This picture brought such an agony of pleasurable suffering that he worked it over
and over again in his mind and set it up in new and varied lights, till he wore it threadbare. At last he rose up
sighing and departed in the darkness.
About half−past nine or ten o'clock he came along the deserted street to where the Adored Unknown lived; he
paused a moment; no sound fell upon his listening ear; a candle was casting a dull glow upon the curtain of a
second−story window. Was the sacred presence there? He climbed the fence, threaded his stealthy way through
the plants, till he stood under that window; he looked up at it long, and with emotion; then he laid him down on
the ground under it, disposing himself upon his back, with his hands clasped upon his breast and holding his poor
wilted flower. And thus he would die −− out in the cold world, with no shelter over his homeless head, no friendly
hand to wipe the death−damps from his brow, no loving face to bend pityingly over him when the great agony
came. And thus SHE would see him when she looked out upon the glad morning, and oh! would she drop one
little tear upon his poor, lifeless form, would she heave one little sigh to see a bright young life so rudely blighted,
so untimely cut down?
The window went up, a maid−servant's discordant voice profaned the holy calm, and a deluge of water
drenched the prone martyr's remains!
The strangling hero sprang up with a relieving snort. There was a whiz as of a missile in the air, mingled with
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 10
the murmur of a curse, a sound as of shivering glass followed, and a small, vague form went over the fence and
shot away in the gloom.
Not long after, as Tom, all undressed for bed, was surveying his drenched garments by the light of a tallow dip,
Sid woke up; but if he had any dim idea of making any "references to allusions," he thought better of it and held
his peace, for there was danger in Tom's eye.
Tom turned in without the added vexation of prayers, and Sid made mental note of the omission.
CHAPTER IV
THE sun rose upon a tranquil world, and beamed down upon the peaceful village like a benediction. Breakfast
over, Aunt Polly had family worship: it began with a prayer built from the ground up of solid courses of Scriptural
quotations, welded together with a thin mortar of originality; and from the summit of this she delivered a grim
chapter of the Mosaic Law, as from Sinai.
Then Tom girded up his loins, so to speak, and went to work to "get his verses." Sid had learned his lesson
days before. Tom bent all his energies to the memorizing of five verses, and he chose part of the Sermon on the
Mount, because he could find no verses that were shorter. At the end of half an hour Tom had a vague general
idea of his lesson, but no more, for his mind was traversing the whole field of human thought, and his hands were
busy with distracting recreations. Mary took his book to hear him recite, and he tried to find his way through the
fog:
"Blessed are the −− a −− a −−"
"Poor" −−
"Yes −− poor; blessed are the poor −− a −− a −−"
"In spirit −−"
"In spirit; blessed are the poor in spirit, for they −− they −−"
"THEIRS −−"
"For THEIRS. Blessed are the poor in spirit, for theirs is the kingdom of heaven. Blessed are they that mourn,
for they −− they −−"
"Sh −−"
"For they −− a −−"
"S, H, A −−"
"For they S, H −− Oh, I don't know what it is!"
"SHALL!"
"Oh, SHALL! for they shall −− for they shall −− a −− a −− shall mourn −− a−− a −− blessed are they that shall
−− they that −− a −− they that shall mourn, for they shall −− a −− shall WHAT? Why don't you tell me, Mary? −−
what do you want to be so mean for?"
"Oh, Tom, you poor thick−headed thing, I'm not teasing you. I wouldn't do that. You must go and learn it
again. Don't you be discouraged, Tom, you'll manage it −− and if you do, I'll give you something ever so nice.
There, now, that's a good boy."
"All right! What is it, Mary, tell me what it is."
"Never you mind, Tom. You know if I say it's nice, it is nice."
"You bet you that's so, Mary. All right, I'll tackle it again."
And he did "tackle it again" −− and under the double pressure of curiosity and prospective gain he did it with
such spirit that he accomplished a shining success. Mary gave him a brand−new "Barlow" knife worth twelve and
a half cents; and the convulsion of delight that swept his system shook him to his foundations. True, the knife
would not cut anything, but it was a "sure−enough" Barlow, and there was inconceivable grandeur in that −−
though where the Western boys ever got the idea that such a weapon could possibly be counterfeited to its injury
is an imposing mystery and will always remain so, perhaps. Tom contrived to scarify the cupboard with it, and
was arranging to begin on the bureau, when he was called off to dress for Sunday−school.
Mary gave him a tin basin of water and a piece of soap, and he went outside the door and set the basin on a
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 11
little bench there; then he dipped the soap in the water and laid it down; turned up his sleeves; poured out the
water on the ground, gently, and then entered the kitchen and began to wipe his face diligently on the towel
behind the door. But Mary removed the towel and said:
"Now ain't you ashamed, Tom. You mustn't be so bad. Water won't hurt you."
Tom was a trifle disconcerted. The basin was refilled, and this time he stood over it a little while, gathering
resolution; took in a big breath and began. When he entered the kitchen presently, with both eyes shut and groping
for the towel with his hands, an honorable testimony of suds and water was dripping from his face. But when he
emerged from the towel, he was not yet satisfactory, for the clean territory stopped short at his chin and his jaws,
like a mask; below and beyond this line there was a dark expanse of unirrigated soil that spread downward in
front and backward around his neck. Mary took him in hand, and when she was done with him he was a man and
a brother, without distinction of color, and his saturated hair was neatly brushed, and its short curls wrought into a
dainty and symmetrical general effect. [He privately smoothed out the curls, with labor and difficulty, and
plastered his hair close down to his head; for he held curls to be effeminate, and his own filled his life with
bitterness.] Then Mary got out a suit of his clothing that had been used only on Sundays during two years −− they
were simply called his "other clothes" −− and so by that we know the size of his wardrobe. The girl "put him to
rights" after he had dressed himself; she buttoned his neat roundabout up to his chin, turned his vast shirt collar
down over his shoulders, brushed him off and crowned him with his speckled straw hat. He now looked
exceedingly improved and uncomfortable. He was fully as uncomfortable as he looked; for there was a restraint
about whole clothes and cleanliness that galled him. He hoped that Mary would forget his shoes, but the hope was
blighted; she coated them thoroughly with tallow, as was the custom, and brought them out. He lost his temper
and said he was always being made to do everything he didn't want to do. But Mary said, persuasively:
"Please, Tom −− that's a good boy."
So he got into the shoes snarling. Mary was soon ready, and the three children set out for Sunday−school −− a
place that Tom hated with his whole heart; but Sid and Mary were fond of it.
Sabbath−school hours were from nine to half−past ten; and then church service. Two of the children always
remained for the sermon voluntarily, and the other always remained too −− for stronger reasons. The church's
high−backed, uncushioned pews would seat about three hundred persons; the edifice was but a small, plain affair,
with a sort of pine board tree−box on top of it for a steeple. At the door Tom dropped back a step and accosted a
Sunday−dressed comrade:
"Say, Billy, got a yaller ticket?"
"Yes."
"What'll you take for her?"
"What'll you give?"
"Piece of lickrish and a fish−hook."
"Less see 'em."
Tom exhibited. They were satisfactory, and the property changed hands. Then Tom traded a couple of white
alleys for three red tickets, and some small trifle or other for a couple of blue ones. He waylaid other boys as they
came, and went on buying tickets of various colors ten or fifteen minutes longer. He entered the church, now, with
a swarm of clean and noisy boys and girls, proceeded to his seat and started a quarrel with the first boy that came
handy. The teacher, a grave, elderly man, interfered; then turned his back a moment and Tom pulled a boy's hair
in the next bench, and was absorbed in his book when the boy turned around; stuck a pin in another boy,
presently, in order to hear him say "Ouch!" and got a new reprimand from his teacher. Tom's whole class were of
a pattern −− restless, noisy, and troublesome. When they came to recite their lessons, not one of them knew his
verses perfectly, but had to be prompted all along. However, they worried through, and each got his reward −− in
small blue tickets, each with a passage of Scripture on it; each blue ticket was pay for two verses of the recitation.
Ten blue tickets equalled a red one, and could be exchanged for it; ten red tickets equalled a yellow one; for ten
yellow tickets the superintendent gave a very plainly bound Bible (worth forty cents in those easy times) to the
pupil. How many of my readers would have the industry and application to memorize two thousand verses, even
for a Dore Bible? And yet Mary had acquired two Bibles in this way −− it was the patient work of two years −−
and a boy of German parentage had won four or five. He once recited three thousand verses without stopping; but
the strain upon his mental faculties was too great, and he was little better than an idiot from that day forth −− a
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 12
grievous misfortune for the school, for on great occasions, before company, the superintendent (as Tom expressed
it) had always made this boy come out and "spread himself." Only the older pupils managed to keep their tickets
and stick to their tedious work long enough to get a Bible, and so the delivery of one of these prizes was a rare
and noteworthy circumstance; the successful pupil was so great and conspicuous for that day that on the spot
every scholar's heart was fired with a fresh ambition that often lasted a couple of weeks. It is possible that Tom's
mental stomach had never really hungered for one of those prizes, but unquestionably his entire being had for
many a day longed for the glory and the eclat that came with it.
In due course the superintendent stood up in front of the pulpit, with a closed hymn−book in his hand and his
forefinger inserted between its leaves, and commanded attention. When a Sunday−school superintendent makes
his customary little speech, a hymn−book in the hand is as necessary as is the inevitable sheet of music in the
hand of a singer who stands forward on the platform and sings a solo at a concert −− though why, is a mystery:
for neither the hymn−book nor the sheet of music is ever referred to by the sufferer. This superintendent was a
slim creature of thirty−five, with a sandy goatee and short sandy hair; he wore a stiff standing−collar whose upper
edge almost reached his ears and whose sharp points curved forward abreast the corners of his mouth −− a fence
that compelled a straight lookout ahead, and a turning of the whole body when a side view was required; his chin
was propped on a spreading cravat which was as broad and as long as a bank−note, and had fringed ends; his boot
toes were turned sharply up, in the fashion of the day, like sleighrunners −− an effect patiently and laboriously
produced by the young men by sitting with their toes pressed against a wall for hours together. Mr. Walters was
very earnest of mien, and very sincere and honest at heart; and he held sacred things and places in such reverence,
and so separated them from worldly matters, that unconsciously to himself his Sunday−school voice had acquired
a peculiar intonation which was wholly absent on week−days. He began after this fashion:
"Now, children, I want you all to sit up just as straight and pretty as you can and give me all your attention for
a minute or two. There −− that is it. That is the way good little boys and girls should do. I see one little girl who is
looking out of the window −− I am afraid she thinks I am out there somewhere −− perhaps up in one of the trees
making a speech to the little birds. [Applausive titter.] I want to tell you how good it makes me feel to see so
many bright, clean little faces assembled in a place like this, learning to do right and be good." And so forth and
so on. It is not necessary to set down the rest of the oration. It was of a pattern which does not vary, and so it is
familiar to us all.
The latter third of the speech was marred by the resumption of fights and other recreations among certain of
the bad boys, and by fidgetings and whisperings that extended far and wide, washing even to the bases of isolated
and incorruptible rocks like Sid and Mary. But now every sound ceased suddenly, with the subsidence of Mr.
Walters' voice, and the conclusion of the speech was received with a burst of silent gratitude.
A good part of the whispering had been occasioned by an event which was more or less rare −− the entrance of
visitors: lawyer Thatcher, accompanied by a very feeble and aged man; a fine, portly, middle−aged gentleman
with iron−gray hair; and a dignified lady who was doubtless the latter's wife. The lady was leading a child. Tom
had been restless and full of chafings and repinings; conscience−smitten, too −− he could not meet Amy
Lawrence's eye, he could not brook her loving gaze. But when he saw this small new−comer his soul was all
ablaze with bliss in a moment. The next moment he was "showing off" with all his might −− cuffing boys, pulling
hair, making faces −− in a word, using every art that seemed likely to fascinate a girl and win her applause. His
exaltation had but one alloy −− the memory of his humiliation in this angel's garden −− and that record in sand
was fast washing out, under the waves of happiness that were sweeping over it now.
The visitors were given the highest seat of honor, and as soon as Mr. Walters' speech was finished, he
introduced them to the school. The middle−aged man turned out to be a prodigious personage −− no less a one
than the county judge −− altogether the most august creation these children had ever looked upon −− and they
wondered what kind of material he was made of −− and they half wanted to hear him roar, and were half afraid he
might, too. He was from Constantinople, twelve miles away −− so he had travelled, and seen the world −− these
very eyes had looked upon the county court−house −− which was said to have a tin roof. The awe which these
reflections inspired was attested by the impressive silence and the ranks of staring eyes. This was the great Judge
Thatcher, brother of their own lawyer. Jeff Thatcher immediately went forward, to be familiar with the great man
and be envied by the school. It would have been music to his soul to hear the whisperings:
"Look at him, Jim! He's a going up there. Say −− look! he's a going to shake hands with him −− he IS shaking
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 13
hands with him! By jings, don't you wish you was Jeff?"
Mr. Walters fell to "showing off," with all sorts of official bustlings and activities, giving orders, delivering
judgments, discharging directions here, there, everywhere that he could find a target. The librarian "showed off"
−− running hither and thither with his arms full of books and making a deal of the splutter and fuss that insect
authority delights in. The young lady teachers "showed off" −− bending sweetly over pupils that were lately being
boxed, lifting pretty warning fingers at bad little boys and patting good ones lovingly. The young gentlemen
teachers "showed off" with small scoldings and other little displays of authority and fine attention to discipline −−
and most of the teachers, of both sexes, found business up at the library, by the pulpit; and it was business that
frequently had to be done over again two or three times (with much seeming vexation). The little girls "showed
off" in various ways, and the little boys "showed off" with such diligence that the air was thick with paper wads
and the murmur of scufflings. And above it all the great man sat and beamed a majestic judicial smile upon all the
house, and warmed himself in the sun of his own grandeur −− for he was "showing off," too.
There was only one thing wanting to make Mr. Walters' ecstasy complete, and that was a chance to deliver a
Bible−prize and exhibit a prodigy. Several pupils had a few yellow tickets, but none had enough −− he had been
around among the star pupils inquiring. He would have given worlds, now, to have that German lad back again
with a sound mind.
And now at this moment, when hope was dead, Tom Sawyer came forward with nine yellow tickets, nine red
tickets, and ten blue ones, and demanded a Bible. This was a thunderbolt out of a clear sky. Walters was not
expecting an application from this source for the next ten years. But there was no getting around it −− here were
the certified checks, and they were good for their face. Tom was therefore elevated to a place with the Judge and
the other elect, and the great news was announced from headquarters. It was the most stunning surprise of the
decade, and so profound was the sensation that it lifted the new hero up to the judicial one's altitude, and the
school had two marvels to gaze upon in place of one. The boys were all eaten up with envy −− but those that
suffered the bitterest pangs were those who perceived too late that they themselves had contributed to this hated
splendor by trading tickets to Tom for the wealth he had amassed in selling whitewashing privileges. These
despised themselves, as being the dupes of a wily fraud, a guileful snake in the grass.
The prize was delivered to Tom with as much effusion as the superintendent could pump up under the
circumstances; but it lacked somewhat of the true gush, for the poor fellow's instinct taught him that there was a
mystery here that could not well bear the light, perhaps; it was simply preposterous that this boy had warehoused
two thousand sheaves of Scriptural wisdom on his premises −− a dozen would strain his capacity, without a
doubt.
Amy Lawrence was proud and glad, and she tried to make Tom see it in her face −− but he wouldn't look. She
wondered; then she was just a grain troubled; next a dim suspicion came and went −− came again; she watched; a
furtive glance told her worlds −− and then her heart broke, and she was jealous, and angry, and the tears came and
she hated everybody. Tom most of all (she thought).
Tom was introduced to the Judge; but his tongue was tied, his breath would hardly come, his heart quaked −−
partly because of the awful greatness of the man, but mainly because he was her parent. He would have liked to
fall down and worship him, if it were in the dark. The Judge put his hand on Tom's head and called him a fine
little man, and asked him what his name was. The boy stammered, gasped, and got it out:
"Tom."
"Oh, no, not Tom −− it is −−"
"Thomas."
"Ah, that's it. I thought there was more to it, maybe. That's very well. But you've another one I daresay, and
you'll tell it to me, won't you?"
"Tell the gentleman your other name, Thomas," said Walters, "and say sir. You mustn't forget your manners."
"Thomas Sawyer −− sir."
"That's it! That's a good boy. Fine boy. Fine, manly little fellow. Two thousand verses is a great many −− very,
very great many. And you never can be sorry for the trouble you took to learn them; for knowledge is worth more
than anything there is in the world; it's what makes great men and good men; you'll be a great man and a good
man yourself, some day, Thomas, and then you'll look back and say, It's all owing to the precious Sunday−school
privileges of my boyhood −− it's all owing to my dear teachers that taught me to learn −− it's all owing to the
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 14
good superintendent, who encouraged me, and watched over me, and gave me a beautiful Bible −− a splendid
elegant Bible −− to keep and have it all for my own, always −− it's all owing to right bringing up! That is what
you will say, Thomas −− and you wouldn't take any money for those two thousand verses −− no indeed you
wouldn't. And now you wouldn't mind telling me and this lady some of the things you've learned −− no, I know
you wouldn't −− for we are proud of little boys that learn. Now, no doubt you know the names of all the twelve
disciples. Won't you tell us the names of the first two that were appointed?"
Tom was tugging at a button−hole and looking sheepish. He blushed, now, and his eyes fell. Mr. Walters' heart
sank within him. He said to himself, it is not possible that the boy can answer the simplest question −− why DID
the Judge ask him? Yet he felt obliged to speak up and say:
"Answer the gentleman, Thomas −− don't be afraid."
Tom still hung fire.
"Now I know you'll tell me," said the lady. "The names of the first two disciples were −−"
"DAVID AND GOLIAH!"
Let us draw the curtain of charity over the rest of the scene.
CHAPTER V
ABOUT half−past ten the cracked bell of the small church began to ring, and presently the people began to
gather for the morning sermon. The Sunday−school children distributed themselves about the house and occupied
pews with their parents, so as to be under supervision. Aunt Polly came, and Tom and Sid and Mary sat with her
−− Tom being placed next the aisle, in order that he might be as far away from the open window and the seductive
outside summer scenes as possible. The crowd filed up the aisles: the aged and needy postmaster, who had seen
better days; the mayor and his wife −− for they had a mayor there, among other unnecessaries; the justice of the
peace; the widow Douglass, fair, smart, and forty, a generous, good−hearted soul and well−to−do, her hill
mansion the only palace in the town, and the most hospitable and much the most lavish in the matter of festivities
that St. Petersburg could boast; the bent and venerable Major and Mrs. Ward; lawyer Riverson, the new notable
from a distance; next the belle of the village, followed by a troop of lawn−clad and ribbon−decked young
heart−breakers; then all the young clerks in town in a body −− for they had stood in the vestibule sucking their
cane−heads, a circling wall of oiled and simpering admirers, till the last girl had run their gantlet; and last of all
came the Model Boy, Willie Mufferson, taking as heedful care of his mother as if she were cut glass. He always
brought his mother to church, and was the pride of all the matrons. The boys all hated him, he was so good. And
besides, he had been "thrown up to them" so much. His white handkerchief was hanging out of his pocket behind,
as usual on Sundays −− accidentally. Tom had no handkerchief, and he looked upon boys who had as snobs.
The congregation being fully assembled, now, the bell rang once more, to warn laggards and stragglers, and
then a solemn hush fell upon the church which was only broken by the tittering and whispering of the choir in the
gallery. The choir always tittered and whispered all through service. There was once a church choir that was not
ill−bred, but I have forgotten where it was, now. It was a great many years ago, and I can scarcely remember
anything about it, but I think it was in some foreign country.
The minister gave out the hymn, and read it through with a relish, in a peculiar style which was much admired
in that part of the country. His voice began on a medium key and climbed steadily up till it reached a certain
point, where it bore with strong emphasis upon the topmost word and then plunged down as if from a
spring−board:
Shall I be car−ri−ed toe the skies, on flow'ry BEDS
of ease,
Whilst others fight to win the prize, and sail thro' BLOODy
seas?
He was regarded as a wonderful reader. At church "sociables" he was always called upon to read poetry; and
when he was through, the ladies would lift up their hands and let them fall helplessly in their laps, and "wall" their
eyes, and shake their heads, as much as to say, "Words cannot express it; it is too beautiful, TOO beautiful for this
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 15
mortal earth."
After the hymn had been sung, the Rev. Mr. Sprague turned himself into a bulletin−board, and read off
"notices" of meetings and societies and things till it seemed that the list would stretch out to the crack of doom −−
a queer custom which is still kept up in America, even in cities, away here in this age of abundant newspapers.
Often, the less there is to justify a traditional custom, the harder it is to get rid of it.
And now the minister prayed. A good, generous prayer it was, and went into details: it pleaded for the church,
and the little children of the church; for the other churches of the village; for the village itself; for the county; for
the State; for the State officers; for the United States; for the churches of the United States; for Congress; for the
President; for the officers of the Government; for poor sailors, tossed by stormy seas; for the oppressed millions
groaning under the heel of European monarchies and Oriental despotisms; for such as have the light and the good
tidings, and yet have not eyes to see nor ears to hear withal; for the heathen in the far islands of the sea; and
closed with a supplication that the words he was about to speak might find grace and favor, and be as seed sown
in fertile ground, yielding in time a grateful harvest of good. Amen.
There was a rustling of dresses, and the standing congregation sat down. The boy whose history this book
relates did not enjoy the prayer, he only endured it −− if he even did that much. He was restive all through it; he
kept tally of the details of the prayer, unconsciously −− for he was not listening, but he knew the ground of old,
and the clergyman's regular route over it −− and when a little trifle of new matter was interlarded, his ear detected
it and his whole nature resented it; he considered additions unfair, and scoundrelly. In the midst of the prayer a fly
had lit on the back of the pew in front of him and tortured his spirit by calmly rubbing its hands together,
embracing its head with its arms, and polishing it so vigorously that it seemed to almost part company with the
body, and the slender thread of a neck was exposed to view; scraping its wings with its hind legs and smoothing
them to its body as if they had been coat−tails; going through its whole toilet as tranquilly as if it knew it was
perfectly safe. As indeed it was; for as sorely as Tom's hands itched to grab for it they did not dare −− he believed
his soul would be instantly destroyed if he did such a thing while the prayer was going on. But with the closing
sentence his hand began to curve and steal forward; and the instant the "Amen" was out the fly was a prisoner of
war. His aunt detected the act and made him let it go.
The minister gave out his text and droned along monotonously through an argument that was so prosy that
many a head by and by began to nod −− and yet it was an argument that dealt in limitless fire and brimstone and
thinned the predestined elect down to a company so small as to be hardly worth the saving. Tom counted the
pages of the sermon; after church he always knew how many pages there had been, but he seldom knew anything
else about the discourse. However, this time he was really interested for a little while. The minister made a grand
and moving picture of the assembling together of the world's hosts at the millennium when the lion and the lamb
should lie down together and a little child should lead them. But the pathos, the lesson, the moral of the great
spectacle were lost upon the boy; he only thought of the conspicuousness of the principal character before the
on−looking nations; his face lit with the thought, and he said to himself that he wished he could be that child, if it
was a tame lion.
Now he lapsed into suffering again, as the dry argument was resumed. Presently he bethought him of a treasure
he had and got it out. It was a large black beetle with formidable jaws −− a "pinchbug," he called it. It was in a
percussion−cap box. The first thing the beetle did was to take him by the finger. A natural fillip followed, the
beetle went floundering into the aisle and lit on its back, and the hurt finger went into the boy's mouth. The beetle
lay there working its helpless legs, unable to turn over. Tom eyed it, and longed for it; but it was safe out of his
reach. Other people uninterested in the sermon found relief in the beetle, and they eyed it too. Presently a vagrant
poodle dog came idling along, sad at heart, lazy with the summer softness and the quiet, weary of captivity,
sighing for change. He spied the beetle; the drooping tail lifted and wagged. He surveyed the prize; walked
around it; smelt at it from a safe distance; walked around it again; grew bolder, and took a closer smell; then lifted
his lip and made a gingerly snatch at it, just missing it; made another, and another; began to enjoy the diversion;
subsided to his stomach with the beetle between his paws, and continued his experiments; grew weary at last, and
then indifferent and absent−minded. His head nodded, and little by little his chin descended and touched the
enemy, who seized it. There was a sharp yelp, a flirt of the poodle's head, and the beetle fell a couple of yards
away, and lit on its back once more. The neighboring spectators shook with a gentle inward joy, several faces
went behind fans and handkerchiefs, and Tom was entirely happy. The dog looked foolish, and probably felt so;
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 16
but there was resentment in his heart, too, and a craving for revenge. So he went to the beetle and began a wary
attack on it again; jumping at it from every point of a circle, lighting with his fore−paws within an inch of the
creature, making even closer snatches at it with his teeth, and jerking his head till his ears flapped again. But he
grew tired once more, after a while; tried to amuse himself with a fly but found no relief; followed an ant around,
with his nose close to the floor, and quickly wearied of that; yawned, sighed, forgot the beetle entirely, and sat
down on it. Then there was a wild yelp of agony and the poodle went sailing up the aisle; the yelps continued, and
so did the dog; he crossed the house in front of the altar; he flew down the other aisle; he crossed before the doors;
he clamored up the home−stretch; his anguish grew with his progress, till presently he was but a woolly comet
moving in its orbit with the gleam and the speed of light. At last the frantic sufferer sheered from its course, and
sprang into its master's lap; he flung it out of the window, and the voice of distress quickly thinned away and died
in the distance.
By this time the whole church was red−faced and suffocating with suppressed laughter, and the sermon had
come to a dead standstill. The discourse was resumed presently, but it went lame and halting, all possibility of
impressiveness being at an end; for even the gravest sentiments were constantly being received with a smothered
burst of unholy mirth, under cover of some remote pew−back, as if the poor parson had said a rarely facetious
thing. It was a genuine relief to the whole congregation when the ordeal was over and the benediction
pronounced.
Tom Sawyer went home quite cheerful, thinking to himself that there was some satisfaction about divine
service when there was a bit of variety in it. He had but one marring thought; he was willing that the dog should
play with his pinchbug, but he did not think it was upright in him to carry it off.
CHAPTER VI
MONDAY morning found Tom Sawyer miserable. Monday morning always found him so −− because it began
another week's slow suffering in school. He generally began that day with wishing he had had no intervening
holiday, it made the going into captivity and fetters again so much more odious.
Tom lay thinking. Presently it occurred to him that he wished he was sick; then he could stay home from
school. Here was a vague possibility. He canvassed his system. No ailment was found, and he investigated again.
This time he thought he could detect colicky symptoms, and he began to encourage them with considerable hope.
But they soon grew feeble, and presently died wholly away. He reflected further. Suddenly he discovered
something. One of his upper front teeth was loose. This was lucky; he was about to begin to groan, as a "starter,"
as he called it, when it occurred to him that if he came into court with that argument, his aunt would pull it out,
and that would hurt. So he thought he would hold the tooth in reserve for the present, and seek further. Nothing
offered for some little time, and then he remembered hearing the doctor tell about a certain thing that laid up a
patient for two or three weeks and threatened to make him lose a finger. So the boy eagerly drew his sore toe from
under the sheet and held it up for inspection. But now he did not know the necessary symptoms. However, it
seemed well worth while to chance it, so he fell to groaning with considerable spirit.
But Sid slept on unconscious.
Tom groaned louder, and fancied that he began to feel pain in the toe.
No result from Sid.
Tom was panting with his exertions by this time. He took a rest and then swelled himself up and fetched a
succession of admirable groans.
Sid snored on.
Tom was aggravated. He said, "Sid, Sid!" and shook him. This course worked well, and Tom began to groan
again. Sid yawned, stretched, then brought himself up on his elbow with a snort, and began to stare at Tom. Tom
went on groaning. Sid said:
"Tom! Say, Tom!" [No response.] "Here, Tom! TOM! What is the matter, Tom?" And he shook him and
looked in his face anxiously.
Tom moaned out:
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 17
"Oh, don't, Sid. Don't joggle me."
"Why, what's the matter, Tom? I must call auntie."
"No −− never mind. It'll be over by and by, maybe. Don't call anybody."
"But I must! DON'T groan so, Tom, it's awful. How long you been this way?"
"Hours. Ouch! Oh, don't stir so, Sid, you'll kill me."
"Tom, why didn't you wake me sooner ? Oh, Tom, DON'T! It makes my flesh crawl to hear you. Tom, what is
the matter?"
"I forgive you everything, Sid. [Groan.] Everything you've ever done to me. When I'm gone −−"
"Oh, Tom, you ain't dying, are you? Don't, Tom −− oh, don't. Maybe −−"
"I forgive everybody, Sid. [Groan.] Tell 'em so, Sid. And Sid, you give my window−sash and my cat with one
eye to that new girl that's come to town, and tell her −−"
But Sid had snatched his clothes and gone. Tom was suffering in reality, now, so handsomely was his
imagination working, and so his groans had gathered quite a genuine tone.
Sid flew down−stairs and said:
"Oh, Aunt Polly, come! Tom's dying!"
"Dying!"
"Yes'm. Don't wait −− come quick!"
"Rubbage! I don't believe it!"
But she fled up−stairs, nevertheless, with Sid and Mary at her heels. And her face grew white, too, and her lip
trembled. When she reached the bedside she gasped out:
"You, Tom! Tom, what's the matter with you?"
"Oh, auntie, I'm −−"
"What's the matter with you −− what is the matter with you, child?"
"Oh, auntie, my sore toe's mortified!"
The old lady sank down into a chair and laughed a little, then cried a little, then did both together. This restored
her and she said:
"Tom, what a turn you did give me. Now you shut up that nonsense and climb out of this."
The groans ceased and the pain vanished from the toe. The boy felt a little foolish, and he said:
"Aunt Polly, it SEEMED mortified, and it hurt so I never minded my tooth at all."
"Your tooth, indeed! What's the matter with your tooth?"
"One of them's loose, and it aches perfectly awful."
"There, there, now, don't begin that groaning again. Open your mouth. Well −− your tooth IS loose, but you're
not going to die about that. Mary, get me a silk thread, and a chunk of fire out of the kitchen."
Tom said:
"Oh, please, auntie, don't pull it out. It don't hurt any more. I wish I may never stir if it does. Please don't,
auntie. I don't want to stay home from school."
"Oh, you don't, don't you? So all this row was because you thought you'd get to stay home from school and go
a−fishing? Tom, Tom, I love you so, and you seem to try every way you can to break my old heart with your
outrageousness." By this time the dental instruments were ready. The old lady made one end of the silk thread fast
to Tom's tooth with a loop and tied the other to the bedpost. Then she seized the chunk of fire and suddenly thrust
it almost into the boy's face. The tooth hung dangling by the bedpost, now.
But all trials bring their compensations. As Tom wended to school after breakfast, he was the envy of every
boy he met because the gap in his upper row of teeth enabled him to expectorate in a new and admirable way. He
gathered quite a following of lads interested in the exhibition; and one that had cut his finger and had been a
centre of fascination and homage up to this time, now found himself suddenly without an adherent, and shorn of
his glory. His heart was heavy, and he said with a disdain which he did not feel that it wasn't anything to spit like
Tom Sawyer; but another boy said, "Sour grapes!" and he wandered away a dismantled hero.
Shortly Tom came upon the juvenile pariah of the village, Huckleberry Finn, son of the town drunkard.
Huckleberry was cordially hated and dreaded by all the mothers of the town, because he was idle and lawless and
vulgar and bad −− and because all their children admired him so, and delighted in his forbidden society, and
wished they dared to be like him. Tom was like the rest of the respectable boys, in that he envied Huckleberry his
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 18
gaudy outcast condition, and was under strict orders not to play with him. So he played with him every time he
got a chance. Huckleberry was always dressed in the cast−off clothes of full−grown men, and they were in
perennial bloom and fluttering with rags. His hat was a vast ruin with a wide crescent lopped out of its brim; his
coat, when he wore one, hung nearly to his heels and had the rearward buttons far down the back; but one
suspender supported his trousers; the seat of the trousers bagged low and contained nothing, the fringed legs
dragged in the dirt when not rolled up.
Huckleberry came and went, at his own free will. He slept on doorsteps in fine weather and in empty
hogsheads in wet; he did not have to go to school or to church, or call any being master or obey anybody; he
could go fishing or swimming when and where he chose, and stay as long as it suited him; nobody forbade him to
fight; he could sit up as late as he pleased; he was always the first boy that went barefoot in the spring and the last
to resume leather in the fall; he never had to wash, nor put on clean clothes; he could swear wonderfully. In a
word, everything that goes to make life precious that boy had. So thought every harassed, hampered, respectable
boy in St. Petersburg.
Tom hailed the romantic outcast:
"Hello, Huckleberry!"
"Hello yourself, and see how you like it."
"What's that you got?"
"Dead cat."
"Lemme see him, Huck. My, he's pretty stiff. Where'd you get him ?"
"Bought him off'n a boy."
"What did you give?"
"I give a blue ticket and a bladder that I got at the slaughter−house."
"Where'd you get the blue ticket?"
"Bought it off'n Ben Rogers two weeks ago for a hoop−stick."
"Say −− what is dead cats good for, Huck?"
"Good for? Cure warts with."
"No! Is that so? I know something that's better."
"I bet you don't. What is it?"
"Why, spunk−water."
"Spunk−water! I wouldn't give a dern for spunkwater."
"You wouldn't, wouldn't you? D'you ever try it?"
"No, I hain't. But Bob Tanner did."
"Who told you so!"
"Why, he told Jeff Thatcher, and Jeff told Johnny Baker, and Johnny told Jim Hollis, and Jim told Ben Rogers,
and Ben told a nigger, and the nigger told me. There now!"
"Well, what of it? They'll all lie. Leastways all but the nigger. I don't know HIM. But I never see a nigger that
WOULDN'T lie. Shucks! Now you tell me how Bob Tanner done it, Huck."
"Why, he took and dipped his hand in a rotten stump where the rain−water was."
"In the daytime?"
"Certainly."
"With his face to the stump?"
"Yes. Least I reckon so."
"Did he say anything?"
"I don't reckon he did. I don't know."
"Aha! Talk about trying to cure warts with spunkwater such a blame fool way as that! Why, that ain't a−going
to do any good. You got to go all by yourself, to the middle of the woods, where you know there's a spunk−water
stump, and just as it's midnight you back up against the stump and jam your hand in and say:
'Barley−corn, barley−corn, injun−meal shorts, Spunk−water, spunk−water, swaller these warts,'
and then walk away quick, eleven steps, with your eyes shut, and then turn around three times and walk home
without speaking to anybody. Because if you speak the charm's busted."
"Well, that sounds like a good way; but that ain't the way Bob Tanner done."
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 19
"No, sir, you can bet he didn't, becuz he's the wartiest boy in this town; and he wouldn't have a wart on him if
he'd knowed how to work spunkwater. I've took off thousands of warts off of my hands that way, Huck. I play
with frogs so much that I've always got considerable many warts. Sometimes I take 'em off with a bean."
"Yes, bean's good. I've done that."
"Have you? What's your way?"
"You take and split the bean, and cut the wart so as to get some blood, and then you put the blood on one piece
of the bean and take and dig a hole and bury it 'bout midnight at the crossroads in the dark of the moon, and then
you burn up the rest of the bean. You see that piece that's got the blood on it will keep drawing and drawing,
trying to fetch the other piece to it, and so that helps the blood to draw the wart, and pretty soon off she comes."
"Yes, that's it, Huck −− that's it; though when you're burying it if you say 'Down bean; off wart; come no more
to bother me!' it's better. That's the way Joe Harper does, and he's been nearly to Coonville and most everywheres.
But say −− how do you cure 'em with dead cats?"
"Why, you take your cat and go and get in the graveyard 'long about midnight when somebody that was
wicked has been buried; and when it's midnight a devil will come, or maybe two or three, but you can't see 'em,
you can only hear something like the wind, or maybe hear 'em talk; and when they're taking that feller away, you
heave your cat after 'em and say, 'Devil follow corpse, cat follow devil, warts follow cat, I'm done with ye!' That'll
fetch ANY wart."
"Sounds right. D'you ever try it, Huck?"
"No, but old Mother Hopkins told me."
"Well, I reckon it's so, then. Becuz they say she's a witch."
"Say! Why, Tom, I KNOW she is. She witched pap. Pap says so his own self. He come along one day, and he
see she was a−witching him, so he took up a rock, and if she hadn't dodged, he'd a got her. Well, that very night
he rolled off'n a shed wher' he was a layin drunk, and broke his arm."
"Why, that's awful. How did he know she was a−witching him?"
"Lord, pap can tell, easy. Pap says when they keep looking at you right stiddy, they're a−witching you.
Specially if they mumble. Becuz when they mumble they're saying the Lord's Prayer backards."
"Say, Hucky, when you going to try the cat?"
"To−night. I reckon they'll come after old Hoss Williams to−night."
"But they buried him Saturday. Didn't they get him Saturday night?"
"Why, how you talk! How could their charms work till midnight? −− and THEN it's Sunday. Devils don't slosh
around much of a Sunday, I don't reckon."
"I never thought of that. That's so. Lemme go with you?"
"Of course −− if you ain't afeard."
"Afeard! 'Tain't likely. Will you meow?"
"Yes −− and you meow back, if you get a chance. Last time, you kep' me a−meowing around till old Hays
went to throwing rocks at me and says 'Dern that cat!' and so I hove a brick through his window −− but don't you
tell."
"I won't. I couldn't meow that night, becuz auntie was watching me, but I'll meow this time. Say −− what's
that?"
"Nothing but a tick."
"Where'd you get him?"
"Out in the woods."
"What'll you take for him?"
"I don't know. I don't want to sell him."
"All right. It's a mighty small tick, anyway."
"Oh, anybody can run a tick down that don't belong to them. I'm satisfied with it. It's a good enough tick for
me."
"Sho, there's ticks a plenty. I could have a thousand of 'em if I wanted to."
"Well, why don't you? Becuz you know mighty well you can't. This is a pretty early tick, I reckon. It's the first
one I've seen this year."
"Say, Huck −− I'll give you my tooth for him."
The Adventures Of Tom Sawyer
Mark Twain 20
"Less see it."
Tom got out a bit of paper and carefully unrolled it. Huckleberry viewed it wistfully. The temptation was very
strong. At last he said:
"Is it genuwyne?"
Tom lifted his lip and showed the vacancy.
"Well, all right," said Huckleberry, "it's a trade."
Tom enclosed the tick in the percussion−cap box that had lately been the pinchbug's prison, and the boys
separated, each feeling wealthier than before.
When Tom reached the little isolated frame schoolhouse, he strode in briskly, with the manner of one who had
come with all honest speed. He hung his hat on a peg and flung himself into his seat with business −like alacrity.
0 notes
horrorstoryfanfics · 5 years ago
Text
Summer To Remember: Part Two
Tumblr media
Xavier is so sweet and I feel like he just cares a lot about the people around him. Like especially when he was defending Brooke at the campfire. I feel like he would instantly feel the need to care for you too. 
Okay I’m sorry he makes me soft. 
Warnings: Drug use, swearing, mentions of death, the normal AHS warnings. 
Part One 
We started at the lake, stopping right in front of the docks. Mom droning on about the rules and what we had, stopping lastly on how drowning was the main cause of death. I was completely uninterested until a certain voice chimed in.
"What's second?" He challenged, eyeing my mother.
She didn't say anything as she scolded him with her eyes.
"People." I teased back with a smirk. His lips twisted up as he raised his eyebrows to me, looking back at his friends.
I didn't see the way Mom scoffed as she walked away, but it was only a matter of time until she realized I had the hots for the new counselor.
We all made our way down the path and over to the Dining Hall. Bertie was unloading food and supplies out of the back of a truck.
"And this is Chef Bertie, a Camp Redwood veteran." Mom said proudly.
Bertie smiled as she took the cigarette from her lips.
Xavier casually leaned against the truck. "Dibs," he joked motioning to her and looking over at Ray as he laughed.
Bertie looked over at him laughing slightly, "You wouldn't know what to do with it if you got it, handsome."
Ray, Chet and I started laughing as Xavier was completely taken aback. The shock written on his chiseled features.
"Put those scrawny arms to work and help the lady fill her pantry." She shoved a box into his arms. He took it without a word. "All of you, grab a crate." She rested on the back of the truck and finished her cigarette as we all went to work helping unload the back of the truck.
Ray was still laughing to himself, Xavier bumped him with his crate. "It's not that funny." He sneered.
"Actually it was," I interjected, walking past both of the boys and putting the crate down, bending flirtatiously. "It's what you get for calling dibs on the wrong girl." I winked and brushed my hands off while I walked back out to grab another.
Both boys almost dropped their crates along with their jaws. Xavier's mind was racing but he wasn't quick enough to come up with something else to say.
"Chef Bertie worked here when I was a counselor," My mother said as she stood and supervised us, of course not lifting a finger. "We are so blessed to have her with us."
"I have many good memories of this place," Bertie chimed in, "It's magic up here in the fresh air." She took another hit, "I'm sorry that one bad apple ruined it for everyone."
Everyone stopped and gathered around once again. They clearly tensed up at the slight mention of what happened here.
"The minute I heard Margaret was reopening this place, I was first to volunteer." She raised her hand lightly, then looked over at me, "Well second."
I rolled my eyes, "Hey I had too, what kind of daughter would I be if I didn't." I shrugged.
"A pretty shitty one," Xavier joked behind me, "But lucky me you aren't."
I turned around quickly almost nose to nose with him, smiling. "You aren't lucky yet." I gently pushed his sunglasses back up his nose with my finger.
"Okay!" My Mom clapped, "Let's continue our tour."
I smiled at him once again before following her over to the showers.
"Girls shower in the a.m.,boys in the p.m. Same goes for counselors too." She didn't look back as she walked through and waited for us outside.
Xavier turned over to me feigning a fake look of disappointment,"Guess I won't be able to help you rinse and repeat babe."
"I didn't take you for someone who follows rules, what a pitty." I pouted teasingly as I crossed my arms.  
He pushed his tongue in his cheek before he laughed lightly, shaking his head.
Everyone was clearly disappointed as they looked through the barren wooden outdoor room. There was no ceiling and not even any stalls. We walked through quickly and eventually made it back to the girls cabin and then the boys.
"Girls are red, boys are blue. Don't even try to make purple." She stated as we made our way back out.
I rolled my eyes, feeling another sexual spiel coming on.
"You expect us to be celibate all summer?" Chet asked, not really believing that she was serious.
"Well I'm not banning self-abuse. Although every stroke soils your soul." She said in disgust. "But how could I ever enforce it?" She threw her hands up in defeat.
"It's 1984, Margaret. They're building coed showers in the West Hollywood gym. You ever hear of the sexual revolution?" He looked over to me momentarily, "Sex won." He said matter of factly as him and Ray fist bumped.
"I am aware of the decadence of our era. Women's underwear that shows the buttocks."
"Here we go." I mumbled, crossing my arms and throwing my head back against the cabin door.
"Pornography in your own home," She continued on, "Van Halen."
Montana furrowed her brows and looked over to me, I just gave her a "Ignore her" look.
"I have been fighting the Lord's fight against filth around the world for years. Charles Keating is a dear friend. I was right by his side in Cincinnati during that Larry Flynt trial. And that is why, while still grieving my sweet husband Walter's untimely death, I took a small portion of the large fortune he left to me to buy this camp."
I tensed up at the mention of dad. While it had been years since his death it wasn't something I talked about openly. I shifted my weight and squeezed my arms tightly. It was also something that Mom and I never really talked about together
"I wanted to create a safe, pure, godly and decent place for the children of this country to escape for the summer. It is a dream come true. Now, there aren't many rules but I expect each and every one of you to follow them without exception." Once she finished her monologue she stormed away.
I rolled my eyes yet again, "Don't listen to her." I said. They all looked overwhelmed with how passionate and forceful her attitude was. Unfortunately it's something I've just endured and gotten used to.
"Who's Charles Keating?" Chet asked abruptly.
"He was against porn." I patted his shoulder as I walked away, heading back into the main part of the camp.
The sun was starting to set as the hue of the camp changed to a darker one. The eeiry scene growing once again onto the grounds.
Once everyone brought their bags and things to their respected cabin it was unanimous that we should build a fire. Brooke being overly excited to roast marshmallows and everyone else just excited to get the aesthetic of summer camp started.
There was a fire pit already with logs circled around it, creating a nice seating area. Chet grabbed the wood and threw it in while Ray lit it up. I sat down on a log by myself.
Brooke dug into the marshmallows as soon as Rita brought them over, stabbing them on the end of her stick and happily waiting for it to roast.
I felt the weight of the log shift as someone sat down beside me. I looked over with the corner of my eye to find Xavier giving me his infamous smirk, clearly teasing me again as he scooted closer, our thighs touching gently.
Chet lit up a blunt as Rita swatted at the mosquitoes and bugs that decided to swarm around us now. He passed it over to Ray who took a hit, and then Ray over to Rita.
"I don't smoke that funny weed," She said as she declined his offer, "The only thing I put in my lungs is a Marlboro Red," She smirked as she lit up a cigarette and huffed at it lightly.
"You know that shit will kill ya," Xavier stated.
"We all gotta die somehow," Rita stated quickly. "Any of you ever been camp councilors before?"
We all shook our heads, some stated their no's audibly.
"We just had to get out of LA." Ray said.
"I hear that, I couldn't be in that city another minute with all those gruesome murders going on." Rita stated.
The blunt made it over to me, I took a hit and turned to Xavier. He seemed impressed with the fact I did it.
"Do you want it or not?" I shook it lightly as he just stared at me, the fire crackling in the distance and Brooke talking about how she was attacked by the Night Stalker.
He took it from me quickly, our hands momentarily touching. "Just didn't know that Mommy's good little Christian girl was such a rebel." Half of his face was illuminated by the fire as he smirked down at me.
"Yeah?" I leaned in closely, "There's a lot you don't know about me." I whispered as my eyes trailed down his face, stopping on his lips. I leaned back and directed my attention back to the conversation. Not noticing the hunger in his eyes as our game of cat and mouse got a little more interesting.
"24 years ago. That's when they closed this place down." Rita was about to start telling the story of the massacre.
"Rita," Xavier groaned, "I understand the tradition, and usually I'm cool with that, but our friend Brooke here had a for-real assault, and we're just not in the mood for a bullshit ghost story." He passed the blunt over to Montana.
I looked over to Brooke who was no longer roasting marshmallows, who looked absolutely scared to death.
"It's not bullshit. And there was no ghost," Rita went on, "I'll be honest with you. I've never been a nurse at a camp before and you've never been councilors. So how did we get these jobs?" We all paused listening to her, "That's because anybody that knows what happened here, doesn't want to be here. This is the site of the worst Camp massacre of all time."
I looked down as I remembered the story my Mom told me, about how she barely survived and the reason she doesn't have her ear. Xavier felt me stiffen as he scooted closer, letting me know he was here. "Come on Rita.." His voice grew in annoyance at the fact she kept going.
"His name was Benjamin Richter but most call him Mr.Jingles." She stood up for dramatic effect, "Richter was drafted into the Vietnam War and he found his calling. He had the highest kill rate in his company. He had a nasty habit of collecting trophies from his enemies. Cutting off their ears and cutting them into a necklace."
"Jesus Christ Rita," I snapped, "If my Mom hears you talking about this she's going to lose her shit." My fist clenched remembering how hurt she was whenever she would be reminded of that horrible night. Xavier looked at me with concern, putting his hand over mine in an attempt to calm me down. I just looked over at him, not really wanting Rita to continue in the fear it would set Mom off.
Rita just shrugged as she continued on, "The only job he could get was here, nobody knows why he snapped...but one night he took a knife and slaughters an entire cabin. Ten victims in all."
"You're wrong," a voice chimed in. We all looked over and saw my Mom approaching the fire slowly everyone grew still at her appearance and Xavier's hand left mine. "Alcohol is not allowed," she took the flask from Ray's hand and poured it onto the dirt, "Neither are those funny smelling cigarettes." She looked over to Chet who had it dangling limply in his fingertips.
"So nothing happened here?" Xavier asked, confused.
"No, there was a massacre here. But only nine died not ten." She walked just in front of the fire, where everyone could see her.
"So Mr.Jingles is real?!" Brooke asked, her voice rose with fear.
Mom didn't say anything as she turned her head to the side and moved her hair, revealing the spot where her left ear should be, but isn't. Brooke gasped while looking away, seeming like she was going to hurl.
Xavier's brows were furrowed as he looked from my mom to me, trying to make sure I was okay. I didn't say anything as she continued on with the story I'd heard only once before. She sat on an empty log as she began to go into detail of the events she went through.
"And I thought that will be the end of it," She recalls the trial, "But I can't escape him. And that's why I bought this camp. To reopen it and take all of my darkest memories and make them into something bright."
"Duddee..." Chet shakes his head, "That's heavy."
Xavier's hand graced over mine again as his eyes scanned my face. He wasn't ready for all of this heavy backstory, he didn't even know that any of this happened. Let alone that it followed you your whole life.
Mom dusted off her shorts as she stood, "Alright well, we have a lot to do with the kids coming in two days. And this is the last time I want anyone talking about that horrible night." She walked away into the night as everyone sat still, horrified.
Everyone eventually got up, except for Xavier and I who just sat there a bit longer.
"Are you okay?" He asked, genuine concern gracing his features.
It made my heart tinge how caring he appeared to be. I just gave him a reassuring smile as I nodded my head, "Yeah, I'm good."
He smiled back lightly and stood up, reaching his hand out to me. "Then let's go inside before we catch our death."
I took his hand as I got to my feet, hesitating to let go once I got up. Eventually I did and we headed back up to the girls cabin.
Next Part
Tags: @felicityofbakerstreet
38 notes · View notes
desdemonafictional · 4 years ago
Text
Guess WHAT I’m doing hxh fic again, we’ll see if it goes anywhere, but here’s a bit of action/adventure
--
Gon had left his home island in the eastern sea and arrived on the mainland just in time to catch a ride on a caravan headed west, towards the capital of the Seaside Empire. The last letter his aunt had received from his father was marked with the seal of the Capital, sent almost twelve years before, and attached to a dagger that Mito had presented to Gon, reluctantly, on his birthday. 
“So what did the letter say?” Kurapika had asked him, as they sat around the campfire that first night with the caravan.
“Well…” Gon had shrugged with some embarrassment. “It said I should take the dagger for an inheritance and not chase after him, since he’s as good as dead to me now that he left me behind for someone else to raise.”
Kurapika’s eyebrows went up. “And yet here you are, chasing after him.”
Gon wrinkled his nose. “I just don’t think it’s a very good trade! I’m going to find him, and give him the dagger back, and make him show me how to be a treasure hunter like he is. And then it’ll be fair.”
“Suppose he doesn’t want to teach you?” Kurapika asked.
“He will,” Gon said, with perfect confidence. “I’m his son! When he sees how serious I am, he’ll have to do it.”
On Kurapika’s right, Leorio was slumped back against a stump and examining the dagger in question, holding it up against the firelight. “Sure doesn’t seem like anything special,” he remarked. “Maybe it’s just some junk he picked up. Maybe he isn’t even a real treasure hunter.”
“He is!” Gon said. “Everyone says he was an amazing treasure hunter, even before he left! He killed a dragon when he was only fifteen years old! That’s amazing, isn’t it?”
Since that first night, on the coast, their caravan had come many days travel deeper into the mainland. The passed through the swamplands, through a great rushing river that had carried away a dozen less cautious of their fellow travelers , and was passing now through the Ruined Lands, a wilderness spotted at every turn with the wreckage of some ancient stone empire.
About a day’s journey into the Ruined Lands, the poplars and willows and birds gave way to a standing stone circle straight in the middle of their path.
“At this point,” the head of the caravan—a seasoned merchant from the north—announced to the group at large, “we’ll have to go around! It’s bad luck to travel through the circle, and the road ahead is rife with all kinds of danger. They say a dragon lives inside one of the burial mounds that way, and the last thing we want is to be noticed by a dragon.”
There was a ragged shout of boos from the crowd. With their many pack animals and unwieldy wooden cartwheels, none of the travelers relished the idea of lugging their possessions through the narrow foot trails and underbrush of the forest.  While they were embroiled in argument with the head of the caravan, Gon and his friends hung back from the mess and surveyed the hill with the  standing circle with some interest.
“I suppose the road must lead through it for a reason,” Kurapika said, considering the deeply worn ruts in the turf at his foot. “Maybe there was originally a pilgrimage that ran this way.”
“Pretty impressive it’s still standing,” Leorio said. “But I’m more interested in those burial mounds he mentioned. I wonder if they’ve already been looted, or if there’s still any treasure left in there.”
“Did you miss the part where he mentioned a dragon?” Kurapika asked dryly. “Or can’t you hear anything past the sound of cash registers?”
While Leorio scoffed, Gon scaled the side of a vardo wagon. From its curved wooden roof, he was able to see past the circle and into the countryside ahead, where the heather gave way to woods again.
There was sudden shouting and banging from the other side of the wagon, and Gon slid across the roof just in time to see a trio of travelers shove the caravan head down onto the turf.
“Listen here,” one of them said, while the other two bore down on the more experienced traveler, “we’ve got an appointment to make in the capital, and we’re not about to lose a day mucking around in the shrubs with all these donkeys and chicken coops. You’re gonna take us through the straightway, and you’re gonna do it now.”
Gon climbed to his feet. “Hey!” he shouted down. “Leave him alone, he’s just doing his job!”
In a moment, Kurapika and Leorio had rushed around the side of the vardo to see what the fuss was about. Leorio stiffened; Kurapika reached for his batons. Immediately a handful of random travelers reached for their own weapons, short swords and hooks and hammers, and closed ranks around the belligerent trio.
“Everyone, please,” the caravan head said, one elbow planted in the dirt. He lifted the other hand in a plea for peace. “A caravan should never quarrel within itself. We are all we have out here in this wilderness.”
The skinnier one of the trio planted his boot in the man’s back and ground down. “Fine by us, we don’t want a fight. We just wanna get going. You gonna do the smart thing, old man?”
There was a tightness in the air, as Leorio and Kurapika both drew themselves down into a coiled stance, ready to spring. The share of travelers who had sided with the trio, more than a third of the whole group, also tensed.
“Yes,” the headman said, at last, “fine, we will go on with the straightway. If that’s what the group wants, that’s what we’ll do. Let me up.”
The tension remained, as the trio let the headman up and the man brushed himself off. Gon jumped down between Kurapika and Leorio, who were putting away their own weapons with some reluctance.
“That isn’t right,” Gon said. “He’s the most experienced traveler, if he says the road is dangerous, we should be listening to him.”
“I agree,” Kurapika said. “All the same, there’s strength in numbers. I would be hesitant to break off from the caravan, even if I knew the way to the capital perfectly myself.”
“We’re at the mercy of the whole stupid mob of ‘em,” Leorio agreed, his eyes narrowing.
And it was on that grim note that they set off again, amongst the rolling coops and covered wagons, and passed beneath the wide stone lintel of the standing circle.
Kurapika, as he had eventually revealed, was on his way to the capital to become an enforcer; that was to say, a warrant officer, a hound of the empire. Leorio was traveling to find a doctor willing to teach him medicine, and hopefully apprentice himself to the craft. Neither could afford to delay their travel another season, even if the caravan they found themselves attached to was in conflict with their own principles.
In the woods deep beyond the standing circle, beneath the canopy of seasonless beeches, Gon paused mid-step and turned his head north.
“What?” Leorio said, bending down. “You hear something?”
“What could he possibly hear over this racket,” Kurapika murmured, as the coop of squawking chickens rolled along behind him.
Gon shook his head. “I smell…” He frowned. “I smell sweat. And old blood.”
Leorio and Kurapika met each other’s worried gazes at the same time. “Let’s get the headman,” Kurapika said, just as the first arrow flew out of the treeline and embedded itself in the post of the chicken coop.
In the same moment, the three of them grabbed hands and threw themselves through the gap in the train of wagons, taking shelter behind the wall of the next vardo as a hail of arrows punched into the whole north facing side of the wagon train.
“Bandits!” Kurapika shouted, his voice almost lost in the eruption of chaos.
“We need to get out of the open,” Leorio said. The checkered brocade of his carpet bag swung as he gestured to the southern treeline. “We’re sitting ducks out here.”
“The headman,” Gon said, suddenly. “We have to get him.”
“Gon, we don’t have—” Kurapika looked down just soon enough to realize Gon was no longer there, “—time. Oh.”
He looked at Leorio. Leorio let out a sharp breath and then straightened up. “Tell you the truth, I wouldn’t feel right leaving the guy either. He tried to warn us.”
“Yes,” Kurapika said, turning to the front end of the caravan. “Yes, I suppose so.”
The whooping, mounted shapes of bandits were pouring out of the woods—probably not more than a dozen, but in their staggered chaos they had the feeling of being an endless flood to the unprepared travelers. It was pandemonium as Gon and his friends raced to reach the headman; animals in disarray, humans shouting and scrambling for control of them. A mule tore free of his leadline and broke for the southern woods, scattering wax-wrapped packets across the ground as he went.
They found the headman slumped and clutching an arrow embedded in his upper arm, blood blooming through his blue wool sleeve. He looked up as Gon reached him, confusion and pain in a mixture across his features.
“Let us help you, sir,” Gon said, and braced the man so that he could get to his feet again.
“Do you know anything about these bandits?” Kurapika asked. “How they operate?”
“I don’t know this band,” the headman told them, his voice tight. “I don’t know if they kill travelers or leave them alive.”
“Well let’s not stick around to find out,” Leorio said, and tossed his carpetbag against his back.
Kurapika hooked the headman’s uninjured arm over his own shoulder and then they were off, darting across the ditch and over the shoulder of the road. There was a shout from somewhere behind them; a twang, and the dire whistle of fletching passing through air. Kurapika was caught with dread—what could he do but keep going, even with the weight of the headman dragging him down? They had rescued the man, it would be the height of dishonor to abandon him now.
The whistle broke suddenly into a gruesome thock as it hit human flesh, but it was neither Kurapika nor the headman who cried out. Leorio let out a pained grunt, from much closer behind Kurapika than he had been before.
They hit the treeline. Another arrow embedded itself in the trunk of a tree, and then they were safe among the old growth of the forest, beyond the reach of arrows. Kurapika could finally turn his head and see what had become of Leorio.
White faced, grimacing, Leorio was only a few steps behind. At first there was no sign of the arrow, but then it dawned on Kurapika that the shaft of the arrow had passed through the carpetbag over Leorio’s shoulder and buried itself in his shoulder blade.
“Oh,” Kurapika said. “You’re…”
Leorio’s grimace twisted into something echoing a smile. “Don’t sweat it,” he said. “It’s not that deep. Better me than you guys, anyway.”
“Leorio…” Kurapika said.
Gon appeared at his elbow, making a thoughtful circle around his back. “We need to get that loose. Normally it’s better to leave them in, but the shaft is pinning your bag to your back, and you won’t be able to let go of the handle or the weight will snap it.”
“We can’t do it out here,” Leorio retorted. “Who knows if they’ll send someone after us. We need shelter, somewhere defensible.”
Gon tapped his boot a couple times, and then he said, “I’ll scout ahead, I’m faster and uninjured. You guys just keep moving south, and I’ll find you again once I’ve found a place.”
“Very well,” Kurapika said. “Go on ahead. I’m sure with your experience you can find something suitable for all of us.”
“You sure?” Leorio said. “That just leaves the two of us.”
Kurapika smiled at him, just past the bend of the headman’s elbow. “I think we’ll do just fine together.”
Leorio went red. Kurapika started moving forward again, leaving him where he stood.
17 notes · View notes
noobsomeexagerjunk · 4 years ago
Text
Left Undone
Ted didn’t want to babysit Bill’s daughter. He didn’t like Bill, and Bill didn’t like him. Why did he have to be the only one in the office who was free for the weekend? Alice didn’t exactly want to be babysat either. She’s too old for that!
Little did Ted and Alice know how much fun they were going to have.
(AU wherein Alice has not dated Deb yet, Bill hasn’t divorced yet either; MASSIVE SPOILERS for BoJack Horseman Season 3 and Moulin Rouge! are discussed)
Friday Prologue | Saturday Chapter | Sunday Chapter | Monday Epilogue
Alice woke up fairly well-rested Saturday morning, forgetting for a second that she wasn’t in her own house.
Ted Spankoffski’s house had 3 bedrooms. One was a master bedroom where Ted slept and also did any other non-CCRP related work. Another was a room where Ted’s nerdy brother stayed for the Summer; ever since Ted got himself a house, his younger brother would stay over at his place during holidays and academic breaks.
Then there was the spare guest bedroom Alice was in where Ted had to set up for her the previous evening. It was very plain.
She went downstairs, explored a little, then found no one. She went back up, knocking on Ted’s bedroom door. No response.
Alice then decided to wash up instead, to feel fresh in the morning. She did all the work in the downstairs bathroom (Ted specifically told her to use that particular bathroom), leaving it as neat as it was before she came to the house.
She tried to knock on the door again, the increased strength of her rapping revealing to her that the room had not been locked, or closed properly for that matter.
She peeked in to find Ted who was still asleep, clutching a laptop like a stuffed toy. His shirt, boxers, and socks tied together with his slumped figure, which also seemed intertwined with the bedsheets. There were used tissues all over the bed, some on the floor making a trail to a semi-used paper towel roll. There were an empty bowl and two empty beer bottles on the bedside table. It reeked of Corona and clearly imported Honey Butter Chips.
Alice stepped in to try to wake Ted up, but the floor creaking below her was enough to make him jolt awake.
“Who the fu-“ Ted calmed down from the shock of waking up so suddenly, “A-Alice?!  Shit, I forgot you’re here,”
“I-Is there anything I can eat?”
Ted rose from his position, sitting upward on his bed, “...are you allergic to eggs? Milk?”
“No, I’m not allergic to either.”
“Good,” Ted yawned, getting up and stretching, “because my fridge is fucking empty.”
“I noticed.”
That was hyperbole...sort of. The only breakfast that could be made from Ted’s pantry was egg toast and cereal. There was enough for both of them to finish all of said egg toast and cereal.
“What were you watching last night?” Alice asked Ted, playing with her fruit loops a little.
“Hm?” He swallowed the last bite of his toast with instant coffee.
“You were crying for about thirty minutes; I couldn't sleep-”
“I-It was a sad episode, alright?!” Ted was slightly embarrassed, hesitating to take another sip of coffee, “That fucking baby seahorse will never know...”
Alice raised a brow, unaware of the reference. She ate some more cereal.
“Don’t give me that look, Alice!” That was Bill’s glare, alright, “BoJack Horseman is a very good show!”
“And you binged the whole thing last night?”
“It’s the new season. I’ve got two episodes left before I finish.” Ted then proceeded to chug down what was left of his coffee.
“My laptop died during my binge but it was late and I was just,” He blew a raspberry, “...I needed to sleep.”
“I’ve done that before, not gonna lie,” Alice place down the spoon, done with her breakfast, “Though, the show I watched was kinda...yeah, it was kinda shitty,”
“Let me guess: you’ve watched it because someone hot’s in it,”
Alice blushed, “I-It’s not just that!”
“Hey hey hey,” Ted chuckled, “I’m guilty of that, I ain’t judging.”
Alice hmphed, “Should I watch that—what’s that show?”
“BoJack Horseman?”
“Yeah.”
“Hm,” Ted then began cleaning up by taking Alice’s utensils, stacking them with his, “it starts weak but gets so much better, like real fucking better. Dunno if you’re old enough to watch it though,”
“I’ve seen some pretty adult stuff! Mom makes me watch Tarantino movies with her, at least whenever Dad's not around sometimes,"
Ted nodded at Alice’s mother’s taste in film, “Aight, but that show just...it just hits somewhere really hard when you’re in your early thirties full of regret and with no discernible life direction but, hey! If you can take it, I’d be impressed.”
Alice blinked, “What? Is it like, psychological horror? The kind rooted in some comedically timed socio-political commentary?”
“Well, arguably.” Ted then got up to bring the dishes in his hands into the kitchen.
“...where can I find it?” She asked with mild interest.
“Netflix,” The sound of dishes landing in a sink was heard from Alice’s seat, “It’s a cartoon too, and like, about a bunch of animals, if those kinds of things float your boat.”
Alice never made it past Episode 1 when she tried to watch it herself, convinced Ted’s taste was shit. Personally, she will regret that.
The rest of that morning left Alice and Ted to their own individual devices. Alice typed away some interesting plots and ideas on her phone. Ted went to finish the last episodes of that sad horse show.
An hour before the time Alice would usually eat lunch, she had been cycling around various plotlines for a potential...well, something. Alice knew she just had to write something.
She was in the living area of the house when she heard Ted sloppily walk down the stairs. His eyes were teary.
"Are you alright, Mr. Spankoffski?" She looked at him with concern.
Ted shakily neared her, hesitating to sit on the couch next to her. He instead placed a languid hand on one of the couch's armrests.
"Please don't die on me, Alice, oh my God..."
He broke into sobs. Alice could only stare at this behavior in confusion.
"Did something bad happen in the show, or...?"
"Fuck, it got worse!" He sniffled, "A-And not, like, n-not in a bad writing context--that show's writing is the shit, Alice! But fuck! F-Fuck!"
Sarah Lynn was not supposed to die, but she did die and the fact left Ted devastated. A part of him knew it was gonna happen as he saw the old man, er, horse, and the poor girl in the motel, missing the Oscars. (Then again, that show had a penchant for hollowing, tragic endings per episode.)
Even in entertainment, in his favorite shows to watch, Ted Spankoffski knew better than to hope. It was more realistic for him.
"You can sit down," Alice moved aside to give Ted space to sit.
Ted cried as he sat next to her, "God, I'm sorry y-you had to see me like this,"
"I've...I-I've had worse breakdowns over a show. I-It's all good."
TV and Movie homophobia still haunted the teenage girl.
It's things like that, whether extravagant or subtle in delivery, that prompted her to write and clarify in any way that she could if only to fight. Alice Woodward was the kind of girl who refused to despair.
"Yeah, A-Alice?"
"Mhm," She nodded, quickly writing "character gets sucked into a tv show???" in her phone's Notes app.
"What if we watched something less depressing instead? You can watch it with me, Alice!" Ted breathed, "You're not bored, are you?"
She added "literally? figuratively? ehhh let the watchers decide??? kshfukdhivg" then kept her phone.
"No! N-No, I know how to keep myself, um, b-busy," Alice then shifted herself into a more comfortable position, "What movies do you have?"
Ted paused before answering, realizing he was hungry.
“You pick,” He said, getting up, “You want pizza with that?”
Alice nodded eagerly, watching Ted head for his phone.
“Wait, what am I supposed to pick?”
“There’s a bunch of CD cases in the drawer under the center table—it’s right in front of you!” Ted's voice decrescendoed as he headed upstairs.
“Drawer?” Alice wondered to herself, bending down to inspect the described center table. There was in fact a drawer.
She pulled it open to find bunches of CD cases, charging wires, and what clearly seemed to be unusable gadgets or “e-junk” as her father would, in a terribly corny way, put it.
Alice noticed a notable amount of movie musicals in one bundle of CD cases. The one that got her attention was Moulin Rouge!, unfamiliar with the title and very taken by the red-haired beauty printed on the cover. There was Jesus Christ Superstar, West Side Story, Rocky Horror Picture Show, and a bunch of Disney Princess movies. Upon further inspection of the non-musical movies, Ted had a diverse taste in film, though it was primarily pretty basic in Alice's opinion, minus a few exceptions.
She closed the drawer, further inspecting the Moulin Rouge CD cover by reading the synopsis on the back. An aspiring writer falls in love with a courtesan but other things get in the way? Alice could not blame the writer, in fact, she was quick to identify with him, even if she had not seen the movie yet.
“Alice?” Ted called from upstairs, “Are you allergic to anything I should know?”
“No,” She called back, playing with the CD cover.
“Good! I’m getting us a Bacon Surprise,”
“Alright,” Apparently Ted chose to order from that  Witchwood Ovens Shop downtown.
“What movie do you wanna watch?” Ted asked as he went back down. Alice showed him the CD cover.
“Moulin Rouge?” He mispronounced, “I actually have that in there?”
Alice handed the cover to Ted as he approached her, “I don’t think I’ve seen this one,”
“No shit, Alice. This movie’s got prostitution; if I know your Dad enough,” He stared at the cover, trying to remember when he got it, "he would make sure you'd never see it. God, I remember seeing this in the theater, like, when I was about your—h-how old are you again?"
"Fifteen, but I'll be sixteen later this year,"
"Eh, close enough," Ted then placed the CD cover down, ready to set up the television set in the living room.
"Nicole Kidman, man..." Ted dusted the CD player, plugging the TV into it, "She was the fucking best in that thing."
"Do you even know what happens in it?" Alice asked as she watched Ted at work, "Or were you just hoping Nicole Kidman would step on you?"
"Don't you fucking shame me, Alice!" Ted gasped back as he blushed, "If you had any taste in women, you'd want the same Goddamn thing."
Ted guessed correctly, keeping the girl from returning his snark.
It was around the Elephant Love Medley when the pizza arrived. Ted was kind enough to pause for Alice as he went to get the pizza. Alice was still recovering from the exhilaration of the past few songs, overwhelmed with the crowd-like effect of the cheesy-Jukebox mashups that introduced Christian to that infamous dancehall, the gratuitous use of slow-mo effects, and the ridiculous use of that Can-Can. It was "Spectacular Spectacular" indeed!
Alice almost choked on her pizza during the Like A Virgin scene. It was also very clear to her, as they watched, that Ted must've forgotten a lot of what had happened in the film given some of his reactions. Ted cursed The Duke repeatedly, particularly at that scene when he found out about the true nature of Christian's play.
Ted believed that he should've seen Satine dying coming. He saw this movie before. The movie literally said so right at the start!
Why, as he watched, did he want that happy ending when the opposite was inevitably going to happen?!
Something about Satine charmed Ted, in a particularly nightmarish way. The idea of further thinking about it was repressed repeatedly, refusing to confront the roots of it all. Surely it was just him being a horny bastard, right? Right?
This totally had nothing to do with the fact that Satine had vibrant red hair, cerulean eyes, polished milky skin, and a beautiful figure.
This totally had nothing to do with how familiar this fictional character seemed to be, resembling someone Ted remembered with intense, bittersweet longing.
This totally had nothing to do with the sight of Satine breathing her last breath on a bed of roses reminding Ted of a memory that he swore hadn't happened yet.
Or it did happen?
Why debate when it happened when it shouldn't have happened at all? It wasn't supposed to happen, whatever that thing was that Ted didn't need to remember at the moment. And yet...
She didn't make a sound. Heartbreak was never so loud.
Alice's sniffling brought Ted back to reality. Ted put a hand on her shoulder.
"God, I-I look so stupid," Alice chuckled out from her tears, rubbing her teary eyes, "they literally say it in the beginning, ugh!"
Ted coddled her closer to him so he could hug her but Alice recoiled back.
"T-Thanks, but we both smell like pizza," Ted nodded back in response.
As he cleaned up the living area, he asked Alice, "How was the movie?"
"It was pretty cheesy," She pulled out her phone again, inspired to write, "but kinda fun? Like, you don't get fun movies with this much energy, at least, when I try to compare, well. You know what I mean."
"Yeah," Ted replied absent-mindedly, "It certainly brings back memories of, well,  certain times."
"I think it kinda comes off as an epic-like piece,"
"No need to wax academic, Alice,"
"You asked for it!"
"I asked about how it was, not for an essay about its themes and shit!" Ted straightened himself up with a chuckle, "It's just a movie, after all."
"It hits different though," She spat back, focused now on her phone.
Witchwood Oven Shop pizzas were notably heavier on the stomach compared to their competitors. Any leftover pizza the two had for lunch that day, Ted proceeded to reheat for dinner. He scavenged his refrigerator for any packs of instant lemonade, which were thankfully there, and prepared two glasses for the two of them.
It was a shitty excuse for dinner, but Alice didn't seem to mind. She was very concentrated on her phone.
"What'cha writing about?"
Alice tilted her phone as to hide it, "It's not really much yet. It's all a bunch of prompts so far."
"You can pitch me stuff," He swallowed a bite, "Which ones really get to you?"
"Well," She hesitated.
"Well?"
"I-I've got a traveling adventure in a fancy, cultured but mysterious new town..."
"Anything else?"
"Still deciding whether I should make it a horror or a comedy. Besides that, it's all gonna rest on a foundation of romance between our main character, and, well..."
"Who?"
"I don't know! It's all I got so far!"
"Hey, it's not bad," Ted sipped his lemonade, "You know, I bet with enough time, it can become something really fucking great. I'd be invested if this was a movie or a staged production of sorts, I don't know,"
"Y-You think it's good, Mr. Spankoffski?"
"Oh hell yeah," He placed the glass down, "Not to be cheesy, but romance really gets me."
"Yeah, same."
"Have you considered making it some sort of horror-comedy romance? I would love it if you could pull it off."
9 notes · View notes